diff --git a/tn_1TH.tsv b/tn_1TH.tsv new file mode 100644 index 0000000..077a85d --- /dev/null +++ b/tn_1TH.tsv @@ -0,0 +1,530 @@ +Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note +front:intro jp2y 0 # Pengantar Kitab 1 Tesalonika\n\n## Bagian 1: Pengantar Umum\n\n### Garis besar kitab 1 Tesalonika\n\n1. Pembukaan dan berkat (1:1)\n2. Mengucap syukur untuk jemaat di Tesalonika (1:2-10)\n * Doa syukur (1:2-5)\n * Jemaat Tesalonika sebagai teladan (1:6-10)\n3. Kunjungan dengan jemaat Tesalonika (2:1-16)\n * Bagaimana Paulus dan rekan-rekan sekerjanya bersikap (2:1-12)\n * Bagaimana jemaat Tesalonika menanggapi (2:13-16)\n4. Perpisahan dengan jemaat Tesalonika (2:17-20)\n5. Kunjungan Timotius dan kabar baik (3:1-10)\n6. Sebuah berkat (3:11-13)\n7. Pengajaran tentang moralitas seksual (4:1-8)\n8. Pengajaran tentang kasih Kristen (4:9-12)\n9. Pengajaran tentang hari Tuhan (4:13-5:11)\n * Orang-orang percaya yang telah meninggal dan hari Tuhan (4:13-18)\n * Waktu terjadinya hari Tuhan (5:1-11)\n10. Perintah-perintah Terakhir (5:11-22)\n11. Penutup (5:23-28)\n\n### Siapa yang menulis kitab 1 Tesalonika?\n\nPenulis mengidentifikasi dirinya sebagai Paulus sang rasul, dan ia menulis bahwa Silwanus dan Timotius setuju dengan apa yang dikatakannya. Bahkan, di sepanjang surat ini, Paulus sering menggunakan kata ganti orang jamak "kami" dan "kita" untuk merujuk kepada dirinya sendiri, Silwanus, dan Timotius. Paulus berasal dari kota Tarsus tetapi tinggal di Yerusalem. Dia dikenal sebagai Saulus di awal kehidupannya. Sebelum menjadi seorang Kristen, Paulus adalah seorang Farisi, dan dia menganiaya orang-orang Kristen. Setelah menjadi Kristen, ia melakukan perjalanan beberapa kali ke seluruh Kekaisaran Romawi untuk menceritakan tentang Yesus kepada orang-orang. Paulus pertama kali mengunjungi jemaat di Tesalonika pada saat ia melakukan perjalanan kedua kalinya ke seluruh Kekaisaran Romawi (lihat [Kisah Para Rasul 17:1-10](../kisah/17/01.md)). Ketika orang-orang mulai menganiaya orang-orang Kristen di Tesalonika, Paulus pergi ke sebuah kota bernama Berea. Kemudian ia pergi ke Athena dan kemudian ke Korintus, di mana Timotius bertemu dengannya setelah mengunjungi jemaat di Tesalonika (lihat [Kisah Para Rasul 17:10-18:5](../kis/17/10.md)). Ketika Timotius memberi tahu Paulus tentang keadaan jemaat di Tesalonika, Paulus menulis surat ini sebagai tanggapannya. \n\n### Tentang apakah kitab 1 Tesalonika ini?\n\nPaulus menulis 1 Tesalonika untuk mempererat hubungannya dengan jemaat di Tesalonika dan untuk mengajarkan lebih banyak lagi tentang Injil kepada mereka. Ia perlu melakukan kedua hal ini karena, setelah ia memberitakan Injil kepada jemaat di Tesalonika, penganiayaan memaksanya untuk pergi setelah beberapa minggu.\n\nPertama, Paulus ingin jemaat Tesalonika mengetahui betapa ia sangat memperhatikan mereka dan betapa ia sangat senang dan bersyukur ketika ia mengetahui dari Timotius bahwa mereka baik-baik saja. Untuk mencapai tujuan ini, ia mengingatkan jemaat Tesalonika tentang bagaimana ia dan rekan-rekan sekerjanya bertindak, ia mengingatkan jemaat Tesalonika tentang bagaimana mereka menanggapi, dan ia memberi tahu mereka betapa bahagianya ia dengan kabar baik yang Timotius bawa. Ia menceritakan semua hal ini untuk mempererat hubungannya dengan mereka.\n\nSetelah mencapai tujuan ini, ia melanjutkan ke tujuan kedua, yaitu mengajarkan lebih banyak hal tentang Injil kepada mereka. Ada kemungkinan bahwa dia tidak dapat mengajarkan beberapa topik ini sebelum dia harus meninggalkan mereka. Topik utama yang ia sampaikan adalah tentang hari Tuhan, waktu di masa depan ketika Yesus akan datang kembali ke dunia ini. Dia juga mengajarkan mereka tentang moralitas seksual, mengasihi sesama orang percaya, Roh Kudus, nubuat, dan beberapa topik lainnya. \n\n### Bagaimana seharusnya judul kitab ini diterjemahkan?\n\nPara penerjemah dapat memilih untuk menyebut kitab ini dengan judul tradisionalnya, "Tesalonika Pertama" atau "1 Tesalonika". Atau mereka dapat memilih judul yang berbeda, seperti "Surat Pertama Paulus kepada Jemaat di Tesalonika" atau "Surat Pertama kepada Jemaat di Tesalonika". (Lihat: [[rc://*/ta/man/terjemahan/terjemahan-nama]])## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### Seperti apakah kota Tesalonika?\n\n\n\nKota Tesalonika adalah sebuah kota penting di provinsi Makedonia, yang terletak di bagian utara wilayah yang sekarang kita sebut sebagai Yunani. Tesalonika menjadi penting karena memiliki pelabuhan dan jalan-jalan utama yang melintasi kota itu dan karena kota itu adalah ibu kota provinsi. Karena merupakan kota yang penting, di sana terdapat banyak orang dari berbagai budaya dan agama, termasuk orang Yahudi. Kebanyakan orang di kota ini menyembah banyak dewa, termasuk para kaisar Roma.\n\n### "Hari Tuhan" dan "kedatangan Tuhan"\n\nFrasa "hari Tuhan" mengacu pada waktu tertentu di masa depan ketika Yesus akan datang kembali ke dunia ini. Paulus menyebut peristiwa ini sebagai "kedatangan Tuhan". Orang Kristen percaya bahwa, ketika Yesus datang kembali, Allah akan membangkitkan semua orang, dan Yesus akan menghakimi semua orang, menghukum orang-orang yang tidak percaya, dan memberi pahala kepada orang-orang yang percaya. Dalam surat ini, Paulus mengajar jemaat Tesalonika tentang apa yang akan terjadi pada orang-orang percaya yang telah meninggal sebelum "hari" itu (lihat [4:13-18](../04/13.md)). Ia juga mengajar jemaat Tesalonika tentang bagaimana mengharapkan dan mempersiapkan diri untuk "hari" itu (lihat [5:1-11](../05/01.md)).\n\n### Mengapa jemaat Tesalonika mengkhawatirkan orang-orang percaya yang telah meninggal?\n\nAda kemungkinan Paulus harus meninggalkan jemaat Tesalonika sebelum ia selesai mengajar tentang apa yang akan terjadi ketika Yesus datang kembali. Mungkin juga jemaat Tesalonika berpikir bahwa Yesus akan datang kembali sebelum ada orang percaya yang meninggal. Kita tidak dapat memastikan alasan mengapa mereka khawatir, tetapi yang jelas mereka takut bahwa orang-orang percaya yang telah meninggal tidak akan mengalami semua hal yang luar biasa dan baik yang akan terjadi ketika Yesus datang kembali. Paulus meyakinkan mereka bahwa orang-orang percaya yang telah meninggal akan hidup kembali dan bertemu dengan Yesus sebelum mereka yang masih hidup bertemu dengan-Nya. Karena itu, jemaat Tesalonika tidak perlu mengkhawatirkan orang-orang percaya yang telah meninggal. \n\n## Bagian 3: Masalah-masalah Penting dalam Penerjemahan\n\n### Apa yang Paulus maksudkan dengan ungkapan-ungkapan seperti "di dalam Kristus", "di dalam Tuhan", dan sebagainya?\n\nPaulus sering menggunakan metafora spasial "di dalam Kristus" (sering kali dengan nama lain dari Kristus, seperti Tuhan atau Yesus) dalam surat ini. Metafora ini menekankan bahwa orang percaya sangat erat bersatu dengan Kristus seolah-olah mereka berada di dalam Dia. Paulus percaya bahwa hal ini berlaku bagi semua orang percaya, dan terkadang ia menggunakan kata "di dalam Kristus" hanya untuk menunjukkan bahwa apa yang ia bicarakan adalah benar bagi mereka yang percaya kepada Yesus. Di lain waktu, ia menekankan persatuan dengan Kristus sebagai sarana atau dasar dari suatu pernyataan atau nasihat. Lihat catatan pada ayat-ayat tertentu untuk membantu dalam memahami makna kontekstual dari "di dalam Kristus" dan frasa-frasa yang terkait. (Lihat: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### Apa yang Paulus maksudkan dengan kata "saudara-saudara"?\n\nPaulus sering menggunakan istilah "saudara" untuk menyebut orang-orang yang memiliki iman yang sama. Meskipun istilah ini bersifat maskulin, Paulus menggunakan kata ini dalam pengertian umum yang mencakup laki-laki dan perempuan. Jika Anda memutuskan untuk mempertahankan penggunaan kiasan ini dalam terjemahan Anda, Anda dapat menyatakan "saudara-saudara" untuk menunjukkan bahwa kata tersebut memiliki pengertian umum ini. (Lihat: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])\n\n### "Kami" dan "kamu"\n\nDalam surat ini, kecuali jika ada catatan yang menyatakan sebaliknya, kata "kami", "kita", dan "milik kita" selalu merujuk kepada Paulus dan rekan-rekan sekerjanya, khususnya Silwanus dan Timotius, dan tidak termasuk jemaat Tesalonika. Juga, dalam surat ini, kata "kamu" dan " engkau" selalu berbentuk jamak. (Lihat: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] dan [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youingular]])### \n\nApa saja masalah utama dalam teks kitab 1 Tesalonika?\r\n\r\nDalam ayat-ayat berikut ini, naskah-naskah kuno tidak semuanya memiliki kata-kata yang sama. ULT menggunakan kata-kata yang ditemukan dalam sebagian besar naskah yang paling awal. Ketika Anda menerjemahkan ayat-ayat ini, Anda harus membandingkan ULT dengan terjemahan apa pun yang mungkin sudah dikenal oleh para pembaca Anda untuk mengetahui apa yang diharapkan oleh para pembaca Anda. Kecuali ada alasan yang kuat untuk menggunakan kata-kata alternatif, Anda harus mengikuti ULT. Lihat catatan kaki dan catatan pada setiap ayat untuk informasi lebih lanjut. (Lihat: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])\r\n\r\n* "Kasih karunia dan damai sejahtera bagimu" ([1:1](../01/01.md)). Beberapa naskah kuno menuliskan hal ini: "Kasih karunia dan damai sejahtera bagi kamu dari Allah Bapa kita dan Tuhan Yesus Kristus."\r\n* "anak-anak kecil" ([2:7](../02/07.md)). Beberapa naskah kuno menuliskan ini: "lemah lembut."\r\n* "memegahkan diri" ([2:19](../02/19.md)). Beberapa naskah kuno memiliki ini: "sukacita yang besar."\r\n* "hamba Allah" ([3:2](../03/02.md)). Beberapa naskah kuno menuliskan ini: "seorang kawan sekerja Allah." Naskah kuno lainnya menuliskan ini: "rekan sekerja." Naskah kuno lainnya menuliskan seperti ini: "seorang hamba Allah dan rekan sekerja kita."\r\n* "Allah ... Allah" ([3:9](../03/09.md)). Beberapa naskah kuno memiliki ini: "Tuhan ... Tuhan."\r\n* "Yang memberi" ([4:8](../04/08.md)). Beberapa naskah kuno menuliskan seperti ini: "yang telah memberi."\r\n* "kepadamu" ([4:8](../04/08.md)). Beberapa naskah kuno memiliki ini: "kepada kami."\r\n* "kamu memiliki" ([4:9](../04/09.md)). Beberapa naskah kuno memiliki ini: "kami memiliki."\r\n* "pencuri" sebagai objek dari sebuah kata kerja ([5:4](../05/04.md)). Beberapa naskah kuno memiliki ini: "pencuri" sebagai subjek dari sebuah kata kerja.\r\n* "Ujilah segala sesuatu" ([5:21](../05/21.md)). Beberapa naskah kuno menuliskan hal ini: "Tetapi ujilah segala sesuatu."\r\n* "semua saudara" ([5:27](../05/27.md)). Beberapa naskah kuno menuliskan ini: "semua saudara-saudara yang kudus."\r\n* "bersamamu" ([5:28](../05/28.md)). Beberapa naskah kuno menuliskan ini: "bersama kamu. Amin." +1:intro y8c5 0 # 1 Thessalonians 1 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. Opening and blessing (1:1)\n2. Giving thanks for the Thessalonians (1:2–10)\n * A prayer of thanks (1:2–5)\n * The Thessalonians as examples (1:6–10)\n\nVerse 1 formally introduces this letter. Letters in the ancient Near East commonly had introductions of this type in which the senders identified themselves and the recipient and then gave a greeting.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Trinity\n\nGod the Father, God the Son, and God the Holy Spirit are mentioned numerous times in this chapter. Paul can speak of each of them individually, but he describes them working together as God. Make sure that your translation distinguishes between Father, Son, and Holy Spirit but still identifies them as God. \n\n### Imitators and examples\n\nIn [1:8](../01/08.md), Paul describes how the Thessalonians became “imitators” of the apostles and of Jesus. They became “imitators” when they suffered but still experienced joy from the Holy Spirit. Paul then describes how this behavior made them “examples” for other believers to imitate (see [1:7–8](../01/07.md)). Make sure that your translation indicates that the Thessalonians are imitating the apostles and Christ, which means that other people should imitate them. \n\n### The second coming\n\nIn [1:10](../01/10.md), Paul refers to the “second coming,” a specific day in the future in which Jesus will come back to earth, all dead people will come back to life, the world will be renewed, and God will judge people, punishing those who have sinned but rewarding those who believe in Jesus and obey him. Paul’s focus in this verse is especially on God’s judgment. Consider whether your readers will infer this information from what Paul says in [1:10](../01/10.md) or whether you should include some of this implied information. +1:1 ms5e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Παῦλος, καὶ Σιλουανὸς, καὶ Τιμόθεος; τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter and its intended audience. For example, you may want to indicate that this is a letter. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, along with Silvanus and Timothy, wrote this letter to you, the church” +1:1 zivb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Παῦλος, καὶ Σιλουανὸς, καὶ Τιμόθεος; τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 **Paul** is the author of this letter. **Silvanus and Timothy** are with him as he writes and are in agreement with what he writes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, together with Silvanus and Timothy, write to the church” +1:1 r7n0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Σιλουανὸς 1 The name **Silvanus** is a longer form of the name **Silas**, the form of the name used for this same man in the book of Acts. You could choose to use the shorter form here as well, or you could choose to use the longer form here and include a footnote explaining that they are forms of the same name. +1:1 z7wu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Θεῷ Πατρὶ καὶ Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ 1 Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ** to describe the union of believers with **God** and **Christ**. In this case, being **in God** and **Christ**, or united to God and Christ, identifies the Thessalonians as Christians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that the Thessalonians have a very close relationship with **God** and **Christ**. Alternative translation: “that is united to God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” or “in union with God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” +1:1 vlb3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Θεῷ Πατρὶ καὶ Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ 1 When **God** is called **Father**, it highlights his relationship to **Jesus** the “Son” (see [1:10](../01/10.md)). Here, the Old Testament title for **God**, **Lord**, is applied to **Jesus**, equating him with **God**. Be sure to retain these titles in your translation. +1:1 luw5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη 1 After stating his name and the people to whom he is writing, Paul adds a blessing. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “May you experience kindness and peace within you” or “I pray that you will have grace and peace” +1:1 qx70 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **Grace** and **peace**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “I pray that God will be favorable to you and give you a peaceful spirit” +1:1 nn67 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ὑμῖν 1 Throughout this letter the word **you** is plural and refers to the Thessalonian believers, unless otherwise noted. +1:1 e5eu rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη 1 Many ancient manuscripts read **Grace to you and peace**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “Grace to you and peace from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. +1:2 of3g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure εὐχαριστοῦμεν τῷ Θεῷ πάντοτε περὶ πάντων ὑμῶν, μνείαν ποιούμενοι ἐπὶ τῶν προσευχῶν ἡμῶν, ἀδιαλείπτως 1 Here Paul first states what he, Silvanus, and Timothy do more specifically (they **give thanks to God**) and then describes it more generally (they are **making mention** of the Thessalonians). If it would be clearer in your language, you could reverse the order of the clauses. Alternate translation: “We continually make mention of you in our prayers, always giving thanks to God for all of you” +1:2 o7cp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντοτε & ἀδιαλείπτως 1 Paul says **always** and **continually** here as generalizations for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “very regularly … extremely often” +1:2 ga1b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure μνείαν ποιούμενοι ἐπὶ τῶν προσευχῶν ἡμῶν, ἀδιαλείπτως 1 Here, the word **continually** could modify: (1) **making mention {of you}**. Alternate translation: “making mention of you continually in our prayers” (2) “remembering” in the following verse ([1:3](../01/03.md)). If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to omit the comma at the end of this verse. Alternate translation: “making mention of you in our prayers, continually” +1:3 ecw0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μνημονεύοντες ὑμῶν τοῦ ἔργου τῆς πίστεως, καὶ τοῦ κόπου τῆς ἀγάπης, καὶ τῆς ὑπομονῆς τῆς ἐλπίδος τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν; 1 Here, when Paul says that he and those with him are **remembering** things **before our God and Father**, he means that they are thanking God about specific things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “gratefully mentioning to our God and Father your work of faith and labor of love and endurance of hope of our Lord Jesus Christ” +1:3 w769 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὑμῶν τοῦ ἔργου τῆς πίστεως, καὶ τοῦ κόπου τῆς ἀγάπης, καὶ τῆς ὑπομονῆς τῆς ἐλπίδος τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **faith**, **love**, **endurance**, and **hope**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how you work because you believe, and how you labor because you love, and how you endure because you hope in our Lord Jesus Christ” +1:3 s8as rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ὑμῶν τοῦ ἔργου τῆς πίστεως 1 Here, Paul could be using the possessive form to describe **work** that is: (1) a result of **faith**. Alternate translation: “your work produced by faith” (2) a proof of **faith**. Alternate translation: “your work that proves that you have faith” +1:3 tq4e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τοῦ κόπου τῆς ἀγάπης 1 Here, Paul could be using the possessive form to describe **labor** that is: (1) a result of **love** for other believers. Alternate translation: “labor produced by love for others” (2) a result of **love** for God. Alternate translation: “labor produced by love for God” (3) a proof of **love**. Alternate translation: “labor that proves that you have love” +1:3 mshs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῆς ὑπομονῆς τῆς ἐλπίδος 1 Here, Paul could be using the possessive form to describe **endurance** that is: (1) a result of **hope**. Alternate translation: “endurance produced by hope” (2) a characteristic of **hope**. Alternate translation: “enduring hope” +1:3 kr8q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῆς ἐλπίδος τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **hope** that is based in **our Lord Jesus Christ**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “of hope in our Lord Jesus Christ” +1:3 tvrg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν 1 Here, **our God and Father** refers to the one divine person who is both God and Father. The word **God** and the word **Father** refer to the same person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “God our Father” or “our Father God” +1:3 v01e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν -1 In both places, the word **our** includes Paul, Silvanus, Timothy, the Thessalonians, and all believers. Your language may require you to mark this form. +1:4 psc4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result εἰδότες 1 Here, the word **knowing** introduces a reason why Paul and those with him give thanks to God (see [1:2](../01/02.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “which we do because we know” or “since we know” +1:4 erb6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀδελφοὶ 1 Here and throughout the letter, Paul uses the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “believing friends” +1:4 egkq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοὶ 1 Throughout the letter, although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, and if it would be helpful in your language, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate this. +1:4 j08t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἠγαπημένοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom God is loving” +1:4 ohtl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἐκλογὴν ὑμῶν, 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **election**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that you have been chosen” or “that God has selected you” +1:5 jxfs rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 Here, **because** introduces a reason why Paul and those with him are sure about the Thessalonians’ “election” (see [1:4](../01/04.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason for a previous statement. Alternate translation: “which we are sure about because” +1:5 ude4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τὸ εὐαγγέλιον ἡμῶν οὐκ ἐγενήθη εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 Here, Paul speaks of **our gospel** as if it were a person who could **come to you**. He means that the Thessalonians heard the gospel from Paul and his fellow workers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you did not receive our gospel” +1:5 sm4j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν λόγῳ 1 Paul is using the term **word** to refer to speaking words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in speech” or “in spoken words” +1:5 t1w3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν δυνάμει, καὶ ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ, καὶ πληροφορίᾳ πολλῇ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **power** and **assurance**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in us acting powerfully and in the Holy Spirit working and in us being fully assured” +1:5 kjin rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν δυνάμει, καὶ ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ, καὶ πληροφορίᾳ πολλῇ 1 Here Paul could mean that: (1) Paul and those with him preached the gospel with **power** and with the help of **the Holy Spirit** and with **much assurance** that what they preached was true. Alternate translation: “we preached with power and with the Holy Spirit and with much assurance that it is true” (2) the Thessalonians experienced **power** and **the Holy Spirit** and **much assurance** when they heard the gospel. Alternate translation: “you experienced its power and the presence of the Holy Spirit and much assurance that it is true” +1:5 wdr7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καθὼς οἴδατε οἷοι 1 Here, the phrase **just as you know** could introduce: (1) a basis for Paul’s claim about how the Thessalonians experienced the gospel. Alternate translation: “and you know that is true because you remember what kind of men” (2) a comparison between what Paul has said about how the Thessalonians experienced the gospel and what the Thessalonians know about Paul and his fellow workers. Alternate translation: “and that fits with what you know about what kind of men” +1:6 kgjr rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὑμεῖς & ἐγενήθητε 1 For emphasis, Paul is stating the pronoun **you**, which is already implied in the verb **became**. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction in your translation. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. The ULT does so by using the intensive pronoun **yourselves**. Alternate translation: “it is you who became” +1:6 cs49 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous δεξάμενοι 1 Here, the phrase **having received** could introduce: (1) the way in which the Thessalonians **became imitators**. Alternate translation: “that is, you received” (2) when the Thessalonians **became imitators**. Alternate translation: “which you did when you received” +1:6 c2hl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Here, **the word** represents a message that is made up of words, specifically the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the gospel message” or “the words of the gospel” +1:6 wura rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν θλίψει πολλῇ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **affliction**, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “while being afflicted” or “while people made you suffer” +1:6 r7o6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μετὰ χαρᾶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **joy**, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “rejoicing because of the Holy Spirit” +1:6 ohen rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession μετὰ χαρᾶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **joy** that is given by **the Holy Spirit**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “with joy from the Holy Spirit” or “with joy given by the Holy Spirit” +1:7 lwbm rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 Here, the phrase **so that** introduces a result from how the Thessalonians became imitators of Paul, his fellow workers, and the Lord (see [1:6](../01/06.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a result. Alternate translation: “and as a result” or “and so” +1:7 et1h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns γενέσθαι ὑμᾶς τύπους πᾶσιν τοῖς πιστεύουσιν ἐν τῇ Μακεδονίᾳ καὶ ἐν τῇ Ἀχαΐᾳ 1 If your language would not use the abstract noun **examples**, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “you showed all the ones believing in Macedonia and in Achaia how to behave” or “all the ones believing in Macedonia and Achaia started to copy how you live” +1:7 xetp rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names ἐν τῇ Μακεδονίᾳ καὶ ἐν τῇ Ἀχαΐᾳ 1 The word **Achaia** is the name of a Roman province in the southern part of modern-day Greece. The word **Macedonia** is the same of a Roman province in the northern part of modern-day Greece. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that these words are names of provinces or regions. Alternate translation: “in the regions of Macedonia and Achaia” +1:8 smjv rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of how the Thessalonians became examples throughout Macedonia and Achaia. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “More specifically,” or “Indeed,” +1:8 da73 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀφ’ ὑμῶν & ἐξήχηται ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you have sounded out the word of the Lord” +1:8 qyk6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Paul is using the term **word** to refer to the message about **the Lord**, which is the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the good news about the Lord” +1:8 sht4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐξήχηται 1 Here, Paul speaks as if the Thessalonians were playing an instrument that makes a sound that can be heard from far away. He means that people in many places hear **the word of the Lord** because of how the Thessalonians act. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “has shone forth” or “has been heard” +1:8 w8b3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names ἐν τῇ Μακεδονίᾳ καὶ ἐν τῇ Ἀχαΐᾳ 1 See how you translated the similar phrases in [1:7](../01/07.md). Alternate translation: “in the regions of Macedonia and Achaia” +1:8 lxc3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν ἐξελήλυθεν 1 Here Paul speaks as if the Thessalonians’ **faith** were a person who could travel to many places. He means that people in many places have heard about their **faith**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “people have heard about your faith toward God in every place” or “news of your faith toward God has been heard in every place” +1:8 esk9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν 1 Here, the word **faith** represents knowledge about the Thessalonians’ **faith**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the news about your faith” or “knowledge concerning your faith” +1:8 bvkf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the way that you believe in” +1:8 wtg5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ 1 Here Paul speaks as if people in **every place** know about Thessalonians’ faith. The Thessalonians would have understood him to mean that their faith is known in many places, or in every place that Paul and his fellow workers visit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “into every place we go” or “throughout the world” +1:8 z9eu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit λαλεῖν τι 1 Here Paul implies that he does not **need to say anything** about the Thessalonians’ faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea explicit. Alternate translation: “to say anything about your faith” +1:9 nsws rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why Paul and his fellow workers do not need to say anything about the Thessalonians (see [1:8](../01/08.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “That is because” +1:9 vfa3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοὶ & ἀπαγγέλλουσιν 1 Here, the phrase **they themselves** refers to everyone who has heard about the Thessalonians’ faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the pronouns more explicit. Alternate translation: “they themselves who have heard about your faith report” +1:9 rd2b rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοὶ & ἀπαγγέλλουσιν 1 For emphasis, Paul is stating the pronoun **they**, which is already implied in the verb **report**. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction in your translation. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. The ULT does so by using the intensive pronoun **themselves**. Alternate translation: “as for them, they report” or “it is they who report” +1:9 qraf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Here, the word **us** could include: (1) just Paul and his fellow workers. Alternate translation: “us who preached the good news” (2) Paul, his fellow workers, and the Thessalonians. Alternate translation: “you and us” +1:9 xeff rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁποίαν εἴσοδον ἔσχομεν πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul refers to his and his fellow workers’ visit to the Thessalonians as an **entrance**. He implies that the Thessalonians welcomed him and that it was a good visit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “what a good visit we had with you” or “how wonderful it was when we visited you” +1:9 u1um rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπεστρέψατε πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν ἀπὸ τῶν εἰδώλων 1 Paul speaks of the Thessalonians as if they had been facing toward their **idols** and then **turned** around to face toward **God**. He means that they no longer worship idols, and now they worship God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you started worshiping God and left the idols behind” or “you abandoned the idols for God’s sake” +1:9 fa47 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal δουλεύειν 1 Here, the phrase **to serve** could introduce: (1) the purpose for which the Thessalonians **turned**. Alternate translation: “in order to serve” (2) a restatement of what it means for the Thessalonians to have **turned**. Alternate translation: “that is, you chose to serve” (3) the result the Thessalonians having **turned**. Alternate translation: “with the result that you serve” +1:9 ou5h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Θεῷ ζῶντι καὶ ἀληθινῷ 1 Here, the phrase **living and true God** identifies God as the one who lives and is truly God. The point is that God actually lives, unlike idols and other things that people may call gods, and that God really is God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that emphasizes that God really lives and is the true God. Alternate translation: “the real God who actually lives” or “the only true God” +1:10 wkt5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal καὶ ἀναμένειν 1 The phrase **to wait** is parallel with the phrase “to serve” in the previous verse ([1:9](../01/09.md)). Introduce it the same way you introduced “to serve.” Alternate translation: “and in order to wait for” or “and with the result that you wait for” +1:10 og49 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Υἱὸν αὐτοῦ 1 **Son** is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship to God the Father. +1:10 wil8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκ τῶν οὐρανῶν 1 Here Paul assumes that the Thessalonians know that Jesus ascended into **the heavens** and will someday come back to earth from there. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this information more explicit. Alternate translation: “to return from his place in the heavens” or “to come back to earth after he ascended into the heavens” +1:10 ffro rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἤγειρεν ἐκ τῶν νεκρῶν 1 Here, the phrase **raised from the dead** refers to someone who died and came back to life. If your language does not use **raised** to describe coming back to life, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “he restored to life after he had died” +1:10 r3nl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τῶν νεκρῶν 1 Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to refer to people who are **dead**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the dead people” +1:10 dbcl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish Ἰησοῦν, τὸν ῥυόμενον ἡμᾶς 1 The clause **the one rescuing us** describes Jesus in his role as rescuer. Paul is not distinguishing between more than one **Jesus**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that makes this explicit. Alternate translation: “Jesus, our rescuer” or “Jesus, who rescues us” +1:10 pt1s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 Here, the word **us** includes Paul, Silvanus, Timothy, the Thessalonians, and all Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “all of us Christians” or “all of us believers” +1:10 g3zz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐκ τῆς ὀργῆς τῆς ἐρχομένης 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **wrath**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from the time when God punishes people” or “so that God does not punish us in the future” +1:10 cx5g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τῆς ὀργῆς τῆς ἐρχομένης 1 Paul speaks of **wrath** as though it were someone who could travel and is **coming** to where people are. He means that in the future God will act wrathfully against people who have sinned and who have not trusted in Jesus to forgive their sins. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s judgment that will happen” or “when God will punish people for sin” +2:intro kt5l 0 # 1 Thessalonians 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n3. The visit with the Thessalonians (2:1–16)\n * How Paul and his fellow workers behaved (2:1–12)\n * How the Thessalonians responded (2:13–16\n4. Separation from the Thessalonians (2:17–20)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Paul’s previous visit with the Thessalonians\n\nBefore he wrote this letter, Paul had briefly visited the city of Thessalonica and preached the gospel. He may have been in this city for only three weeks (see [Acts 17:2](../act/17/02.md)), but many people still believed in Jesus during this time. They started the church of the Thessalonians, to whom Paul wrote this letter. However, Paul had to leave the city quickly because some Jewish people started a riot and tried to seize Paul and his fellow workers. You can read about this story in [Acts 17:1–10](../act/17/01.md). In this chapter, Paul describes how he and his fellow workers acted when he visited them, and he describes how the believers responded (see [2:1–13](../02/01.md)). He also refers to how some Jewish people persecuted him and his fellow workers (see [2:15–16](../02/15.md)). Finally, he describes how he wants to visit them again after he and his fellow workers had to leave so soon (see [2:17–20](../02/17.md)). \n\n### God and the Thessalonians as “witnesses”\n\nIn [2:5](../02/05.md) and [2:10](../02/10.md), Paul names God as a “witness” to what he is saying, and he also names the Thessalonians as “witnesses” in [2:10](../02/10.md). Witnesses testify about whether something is true, so Paul names God and the Thessalonians as witnesses to show the Thessalonians that what he is saying is true. Your language may have a specific form for appealing to someone to guarantee that a statement is true. \n\n### “The Jews”\n\nIn [2:14–16](../02/14.md), Paul refers to people whom he calls “the Jews.” He does not mean Jewish people in general, since he refers to “the churches of God that are in Judea” as a separate group, and most if not all of these people were Jewish. Paul himself clarifies that he means “the ones having killed both the Lord Jesus and the prophets and having persecuted us.” This does not describe one group of people only, since many of the people who killed God’s “prophets” died before Jesus came. What it does describe is a type of person: a person who opposes God and his messengers. When Paul refers to “the Jews” in this chapter, then, he is referring to Jewish people who oppose God and his messengers. You may need to make this more explicit in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Figures of speech related to families\n\nIn this chapter, Paul describes himself and his fellow workers as “little children” ([2:7](../02/07.md)), “mothers” ([2:7](../02/07.md)), and “fathers” ([2:11](../02/11.md)). He also refers to the Thessalonians as “brothers” ([2:1](../02/01.md), [9](../02/09.md), [14](../02/14.md), [17](../02/17.md)). Paul describes himself and his fellow workers in these ways to show the Thessalonians that he and his fellow workers love and care about them as if they were members of the same family. Paul especially emphasizes this since he was only with the Thessalonians for a short period of time. If possible, preserve the figures of speech that describe the Thessalonians, Paul, and his fellow workers as members of the same family. +2:1 ii5j rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a longer explanation of the “entrance” that Paul and his fellow workers had among the Thessalonians (see [1:9](../01/09.md)). This explanation is found in [2:1–12](../02/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation of a previous statement. Alternate translation: “Concerning our entrance to you,” or “Now about your visit,” +2:1 gpr4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοὶ & οἴδατε 1 For emphasis, Paul is stating the pronoun **you**, which is already implied in the verb **know**. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction in your translation. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. The ULT does so by using the intensive pronoun **yourselves**. Alternate translation: “as for you, you know” or “it is you who know” +2:1 r6cy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν εἴσοδον ἡμῶν τὴν πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 Here, just as in [1:9](../01/09.md), Paul refers to his and his fellow workers’ visit to the Thessalonians as an **entrance**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “that our visit with you” or “that our time with you” +2:1 w584 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes οὐ κενὴ γέγονεν 1 Paul is using a figure of speech here that expresses a strongly positive meaning by using a negative word, **not**, together with an expression that is the opposite of the intended meaning, **in vain**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the positive meaning. Alternate translation: “has definitely been worthwhile” or “has been very useful” +2:2 nt5n rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces a contrast with how Paul and his fellow workers might have visited the Thessalonians “in vain” (see [2:1](../02/01.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “Rather,” or “Instead of acting in vain,” +2:2 h9s8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background προπαθόντες καὶ ὑβρισθέντες, καθὼς οἴδατε, ἐν Φιλίπποις 1 These words provide background information about what happened when Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy were in the city of Philippi. You can read about this in [Acts 16:16–40](../act/16/16.md). Use a natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “even though we suffered and were shamefully treated when we were in Philippi, just as you know” +2:2 w0qu rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast προπαθόντες καὶ ὑβρισθέντες 1 Here, the phrases **having previously suffered and having been shamefully treated** refer to something that contrasts with **we were bold**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could introduce the phrases **having previously suffered and having been shamefully treated** with a word or phrase that introduces a contrast or something that is unexpected. Alternate translation: “despite having previously suffered and having been shamefully treated” or “even though we suffered previously and were shamefully treated” +2:2 fac4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet προπαθόντες καὶ ὑβρισθέντες 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how much the apostles suffered. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “having earlier suffered violently” or “having already been shamefully abused” +2:2 f5d2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὑβρισθέντες 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having experienced mistreatment” or “people having mistreated us” +2:2 clqq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure ἀλλὰ προπαθόντες καὶ ὑβρισθέντες, καθὼς οἴδατε, ἐν Φιλίπποις 1 Here Paul includes the phrase **just as you know** at the end of the information that he says they **know**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could move **just as you know** to wherever it would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “But, just as you know, having previously suffered and having been shamefully treated at Philippi” +2:2 ddlx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ Θεῷ ἡμῶν 1 Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in God** to describe the union of believers with **God**. In this case, being **in God**, or united to God, explains how Paul and his fellow workers were able to be **bold**. Paul could mean more specifically that: (1) **God** enabled them to be bold. Alternate translation: “with boldness from God” (2) they were bold because of their union with **God**. Alternate translation: “because of our union with God” +2:2 daei rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **gospel** that relates to **God**. More specifically, the **gospel** could: (1) come from God. Alternate translation: “the gospel that God gave us” (2) be about God. Alternate translation: “the gospel about God” +2:2 v4dg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν πολλῷ ἀγῶνι 1 Here, the phrase **much struggle** could refer: (1) generally to how difficult preaching the gospel was. Alternate translation: “in great difficulty” (2) specifically to people who opposed Paul. Alternate translation: “in much opposition” +2:3 hl9c rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of how Paul and his fellow workers spoke the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Here is how we spoke:” or “Indeed,” +2:3 xg1c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ & παράκλησις ἡμῶν οὐκ ἐκ πλάνης, οὐδὲ ἐξ ἀκαθαρσίας, οὐδὲ ἐν δόλῳ 1 If your language does not use nouns for some or all of the ideas in this verse, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “when we appealed to you, we did not lead you astray, nor did we speak impurely, nor did we deceive you” +2:3 sckc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡ & παράκλησις ἡμῶν 1 Here Paul could be implying that this **exhortation** was addressed to: (1) the Thessalonians specifically. Alternate translation: “our exhortation to you” (2) anyone to whom Paul and his fellow workers proclaim the gospel. Alternate translation: “our exhortation to people” +2:3 mzm6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐκ ἐκ πλάνης 1 Here Paul could be implying that the **exhortation** was not **from error** because: (1) he and his fellow workers did not try to convince the Thessalonians to believe what is wrong. Alternate translation: “was neither from false teaching” (2) he and his fellow workers did not believe what is wrong. Alternate translation: “was neither from false beliefs” +2:4 m8sq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure καθὼς δεδοκιμάσμεθα ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ, πιστευθῆναι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον, οὕτως λαλοῦμεν 1 Here Paul describes the manner in which he and his fellow workers **speak** something before he says that they **speak**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could rearrange the elements so that Paul says what he is doing before he describes the manner in which he does it. Alternate translation: “we speak as those who have been examined by God to be entrusted with the gospel” +2:4 ue4y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive δεδοκιμάσμεθα ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ, πιστευθῆναι 1 If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express the idea with active forms or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has examined us to entrust us with” +2:4 lfv7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result πιστευθῆναι 1 Here, the phrase **to be entrusted** introduces the result of being **examined by God**. Paul implies that God approved of them when he **examined** them, and so they were **entrusted with the gospel**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that introduces the result of a test or examination. Alternate translation: “with the result that we were entrusted with” or “and approved to be entrusted with” +2:4 qqj2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ Θεῷ 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “but as pleasing to God” +2:4 bq9a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὰς καρδίας ἡμῶν 1 In Paul’s culture, the heart is the place where humans think and plan. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “our minds” or “what we think” +2:5 xk2o rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γάρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces further explanation of how Paul and his fellow workers spoke and acted. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “Even more,” +2:5 hqih rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure οὔτε γάρ ποτε ἐν λόγῳ κολακίας ἐγενήθημεν, καθὼς οἴδατε 1 Here Paul includes the phrase **just as you know** in the middle of the information that he says they know. If it would be helpful in your language, you could move **just as you know** to wherever it would be natural in your language. See how you translated the similar form in [2:2](../02/02.md). Alternate translation: “For just as you know, we were not at that time in a word of flattery” +2:5 qjty rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ποτε 1 Here, the phrase **at that time** refers to the time when Paul and his fellow workers visited the Thessalonians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “at the time of our visit” +2:5 lkx2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν λόγῳ κολακίας 1 Paul is using the term **word** to mean a message in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in a message of flattery” or “in speech of flattery” +2:5 ulcm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns λόγῳ κολακίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **flattery**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a flattering word” +2:5 q2yh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession προφάσει πλεονεξίας 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **pretext** that hides or disguises **greed**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a pretext for greed” or “a pretext that hides greed” +2:5 oh2o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν προφάσει πλεονεξίας 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **pretext** and **greed**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “by disguising how greedy we might have been” or “being greedy and trying to hide it” +2:5 lfym rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-oathformula (Θεὸς μάρτυς) 1 The phrase **God {is} witness** is an oath formula. Use a natural way in your language to express an oath. Alternate translation: “we swear by God” or “as God knows” +2:6 afcc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐξ ἀνθρώπων δόξαν, οὔτε ἀφ’ ὑμῶν, οὔτε ἀπ’ ἄλλων 1 If your language does not use the abstract noun **glory**, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “for men, neither you nor others, to praise us” +2:6 j6c4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπων 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “humans” or “men and women” +2:7 a75z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor δυνάμενοι ἐν βάρει εἶναι 1 Here Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers could have made the Thessalonians carry something heavy. He means that he and his fellow workers could have made the Thessalonians’ lives harder. More specifically, the **burden** could be: (1) Paul and his fellow workers demanding respect and obedience. Alternate translation: “being able to require your obedience” (2) Paul and his fellow workers demanding money and other things. Alternate translation: “being able to demand money from you” +2:7 y3bi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐγενήθημεν νήπιοι 1 Here, Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers **became little children**. He means that they treated the Thessalonians gently and did not use their authority harshly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “we acted as mild as infants” or “we behaved gently” +2:7 u7y2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants νήπιοι 1 Here, many ancient manuscripts read **little children**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “gentle.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. +2:7 bnp2 ἐν μέσῳ ὑμῶν 1 Alternate translation: “among you” or “when we visited you” +2:7 ag1l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὡς ἐὰν τροφὸς θάλπῃ τὰ ἑαυτῆς τέκνα 1 The point of this comparison is that in the same way a **mother** would gently **comfort her own children**, so the apostles gently and affectionately cared for the Thessalonians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the meaning more explicit. Alternate translation: “and we loved you like mother who affectionately cares for her own children” or “as we affectionately cared for you” +2:7 q9bv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure ἐν μέσῳ ὑμῶν, ὡς ἐὰν τροφὸς θάλπῃ τὰ ἑαυτῆς τέκνα 1 Here, the clause **as if a mother might comfort her own children** could be: (1) a further explanation of what Paul has already said about how they acted like **children**. Alternate translation: “in the midst of you, just as a mother might comfort her own children” (2) a description of what he is about to say about how they long for the Thessalonians (see [2:8](../02/08.md)). If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to to continue the sentence in the following verse instead of starting a new sentence there. Alternate translation: “in the midst of you. As a mother might comfort her own children,” +2:8 r8b4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὕτως 1 Here, the phrase **in this manner** could: (1) refer back to what Paul said in the previous verse about how he and his fellow workers love and care for the Thessalonians as if they were the Thessalonians’ mothers. Alternate translation: “in that very way” or “as a mother does” (2) make the word **longing** stronger. Alternate translation: “so very much” (3) refer ahead to what Paul and his fellow workers did because of their **longing**. Alternate translation: “in the following way:” +2:8 oxdm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εὐδοκοῦμεν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we were happy” or “we considered it good” +2:8 pjp6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the gospel** that relates to **God** (see the similar phrase in [2:2](../02/02.md)). More specifically, the **gospel** could: (1) come from **God**. Alternate translation: “the gospel that God gave us” (2) be about **God**. Alternate translation: “the gospel about God” +2:8 q86v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὰς ἑαυτῶν ψυχάς 1 Here, the word **souls** represents people and focuses particularly on who people are and what they do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our own selves” +2:9 v837 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γάρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why the Thessalonians should believe Paul when he writes that he and his fellow workers loved and cared for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a claim, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “You know that is true because” or “In fact,” +2:9 tc98 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet τὸν κόπον ἡμῶν καὶ τὸν μόχθον 1 Here, **labor** and **toil** mean basically the same thing. The repetition emphasizes how hard the apostles worked. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “our toilsome labor” or “how hard we worked” +2:9 ylkl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας 1 Here, the phrase **night and day** indicates that Paul and his fellow workers worked during both the day and the night. This means that they worked very much every day. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all the time” or “always” +2:9 kedf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πρὸς τὸ μὴ ἐπιβαρῆσαί τινα ὑμῶν 1 Here Paul speaks of asking for money as if it were a heavy **burden** that he and his fellow workers could have asked the Thessalonians to carry for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. Alternative translation, “so that none of you would have to support us financially” or “in order not to make life hard for any of you” +2:9 ezqn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **the gospel** that relates to **God** (see the similar phrase in [2:8](../02/08.md)). More specifically, the **gospel** could: (1) come from **God**. Alternate translation: “the gospel that God gave us” (2) be about **God**. Alternate translation: “the gospel about God” +2:10 re18 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὑμεῖς μάρτυρες καὶ ὁ Θεός, ὡς 1 Here Paul speaks as if he were summoning both the Thessalonians and God as **witnesses** to testify on their behalf before a judge. He means that both the Thessalonians and God know how he and his fellow workers acted. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You and God can declare how” or “You and God know how” +2:10 il3e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ὡς ὁσίως, καὶ δικαίως, καὶ ἀμέμπτως 1 The terms **piously**, **righteously**, and **blamelessly** mean similar things. Paul is using the three terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with only one or two terms. Alternate translation: “righteously” or “properly and and purely” +2:11 oug6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὡς ἕνα ἕκαστον ὑμῶν, ὡς πατὴρ τέκνα ἑαυτοῦ 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from the previous verse if it would be clearer in your language (see [2:10](../02/10.md)). Alternate translation: “how we were with each one of you as a father is with his own children” or “how we treated each one of you as a father treats his own children” +2:11 i58m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὡς πατὴρ τέκνα ἑαυτοῦ 1 The point of Paul’s comparison is that Paul and his fellow workers are like fathers who model and instruct proper behavior for their **children**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the meaning more explicit. Alternate translation: “as a father teaches and trains his own children” or “we taught and disciplined you as fathers do with their own children” +2:12 clhg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit παρακαλοῦντες ὑμᾶς, καὶ παραμυθούμενοι, καὶ μαρτυρόμενοι 1 Here, the words **exhorting**, **encouraging**, and **testifying** describe ways in which Paul and his fellow workers acted like fathers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “by exhorting you and encouraging you and testifying to you” +2:12 m91e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet παρακαλοῦντες ὑμᾶς, καὶ παραμυθούμενοι 1 The terms **exhorting** and **encouraging** mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “exhorting you” +2:12 obhe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μαρτυρόμενοι 1 Here Paul could be implying that he and his fellow workers testify: (1) about how believers should behave. Alternate translation: “testifying about proper behavior” (2) to the truth of the good news. Alternate translation: “testifying to the truth of the gospel” +2:12 udek rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς τὸ περιπατεῖν ὑμᾶς 1 Paul speaks of behavior in life as if it were walking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in order that you might act” or “in order that you might live your lives” +2:12 go6b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἀξίως τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe what **God** considers to be worthy. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in a way that honors God” or “in a way that God considers worthy” +2:12 v9ph rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish τοῦ καλοῦντος ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul is adding more information about God. He is not distinguishing between different gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly adds information instead of distinguishing between people. Alternate translation: “who is the one calling you” +2:12 vbd2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys εἰς τὴν ἑαυτοῦ βασιλείαν καὶ δόξαν 1 Here, the phrase **kingdom and glory** could refer: (1) to two distinct things that God calls his people to participate in. Alternate translation: “into his own kingdom and his own glory” (2) to one thing described with two words connected by **and**. This is called hendiadys. Alternate translation: “into his own glorious kingdom” +2:13 au3b rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns καὶ διὰ τοῦτο καὶ ἡμεῖς εὐχαριστοῦμεν τῷ Θεῷ ἀδιαλείπτως, ὅτι 1 Here, the word **this** could refer to: (1) what Paul is about to write, which he introduces with the word **that**. Alternate translation: “And here is why we also thank God constantly: it is that” (2) what Paul has already written about how Paul and his fellow workers preached and how the Thessalonians welcomed them. Alternate translation: “And because of those things, we also thank God constantly, that” +2:13 qy80 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ ἡμεῖς 1 Here, the word **also** could imply that: (1) Paul and his fellow workers thank God about the Thessalonians like other people do (see [1:8–10](../01/08.md)). Alternate translation: “we too” (2) Paul and his fellow workers are thanking God for additional things about the Thessalonians. Alternate translation: “we yet again” +2:13 zja7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἀδιαλείπτως 1 Paul says **continually** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. See how you translated the similar form in [1:2](../01/02.md). Alternate translation: “extremely often” +2:13 f6ta rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy λόγον ἀκοῆς & λόγον ἀνθρώπων & λόγον Θεοῦ 1 In this verse, Paul uses the term **word** to mean a message that is spoken by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the spoken message of hearing … something spoken by men … something spoken by God” +2:13 ei3j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession λόγον ἀκοῆς παρ’ ἡμῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **word** that he connects with **hearing** and with **God**. He could mean that: (1) the **word** allowed the Thessalonians to hear about **God**. Alternate translation: “the word in which you heard about God from us” (2) the **word** is what the Thessalonians heard from Paul and his fellow workers, and this **word** is about **God**. Alternate translation: “the word which you heard from us about God” (3) the **word** is from **God**, and the Thessalonians heard it from Paul and his fellow workers. Alternate translation: “the word from God which you heard from us” +2:13 inhn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπων 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “of humans” or “of people” +2:13 z89g rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὃς 1 Here, the word translated **which** could refer to: (1) **the word**. Alternate translation: “which word” (2) **God**. Alternate translation: “who” +2:13 ci1e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ὃς καὶ ἐνεργεῖται 1 Here Paul refers to **the word of God** as if it were a person doing work. He means that God uses **the word** to work in the Thessalonians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “through which God is also working” or “which is also effective” +2:14-15 mh8n rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge 0 To help your readers understand the author’s main point in this verse and the next one, you could combine both verses into a verse bridge. You could include what the unbelieving **Jews** did first and then include how the Thessalonians are **imitators** of the believers in Judea. Alternate translation: “For the Jews, the ones having killed both the Lord Jesus and the prophets and having persecuted us, made the churches of God that are in Judea in Christ Jesus suffer. Now you, brothers, became imitators of them, because the same things you also suffered from your own countrymen, just as they also from the Jews, the ones not being pleasing to God and {being} hostile to all men,” +2:14 xopt rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces proof of how God’s message is working among the Thessalonians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces proof or support for a claim. Alternate translation: “We know it is working in you because” or “Indeed,” +2:14 ij9j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῶν ἐκκλησιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **churches** that belong to **God**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea without using the possessive form. Alternate translation: “of the churches that belong to God” +2:14 g0t5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ Jesus** to describe the union of believers with **Christ Jesus**. In this case, being **in Christ Jesus**, or united to Christ, explains that **churches** are truly believers and have a relationship with Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that these believers are united to Christ. Alternate translation: “and that are united to Christ Jesus” or “and that are in union with Christ Jesus” +2:14 dnw1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τὰ αὐτὰ ἐπάθετε, καὶ ὑμεῖς ὑπὸ τῶν ἰδίων συμφυλετῶν, καθὼς καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 Here, the phrase **the same things** points to the phrase **just as they also from the Jews**. Paul means that the Thessalonians and the believers **in Judea** experienced the same kind of suffering and persecution. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. You may need to rearrange the end of the verse to do so. Alternate translation: “you also suffered from your own countrymen exactly what they also suffered from the Jews” or “whatever they also suffered from the Jews you also suffered from your own countrymen” +2:14 f37l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations τῶν ἰδίων συμφυλετῶν 1 Although the term **countrymen** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “others from your own country” or “people who live in your city” +2:14 d7qc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑπὸ 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “they also suffered these things from” +2:14 s27y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 Here Paul is referring to Jewish people who did not believe in Jesus and who persecuted those who did believe in Jesus. He is not referring to Jewish people in general, since **the churches of God that are in Judea** were mostly Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it more explicit that Paul is speaking about **Jews** who did not believe and who persecuted other Jewish people who did believe. Alternate translation: “the Jews who did not believe in Jesus” or “the Jews who opposed Jesus” +2:15 a6xd rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-background τῶν καὶ τὸν Κύριον ἀποκτεινάντων Ἰησοῦν, καὶ τοὺς προφήτας, καὶ ἡμᾶς ἐκδιωξάντων; καὶ Θεῷ μὴ ἀρεσκόντων, καὶ πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις ἐναντίων 1 Paul provides this background information about “the Jews” to help readers understand exactly which Jews he is speaking about. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “by which I mean the Jews who in the past killed both the Lord Jesus and the prophets and persecuted us and who are not pleasing God and who are hostile to all men” +2:15 ucaz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events τῶν καὶ τὸν Κύριον ἀποκτεινάντων Ἰησοῦν, καὶ τοὺς προφήτας, καὶ ἡμᾶς ἐκδιωξάντων 1 This list of those persecuted by the people whom Paul calls “the Jews” is not chronological but emphasizes the order of importance and intensity of persecution. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the order of events clear. Alternate translation: “the ones having killed the prophets, then the Lord Jesus, and finally persecuting us” +2:15 wg1t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοὺς προφήτας 1 Here, the phrase **the prophets** refers to the prophets who are mentioned in the Old Testament. These prophets were also Jewish and spoke God’s message to his people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the Jewish prophets” or “God’s prophets” +2:15 ywwr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις 1 Paul says **all men** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “to very many men” or “to the majority of men” +2:15 vfyv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “to all men and women” +2:16 u012 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result κωλυόντων 1 Here, the word **forbidding** could introduce: (1) a reason why Paul says that the unbelieving Jews are not “pleasing to God” and are “hostile to all men” (see [2:15](../02/15.md)). Alternate translation: “because they forbid” or “which is because they forbid” (2) the means by which the unbelieving Jews act in ways that are not “pleasing to God” and “hostile to all men” (see [2:15](../02/15.md)). Alternate translation: “which they do by forbidding” +2:16 fo8c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit λαλῆσαι 1 Here Paul implies that he and his fellow workers speaks the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to speak the gospel” +2:16 r5fi rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal τοῖς ἔθνεσιν & ἵνα σωθῶσιν 1 Here, the clause **so that they might be saved** expresses the purpose for which Paul and his fellow workers **speak to the Gentiles**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this connection more explicit. Alternate translation: “to the Gentiles, which we do so that they might be saved” +2:16 ceve rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σωθῶσιν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it is God. Alternate translation: “God might save them” +2:16 z5fr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς τὸ ἀναπληρῶσαι αὐτῶν τὰς ἁμαρτίας πάντοτε 1 Here Paul is referring to how the unbelieving Jews **fill up their sins**. He does not mean that **the Gentiles** who are saved are filling up their sins. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “so that these unbelieving Jews always fill up their sins” +2:16 n2ue rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς τὸ ἀναπληρῶσαι αὐτῶν τὰς ἁμαρτίας πάντοτε 1 Here, Paul speaks of how the unbelieving Jews sin as if it were filling something up with sins. He could mean: (1) that they commit many sins all the time. Alternate translation: “so that they commit many sins at many times” (2) that they commit enough sins that God will punish them. Alternate translation: “so that they always commit enough sins for God to punish them” +2:16 jzjj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture ἔφθασεν & ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς ἡ ὀργὴ 1 Here Paul could be using the past tense phrase **has come upon them** to indicate that: (1) the **wrath** will **come** in the future. In this case, Paul uses the past tense to indicate that the **wrath** is certain or will be revealed soon. Alternate translation: “the wrath will certainly come upon them” or “the wrath will soon come upon them” (2) **wrath** has already **come** when Paul wrote this letter. In this case, at the time Paul wrote this letter, the unbelieving Jews were already experiencing the **wrath**. Alternate translation: “the wrath has already come upon them” (3) God had already revealed the **wrath** would eventually **come**. In this case, people already know about the **wrath** but will experience it in the future. Alternate translation: “it has already been revealed that the wrath will come upon them” +2:16 btod rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡ ὀργὴ 1 Here Paul implies that **the wrath** is God’s **wrath**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “God’s wrath” +2:16 uwuq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἔφθασεν & ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς ἡ ὀργὴ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **wrath**, you could express the same idea in another way. See how you translated this word in [1:10](../01/10.md). Alternate translation: “God has punished them” or “they have been punished” +2:16 h8ib rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εἰς τέλος 1 Here, the phrase **to the end** could mean that God’s **wrath has come up them**: (1) completely or totally. In this case, God reveals all of his **wrath**, not just some of it. Alternate translation: “totally” or “fully” (2) at a specific moment at the end of a period of time. In this case, the unbelieving Jews are sinning until God finally reveals his **wrath**. Alternate translation: “finally” or “at last” (3) at the end of this world. In this case, the **end** refers to when Jesus comes back. Alternate translation: “at the end of this world” or “when Jesus returns” +2:17 edb1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δέ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces how Paul and his fellow workers act in contrast to the people that Paul has described in the previous verses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a contrast. Alternate translation: “On the other hand,” +2:17 yhhy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπορφανισθέντες ἀφ’ ὑμῶν 1 Here Paul refers to how he and his fellow workers had to leave the Thessalonians soon after arriving in their city and preaching the good news to them. You can read about this in [Acts 17:1–10](../act/17/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having been forced to leave you” or “having had to go away from you” +2:17 ci7i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀπορφανισθέντες 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, [Acts 17:1–10](../act/17/01.md) shows that people who opposed Paul did it. Alternate translation: “opponents having separated us” or “persecution having separated us” +2:17 lmpu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom πρὸς καιρὸν ὥρας 1 Here, the phrase **for the time of an hour** refers to a short span of time. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar phrase or plain language. Alternate translation: “for a short time” +2:17 vr7v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy προσώπῳ οὐ καρδίᾳ 1 Here, the word **face** represents physical presence, and the word **heart** represents thoughts and desires. Paul means that he and his fellow workers thought and cared about the Thessalonians (**by heart**) even though they were not physically present in Thessalonica (**by face**). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by physical presence, not by feelings” or “in person, not in affection” +2:17 yxzu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet περισσοτέρως ἐσπουδάσαμεν τὸ πρόσωπον ὑμῶν ἰδεῖν ἐν πολλῇ ἐπιθυμίᾳ 1 The terms **extremely eager** and **in much desire** mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “greatly desired to see your face” or “became filled with much eagerness to see your face” +2:17 ot1s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τὸ πρόσωπον ὑμῶν ἰδεῖν 1 The phrase **to see your face** refers to visiting someone and being with them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to visit you” or “to spend time with you” +2:17 jgi2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν πολλῇ ἐπιθυμίᾳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **desire**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “which we greatly desire” or “for which we yearn” +2:18 zlny rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases διότι 1 Here, the word **For** could introduce: (1) the basis or evidence for Paul’s claim in the previous verse that he and his fellow workers were eager to visit the Thessalonians. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “You know that is true because” (2) an inference from Paul’s claim in the previous verse about how eager he and his fellow workers were to visit the Thessalonians. Alternate translation: “Therefore,” or “So then,” +2:18 pnw3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐλθεῖν 1 Your language may say “go” rather than **come** in contexts such as this. Alternate translation: “to go” +2:18 n0jl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἐγὼ μὲν Παῦλος, καὶ ἅπαξ καὶ δίς 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “indeed I, Paul, desired to come to you both once and twice” +2:18 yj0w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom καὶ ἅπαξ καὶ δίς 1 Here, the phrase **both once and twice** could mean that: (1) Paul tried to visit the Thessalonians multiple times. In this case, Paul does not clarify how many times he tried. Alternate translation: “many times” (2) Paul tried to visit them twice. Alternate translation: “two times” or “twice” +2:18 uuae rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐνέκοψεν ἡμᾶς 1 Here Paul means that Satan prevented him and his fellow workers from visiting the Thessalonians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “prevented us from doing so” or “made it impossible for us to come” +2:19 j7j5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τίς γὰρ ἡμῶν ἐλπὶς ἢ χαρὰ ἢ στέφανος καυχήσεως? ἢ οὐχὶ καὶ ὑμεῖς, ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ, ἐν τῇ αὐτοῦ παρουσίᾳ? 1 Paul is using the question form to to show the Thessalonians how much he and his fellow workers value and care about them. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate these questions as statements or exclamations. Alternate translation: “For here is our hope and joy and crown of boasting: it is also you before our Lord Jesus at his coming!” or “For you are our hope and joy and crown of boasting before our Lord Jesus at his coming.” +2:19 mj9n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τίς & ἡμῶν ἐλπὶς ἢ χαρὰ ἢ στέφανος καυχήσεως 1 In the next question, Paul identifies the **hope**, **joy**, and **crown** as the Thessalonians themselves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question so that Paul is asking about people instead of things. Alternate translation: “who gives us hope and joy and a crown of boasting” +2:19 jfak rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τίς & ἡμῶν ἐλπὶς ἢ χαρὰ ἢ στέφανος καυχήσεως 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **hope** and **joy**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what makes us hopeful or joyful or gives us a crown of boasting” +2:19 uvb4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession στέφανος καυχήσεως 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **crown** that enables or causes **boasting**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “crown about which we boast” +2:19 e7tl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor στέφανος καυχήσεως 1 Here, Paul speaks of the honor and recognition that someone receives for accomplishing a task or goal as if it were a **crown**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “reward about which we boast” or “honor about which we boast” +2:19 hrvb rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants καυχήσεως 1 Here, many ancient manuscripts read **of boasting**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “of great joy.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. +2:19 q7f2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure καυχήσεως? ἢ οὐχὶ καὶ ὑμεῖς, ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ, ἐν τῇ αὐτοῦ παρουσίᾳ? 1 Here, the phrase **Or {is it} not even you** could: (1) introduce a second question that answers the first question. Paul is saying that the Thessalonians will be their **hope**, **joy**, and **crown** at Jesus’ coming. Alternate translation: “of boasting? In fact, is it not also you who are these things before our Lord Jesus at his coming?” (2) be a second question that answers the longer question that the phrase interrupts. In this case, you could use a form that marks the phrase as an interruption, or you could move it to the end of the verse. Alternate translation: “of boasting—is it not also you?—before our Lord Jesus at his coming?” or “of boasting before our Lord Jesus at his coming? Is it not also you?” +2:19 wf6q rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ἢ 3 Here, the word **Or** introduces the correct answer to the question that Paul asked in the first half of the verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a correct answer, or you could leave **Or** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “In fact,” +2:19 h7gh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **before our Lord Jesus** implies that Paul, his fellow workers, and the Thessalonians will be examined by **the Lord Jesus**. Paul is confident that Jesus will approve of the Thessalonians, which will give Paul and his fellow workers honor and joy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “before our Lord Jesus when he examines everyone” or “when we all are judged by the Lord Jesus” +2:19 on7u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 2 Here, the word **our** includes Paul, Silvanus, Timothy, the Thessalonians, and all believers. Your language may require you to mark this form. +2:19 mksc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῇ αὐτοῦ παρουσίᾳ 1 Here, the phrase **his coming** refers to the specific time in the future when Jesus will come back to earth, judge everyone, punish unbelievers, and reward believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “when he comes back to earth” or “at his return to us” +2:20 l3m0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γάρ 1 Here, the word **For** could introduce: (1) a restatement of the point that Paul made in the previous verse (See: [2:19](../02/19.md)). Alternate translation: “Yes,” (2) the basis for the point that Paul made in the previous verse (See: [2:19](../02/19.md)). Alternate translation: “That is because” +2:20 nlbd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐστε ἡ δόξα ἡμῶν, καὶ ἡ χαρά 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **glory** and **joy**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “cause us to feel glorious and joyful” or “glorify us and make us happy” +3:intro j379 0 # 1 Thessalonians 3 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n5. Timothy’s visit and good news (3:1–10)\n6. A benediction (3:11–13)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Timothy’s return to Paul\n\nAfter Paul, Timothy, and Silvanus left Thessalonica, they visited a city named Berea. Then, they visited a city named Athens. In [3:1](../03/01.md), Paul mentions that he and Silvanus stayed in Athens and sent Timothy to visit the Thessalonians. Eventually, Paul left Athens and went to Corinth. While he was in Corinth, Timothy returned from visiting the Thessalonians (see [Acts 18:1–5](../act/18/01.md)). In this chapter, Paul explains how happy he and his fellow workers became when they heard good news from Timothy about the Thessalonians. In fact, Timothy’s return to Paul is the reason why Paul wrote this letter.\n\n### Afflictions\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul refers to how he, his fellow workers, and other believers (including the Thessalonians) are or will experience afflictions. When Paul and his fellow workers visited Thessalonica and a nearby town named Berea, some other Jewish people tried to hurt them and have them arrested. These people also persecuted anyone who believed the gospel. You can read about these afflictions in [Acts 17:1–15](../act/17/01.md). Make sure that your translation clearly indicates this kind of persecution.\n\n### Paul’s prayer\n\nIn [3:11–13](../03/11.md), Paul includes a prayer that God would enable him and his fellow workers to visit the Thessalonians and that God would strengthen and bless the Thessalonians. Paul refers to God in the third person in this prayer, which was a common practice for this kind of prayer. Consider how you might include a prayer to God within a letter in your culture. +3:1 zvgz rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ 1 Here, the word **Therefore** introduces an inference or result based on what Paul said in the previous verses about how he and his fellow workers desired to visit the Thessalonians (see [2:17–20](../02/17.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or result. Alternate translation: “As a result of that” or “Because of that” +3:1 amxf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μηκέτι στέγοντες 1 Here Paul implies that he and his fellow workers could no longer endure being separated from the Thessalonians and longing to see them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “enduring our separation from you no longer” or “no longer enduring how we long to see you” +3:1 fqe3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result στέγοντες 1 Here, the word **enduring** could introduce: (1) the reason why Paul and his fellow workers **thought it good to be left behind**. Alternate translation: “since we could endure it” (2) the time when Paul and his fellow workers **thought it good to be left behind**. Alternate translation: “when we could endure it” +3:1 n47x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive μηκέτι στέγοντες, ηὐδοκήσαμεν καταλειφθῆναι 1 Here Paul could be saying that: (1) Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy could endure no longer and together decided that Paul and Silvanus should stay in Athens. Alternate translation: “enduring it no longer, Silvanus, Timothy, and I thought it good that Silvanus and I should be left behind” (2) Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy could endure no longer and together decided that Paul should stay in Athens by himself. Alternate translation: “enduring it no longer, Silvanus, Timothy, and I though it good that I should be left behind” (3) only Paul could endure no longer and himself decided that he should stay in Athens by himself. In this case, Paul uses the plural form to refer to himself only. Alternate translation: “enduring it no longer, I thought it good that I should be left behind” +3:1 ml5t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καταλειφθῆναι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to remain” or “to have everyone else leave us behind” +3:1 jvh4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἀθήναις 1 The word **Athens** is the name of a city. It was one of the most important cities in the country we call Greece. +3:2 vsoo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἐπέμψαμεν Τιμόθεον & ἡμῶν 1 Here, the words **we** and **our** do not include the Thessalonians. Make sure that your translation fits with how you chose to translate “we” in the previous verse. In this verse, the words **we** and **our** could refer to: (1) Paul and Silvanus. Alternate translation: “Silvanus and I sent Timothy, our” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I sent Timothy, my” +3:2 r42r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐπέμψαμεν Τιμόθεον 1 Here Paul implies that he and Silvanus **sent Timothy** to visit the Thessalonians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “we sent Timothy to you” +3:2 yyio rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν ἀδελφὸν ἡμῶν 1 Paul is using the term **brother** to mean a person who shares the same faith with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our believing friend” +3:2 lkvo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession διάκονον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **servant** who could: (1) serve **God**. Alternate translation: “one who serves God” (2) serve other people for God’s sake. Alternate translation: “one who serves others for God’s sake” +3:2 wykn rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants διάκονον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Many ancient manuscripts read **a servant of God**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “a fellow worker of God.” Other ancient manuscripts read “fellow worker.” Other manuscripts read “a servant of God and our fellow worker.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. +3:2 dsnc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν 1 The preposition **in** could refer to: (1) how Timothy works to preach the gospel. Alternate translation: “in preaching” (2) the means by which Timothy serves. Alternate translation: “by means of” +3:2 pqif rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **gospel** that could be: (1) about **Christ**. Alternate translation: “the gospel about Christ” (2) be from **Christ**. Alternate translation: “the gospel from Christ” +3:2 maoe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor στηρίξαι 1 Here, Paul is speaking of Timothy supporting or helping the Thessalonians in their faith as if he were making them physically stronger. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “help” +3:2 pizt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how you believe” +3:3 o4w8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal τὸ μηδένα σαίνεσθαι 1 Here, the word **that** could introduce: (1) another purpose for which Paul sent Timothy to the Thessalonians to strengthen and comfort them (see [3:2](../03/02.md)). Alternate translation: “in order that no one would be disturbed” (2) what Timothy strengthened and comforted the Thessalonians about. Alternate translation: “showing you that no one should be disturbed” or “that is, that no one be disturbed” +3:3 v8q7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μηδένα σαίνεσθαι ἐν ταῖς θλίψεσιν ταύταις 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “these afflictions disturb no one” +3:3 u7vo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ταῖς θλίψεσιν ταύταις 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **afflictions**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “by being afflicted” or “by how we are afflicted” +3:3 s8s2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation for why the Thessalonians should not **be disturbed**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation for a claim. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “You should not be disturbed because” +3:3 t0vs rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοὶ & οἴδατε 1 For emphasis, Paul is stating the pronoun **you**, which is already implied in the verb **know**. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction in your translation. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. The ULT does so by using the intensive pronoun **yourselves**. Alternate translation: “as for you, you know” or “it is you who know” +3:3 cdaa rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns εἰς τοῦτο 1 The pronoun **this** refers to experiencing the **afflictions** that Paul has mentioned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the **afflictions** more explicitly. Alternate translation: “for suffering these afflictions” +3:3 rkx9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive κείμεθα 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “God has appointed us” +3:3 gla7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive κείμεθα 1 By **we**, Paul includes himself, his fellow workers, and the Thessalonians, so use the inclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. +3:4 w95u rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ γὰρ 1 Here, the phrase **For also** introduces another reason why the Thessalonians should “not be disturbed by these afflictions” (see [3:3](../03/03.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces another reason for a claim. Alternate translation: “Another reason why you should not be disturbed is that” or “Further,” +3:4 wo6q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἦμεν, προελέγομεν ὑμῖν ὅτι μέλλομεν 1 Here, the word **we** in the clauses **we were with you** and **we were telling you** only includes Paul and his fellow workers. It does not include the Thessalonians. However, the word **we** in the clause **we are about to suffer affliction** does include the Thessalonians. Make sure that this is clear if your language marks these distinctions. +3:4 wuco rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations προελέγομεν ὑμῖν ὅτι μέλλομεν θλίβεσθαι, καθὼς 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “we were telling you in advance, ‘We are about to be afflicted,’ just as” +3:4 nm1l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μέλλομεν θλίβεσθαι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “people are about to afflict us” +3:4 qqri rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐγένετο καὶ οἴδατε 1 Here Paul means that what he and his fellow workers told the Thessalonians would happen did indeed happen, and the Thessalonians know it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it more explicit that the Thessalonians **know** that the afflictions **happened**. Alternate translation: “it happened, which you know” +3:5 tj4e rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns διὰ τοῦτο κἀγὼ μηκέτι στέγων, ἔπεμψα 1 Here, the word **this** could refer to: (1) what Paul said in the previous verse about how the believers have experienced affliction (See: [3:4](../03/04.md)). Alternate translation: “Because of those afflictions, I also, no longer enduring it, sent” (2) what Paul says in this verse about how he could no longer endure. Alternate translation: “Because I could no longer endure it, I also sent” +3:5 o9ep rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result μηκέτι στέγων 1 Here, much as in [3:1](../03/01.md), the word **enduring** could introduce: (1) the reason why Paul **sent** Timothy. Alternate translation: “since I could no longer endure it” (2) the time when Paul **sent** Timothy. Alternate translation: “when I could no longer endure it” +3:5 st3d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μηκέτι στέγων 1 Here, much as in [3:1](../03/01.md) Paul implies that he could no longer endure being separated from the Thessalonians and not knowing how they were doing. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “enduring my separation from you no longer” or “no longer enduring how I long to see you” +3:5 zn36 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔπεμψα 1 Here Paul implies that he **sent** Timothy to the Thessalonians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “sent Timothy to you” +3:5 judq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν πίστιν ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “whether you continue to believe” +3:5 raeh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μή πως 1 Here, the phrase **lest somehow** introduces something that Paul was worried about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “fearing that somehow” or “worrying that somehow” +3:5 nopp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ πειράζων 1 Here Paul uses the phrase **the tempter** to refer to the devil, Satan. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the tempter, Satan,” +3:5 ua7i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐπείρασεν ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul implies that he was worried not only that they would be **tempted** but also that they would stop believing when they were tempted. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “had somehow successfully tempted you” or “had tempted you with the result that you stopped believing” +3:5 gnow rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὁ κόπος ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **labor**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what we had done among you” +3:5 jnzb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εἰς κενὸν 1 Here, the phrase **in vain** identifies a cause that does not have its intended effect. In this case, Paul’s **labor** will not help the Thessalonians if the tempter successfully tempts them. If it would be helpful in your language, you use a word or phrase that identifies a cause that does not have its intended effect. Alternate translation: “for nothing” or “to no purpose” +3:6 r4pa rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces what actually happened in contrast to what Paul was worried about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that contrasts a concern with what actually happened. Alternate translation: “Despite my fears,” or “But here is what really happened:” +3:6 esxw rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background ἄρτι 1 Here, the phrase **just now** introduces the event that prompted Paul to write this letter, 1 Thessalonians. When Paul writes that Timothy returned **just now**, he is referring to the time immediately before he began writing this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces something that happened right before a person starts speaking about it. Alternate translation: “just before I started writing this letter,” or “a short while ago,” +3:6 gci4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive πρὸς ἡμᾶς & ἡμῖν & ἡμῶν & ἡμᾶς & ἡμεῖς 1 Every time the words **us** or **we** appear in this verse, they include Paul and Silvanus, but they do not include Timothy or the Thessalonians, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. +3:6 tu8d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν πίστιν καὶ τὴν ἀγάπην ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **faith** and **love**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Paul implies that the **faith** is in God and **love** is for other people. Alternate translation: “that you continue to believe in God and love other people” +3:6 fu8h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἔχετε μνείαν ἡμῶν ἀγαθὴν πάντοτε 1 Here, the clause **you always have good memory of us** indicates that the Thessalonians remembered Paul and his fellow workers as people whom they liked and would want to meet again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable clause or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you always have pleasant memories about us” or “you always remember us fondly” +3:6 tf95 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐπιποθοῦντες 1 Here, the word **longing** could introduce: (1) another thing that the Thessalonians do. If you use the following alternate translation, you should delete the comma before **longing**. Alternate translation: “and that you long” (2) a result of the kind of **memory** that the Thessalonians have. Alternate translation: “so that you long” +3:6 e6kx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καὶ ἡμεῖς ὑμᾶς 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “we also long to see you” +3:7 dpij rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns διὰ τοῦτο 1 Here, the word **this** refers to what Paul said in the previous verse about what Timothy reported about the Thessalonians’ faith, love, and good memory of Paul and his fellow workers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Because of this good news” or “Because of what Timothy told us” +3:7 by7h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive παρεκλήθημεν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “we felt encouragement” or “God encouraged us” +3:7 grk5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐφ’ ὑμῖν 1 Here, the phrase translated **about you** could identify: (1) what Paul and his fellow workers are **encouraged** about. Alternate translation: “concerning you” (2) the reason why Paul and his fellow workers are **encouraged**. Alternate translation: “because of you” +3:7 csz7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ ἀνάγκῃ καὶ θλίψει ἡμῶν 1 The terms **distress** and **affliction** mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “in all our affliction” or “in all our troubles” +3:7 e96u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ ἀνάγκῃ καὶ θλίψει ἡμῶν, διὰ τῆς ὑμῶν πίστεως 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **distress**, **affliction**, and **faith**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “whenever we were distressed and afflicted, through how you believe” +3:8 m2rq rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why what Paul said in the previous verse about being encouraged is true (See: [3:7](../03/07.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a previous claim. Alternate translation: “That is because” or “That happened because” +3:8 utk3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result νῦν ζῶμεν, ἐὰν ὑμεῖς στήκετε ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the basis for the first phrase. Alternate translation: “if you yourselves stand firm in the Lord, now we live” +3:8 tcv6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit νῦν 1 Here, the word **now** could refer to: (1) the time when Paul and his fellow workers **live**. Alternate translation: “presently” or “at this moment” (2) the result of how the Thessalonians **stand firm**. Alternate translation: “as a result” or “then” +3:8 y1vb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ζῶμεν 1 Here, the phrase **we live** means that Paul and his fellow workers are refreshed and able to enjoy their lives. Paul does not mean that they were dead or about to die and are now alive again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we can really live” or “we are refreshed” +3:8 zbyo rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “since” +3:8 x4zn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὑμεῖς στήκετε ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 Here, the phrase **stand firm in** indicates that people are remaining faithful to whomever they are **in**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you yourselves remain faithful to the Lord” or “you yourselves persist in trusting the Lord” +3:8 e3pe rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὑμεῖς στήκετε 1 For emphasis, Paul is stating the pronoun **you**, which is already implied in the verb **stand**. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction in your translation. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. The ULT does so by using the intensive pronoun **yourselves**. Alternate translation: “you indeed stand firm” or “it is you who stand firm” +3:9-10 pzq7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τίνα γὰρ εὐχαριστίαν δυνάμεθα τῷ Θεῷ ἀνταποδοῦναι περὶ ὑμῶν, ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ χαρᾷ ᾗ χαίρομεν δι’ ὑμᾶς, ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν. νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας, ὑπέρἐκπερισσοῦ δεόμενοι εἰς τὸ ἰδεῖν ὑμῶν τὸ πρόσωπον, καὶ καταρτίσαι τὰ ὑστερήματα τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν? 1 Here Paul is using the question form to show the Thessalonians how thankful he is that they continue to trust God. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this one as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “For we give back to God very many thanks concerning you for all the joy with which we rejoice before our God because of you, night and day pleading earnestly to see your face and to provide what is lacking in your faith!” +3:9 b5o6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces further information about how Paul and his fellow workers responded to the good news about the Thessalonians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces more information, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “Further,” +3:9 vu2k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive δυνάμεθα & χαίρομεν & ἡμῶν 1 Here, the word **we** in the phrases **are we able** and **we rejoice** only includes Paul and his fellow workers. It does not include the Thessalonians. However, the word **our** in the phrase **our God** does include the Thessalonians. Make sure that this is clear if your language marks these distinctions. +3:9 pdc5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τίνα & εὐχαριστίαν δυνάμεθα τῷ Θεῷ ἀνταποδοῦναι 1 Here Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers owe God a debt that they can pay back by giving **thanks**. He means that the appropriate response to God’s work among the Thessalonians is to give thanks to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “how can we be thankful enough to God” or “what kind of thanksgiving could we give to God” +3:9 gvvx rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants τῷ Θεῷ & τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν 1 Many ancient manuscripts read **to God** and **our God**. The ULT follows that reading. A few ancient manuscripts read “to the Lord” and “our Lord.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. +3:9 j6pj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ χαρᾷ ᾗ χαίρομεν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **joy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “for how joyfully we rejoice” +3:9 u00t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ χαρᾷ ᾗ χαίρομεν 1 Here Paul uses both the word **joy** and the word **rejoice** to emphasize how much joy he and his fellow workers have. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “for how greatly we rejoice” or “for how much joy we experience” +3:9 p5ka rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **before our God** means that Paul and his fellow workers **rejoice** in God’s presence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in the presence of our God” or “when we approach God” +3:10 v6y0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας 1 Here, the phrase **night and day** indicates that Paul and his fellow workers were **pleading earnestly** during both the day and the night. This means that they were **pleading earnestly** very often every day. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all the time” or “always” +3:10 wj8y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὑπέρἐκπερισσοῦ δεόμενοι 1 Here Paul implies that he and his fellow workers pray to God when they are **pleading**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “pleading earnestly with God” +3:10 eb26 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εἰς τὸ ἰδεῖν ὑμῶν τὸ πρόσωπον 1 The phrase **to see your face** refers to visiting someone and being with them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to visit you” or “to spend time with you” +3:10 s0xz rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns ὑμῶν τὸ πρόσωπον 1 Here Paul speaks as if the Thessalonians together had one **face**, but he is referring to each of their faces. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “your faces” +3:10 uqwr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καταρτίσαι τὰ ὑστερήματα τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν 1 Here Paul could be implying that the Thessalonians are **lacking**: (1) knowledge about God that should be included in their **faith**. Alternate translation: “to teach you more about your faith” (2) some aspects of **faith** in God. Alternate translation: “to enable you to have faith completely” +3:10 e5fh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in what you believe” +3:11-13 tet9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing αὐτὸς δὲ ὁ Θεὸς καὶ Πατὴρ ἡμῶν, καὶ ὁ Κύριος ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦς, κατευθύναι τὴν ὁδὸν ἡμῶν πρὸς ὑμᾶς. ὑμᾶς δὲ ὁ Κύριος πλεονάσαι καὶ περισσεύσαι τῇ ἀγάπῃ εἰς ἀλλήλους, καὶ εἰς πάντας, καθάπερ καὶ ἡμεῖς εἰς ὑμᾶς; εἰς τὸ στηρίξαι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας, ἀμέμπτους ἐν ἁγιωσύνῃ ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν, ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ, μετὰ πάντων τῶν ἁγίων αὐτοῦ. ἀμήν! 1 Here Paul is asking God to bless the Thessalonians. You could express this as either a blessing or a prayer, in whichever way is more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “But we ask our God and Father himself and our Lord Jesus to direct our way to you. We ask the Lord to make you increase and abound in love for one another and for all, just as we also toward you, to strengthen your hearts, blameless in holiness before our God and Father, at the coming of our Lord Jesus with all his saints. Amen!” +3:11 kdk9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces a new topic. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new topic, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Now” +3:11 um1c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor αὐτὸς & ὁ Θεὸς καὶ Πατὴρ ἡμῶν, καὶ ὁ Κύριος ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦς, κατευθύναι τὴν ὁδὸν ἡμῶν πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 Paul speaks about God the Father and the Lord Jesus as if they were directing Paul’s way and his fellow worker’s ways. He could mean that God the Father and the Lord Jesus: (1) are like guides who take Paul and his fellow workers to meet the Thessalonians, which would enable Paul and his fellow workers to visit the Thessalonians. Alternate translation: “may our God and Father himself and our Lord Jesus bring us to you” (2) enable Paul and his fellow workers to overcome obstacles that prevent them from visiting the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “may our God and Father himself and our Lord Jesus remove everything that prevents us from visiting you” (3) lead Paul and his fellow workers on a straight path to the Thessalonians, which would enable Paul and his fellow workers to visit the Thessalonians soon. Alternate translation: “may our God and Father himself and our Lord Jesus enable us to visit you soon” +3:11 f3wh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ὁ Θεὸς καὶ Πατὴρ ἡμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **our God and Father** refers to the one divine person who is both God and Father. The word **God** and the word **Father** refer to the same person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. See how you translated the similar phrase in [1:3](../01/03.md). Alternate translation: “God our Father” or “our Father God” +3:11 mc2m rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτὸς & ὁ Θεὸς καὶ Πατὴρ ἡμῶν 1 For emphasis, Paul is stating the pronoun “he,” which is already implied in the the phrase **our God and Father**. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction in your translation. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. The ULT does so by using the intensive pronoun **himself**. Alternate translation: “he who is our God and Father” or “God our Father indeed” +3:11 bql9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν & ἡμῶν & ἡμῶν 1 Here, the word **our** in the phrases **our God** and **our Lord** includes all believers. The word **our** in the phrase **our way** only includes Paul and his fellow workers. It does not include the Thessalonians. Make sure that this is clear if your language marks these distinctions. +3:12 eeu2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces the next part of Paul’s prayer. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces another section, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” +3:12 f4ma rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ὑμᾶς & ὁ Κύριος πλεονάσαι καὶ περισσεύσαι 1 The terms **increase** and **abound** mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “may the Lord make you very much abound” or “may the Lord make you increase greatly” +3:12 o80n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ ἀγάπῃ εἰς ἀλλήλους, καὶ εἰς πάντας, καθάπερ καὶ ἡμεῖς εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **love**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in how you love one another and all, just as we also love you” +3:12 gyy3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj εἰς πάντας 1 Paul is using the adjective **all** as a noun to refer to all people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “for all humans” +3:12 dm6c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καὶ ἡμεῖς εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “we also increase and abound in love for you” +3:13 taws rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς τὸ στηρίξαι 1 Here the phrase **to strengthen** introduces the purpose for which Paul prays that the Lord will make the Thessalonians increase in love (see [3:12](../03/12.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a purpose. Alternate translation: “in order that he might strengthen” or “and I pray those things so that he might strengthen” +3:13 ly21 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς τὸ στηρίξαι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας 1 Here Paul speaks of the Thessalonians becoming spiritually stronger as if their **hearts** were being strengthened. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to strengthen you spiritually” or “to make you stronger on the inside” +3:13 wb3l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας, ἀμέμπτους 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply words such as “so that they will be” if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “your hearts so that they will be blameless” or “your hearts so that you will be blameless” +3:13 ms8t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἁγιωσύνῃ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **holiness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in how holy you are” +3:13 p12j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **before our God and Father** refers to being in the presence of **our God and Father**. In this case, the phrase emphasizes that God is the one who will declare the Thessalonians to be **blameless in holiness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in the presence of our God and Father” or “according to our God and Father” +3:13 jev8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **our God and Father** refers to the one divine person who is both God and Father. The word **God** and the word **Father** refer to the same person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. See how you translated the similar phrase in [3:11](../03/11.md). Alternate translation: “God our Father” or “our Father God” +3:13 r8sb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν -1 In both places, the word **our** includes Paul, Silvanus, Timothy, the Thessalonians, and all believers. Your language may require you to mark this form. +3:13 ytqg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **the coming of our Lord Jesus** refers to the specific time in the future when Jesus will come back to earth, judge everyone, punish unbelievers, and reward believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “when our Lord Jesus comes back to earth” or “at return of our Lord Jesus to us” +3:13 vnsi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μετὰ πάντων τῶν ἁγίων αὐτοῦ 1 Here, the word **saints** could refer to: (1) believers. Alternate translation: “with everyone who believes in him” (2) believers and angels. Alternate translation: “with all his holy angels and those who believe in him” (3) angels. Alternate translation: “with all his holy angels” +4:intro b1z5 0 # 1 Thessalonians 4 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n7. Teaching on sexual morality (4:1–8)\n8. Teaching on Christian love (4:9–12)\n9. Teaching on the day of the Lord (4:13–5:11)\n * Dead believers and the day of the Lord (4:13–18)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Sexual morality\n\nIn [4:3–8](../04/03.md), Paul commands the Thessalonians to act in holy ways, particularly in relation to their sexual behavior. He does not provide specific details, but he does require them to exercise self-control and to avoid hurting a fellow believer. In the Thessalonians’ culture, sexual immorality was very common. Men and women would have sex with people who were not their own spouses, and older men would have sex with younger men. If a Christian had sex with another Christian to whom he or she was not married, it could easily hurt or exploit that person or that person’s family. Paul wants the Corinthians to completely avoid this possibility. \n\n### Brotherly love\n\nIn [4:9–12](../04/09.md), Paul praises the Corinthians for showing “brotherly love.” He means that they love each other as if they were members of the same family. He also encourages them to show this kind of love even more, which includes staying out of other people’s private affairs and making sure that they can provide for themselves instead of depending on other people. \n\n### Dead believers\n\nThe Thessalonians were worried that believers who had died might not experience some of the wonderful things that will happen when Jesus comes back. In [4:13–18](../04/13.md), Paul assures them that believers who had died not miss anything when Jesus comes back. In fact, he tells them that believers who have died will meet Jesus first, before everyone who is still alive meets him. He wants them to encourage or comfort each other with this teaching. \n\n### The coming of the Lord\n\nIn [4:13–18](../04/13.md), Paul teaches the Thessalonians about what will happen when Jesus comes back. He describes Jesus’ return with powerful language that includes angels, people being lifted up into the sky, and loud sounds. Scholars debate whether Paul described Jesus’ return with symbolic language or whether he described specific events that will happen when Jesus comes back. Your translation should express Paul’s descriptions as clearly as possible while allowing for both interpretations of his words. \n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### “His own vessel”\n\nIn [4:4](../04/04.md), Paul urges each Thessalonian to “possess his own vessel in sanctification and honor.” Paul could be using the word “vessel” in several different ways. First (1), and most likely, he could be using “vessel” as a euphemism for the sexual organ. In this case, he is urging the Thessalonians to have self-control over their sexual desires the acts. Also, he is addressing men directly but also includes women in his command. Second (2), he could be using “vessel” as a metaphor for the physical body. In this case, he is focusing particularly on the sexual aspect of the physical body, just like in option (1). Third (3), and least likely, Paul could be using “vessel” as a metaphor for a man’s wife. In this case, he is urging each Thessalonian man to be sexually faithful to his wife. It is recommended that you follow option (1) or perhaps option (2) since these are the most likely explanations for why Paul uses the word “vessel.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### “The ones sleeping”\n\nIn [4:13–15](../04/13.md), Paul refers to people who are “sleeping.” This was a polite way in his culture to refer to people who had died. Paul does not have any deeper meaning in mind. Consider how, in your culture, you might politely refer to people who had died. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Did Paul think that Jesus would come back before he himself died?\n\nIn [4:15](../04/15.md) and [4:17](../04/17.md), Paul uses the word “we” to include himself among the believers who are alive when Jesus comes back. Some scholars think that this implies that Paul believed or hoped that Jesus would come back before Paul died. However, other scholars think that Paul used the word “we” because he was referring to believers who are alive, and of course he was alive when he wrote this letter. In your translation, you should use an inclusive form of “we” if your language marks that distinction, but you should not include any further clarification. \n\n### What is the sequence of events in [4:15–17](../04/15.md)?\n\nIn these verses, Paul describes several events that will occur in sequence. Based on what he says, we can be relatively sure that the following three events will occur in this order: (1) the Lord Jesus will come down from heaven, (2) believers who have died will resurrect and go with the Lord, and (3) believers who are still alive with be taken up to meet the Lord in the air. It is less clear whether the “loud command,” the “voice of an archangel” and the “trumpet of God” happen before or during Jesus’ descent from heaven. Also, it is not clear whether Jesus and believers go up to heaven or come back to earth, although coming back to earth is slightly more likely. Make sure that your translation clearly presents the three main events in sequence, and if possible, allow for several different interpretations for the other elements. +4:1 udi2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Here, the word **Therefore** introduces a development in Paul’s argument. He is transitioning from rejoicing about the Thessalonians to instructing them about how to act and what to believe. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of development. Alternate translation: “So” or “Given all that” +4:1 vtas rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases λοιπὸν 1 Here, the word **finally** signals to the audience that Paul is starting the last section of his letter. The word does not mean that Paul is about to finish the letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the last major part of a letter. Alternate translation: “lastly” or “in this last section” +4:1 u2lw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἐρωτῶμεν ὑμᾶς καὶ παρακαλοῦμεν 1 The terms **ask** and **encourage** mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “we strongly encourage you” or “we urgently ask you” +4:1 foeh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in the Lord Jesus** to describe the union of believers with **Jesus**. In this case, being **in the Lord Jesus**, or united to Jesus, could specifically explain: (1) the reason why Paul and his fellow workers **ask and exhort** the Thessalonians. Alternate translation: “because of your union with the Lord Jesus” (2) the authority by which Paul and his fellow workers **ask and exhort** the Thessalonians. Alternate translation: “as those who represent the Lord Jesus” +4:1 p4db rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor περιπατεῖν & περιπατεῖτε 1 Paul speaks of behavior in life as if it were **walking**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. See you how you translated the similar phrase in [2:12](../02/12.md). Alternate translation: “to act … you are acting” or “to live your lives … you are living your lives” +4:1 ckii rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys περιπατεῖν καὶ ἀρέσκειν Θεῷ 1 Here, **to walk and to please** expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **please** describes the way in which the Thessalonian church should **walk**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “to walk in a way that is pleasing to God” or “to walk so that you please God” +4:1 q937 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ἵνα 1 Here, the word **that** could introduce: (1) what it is that Paul and his fellow workers **ask and exhort** the Thessalonians to do. Alternate translation: “we ask that” (2) the purpose for which Paul and his fellow workers **ask and exhort** the Thessalonians. Alternate translation: “in order that” +4:1 e3cd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit περισσεύητε μᾶλλον 1 Here Paul implies that he and his fellow workers want the Thessalonians to **abound even more** in pleasing God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “you might abound even more in doing what is pleasing to God” +4:2 ebjm rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse about how the Thessalonians received instructions from Paul and his fellow workers (See: [4:1](../04/01.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “In fact,” +4:2 oyu3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐδώκαμεν ὑμῖν 1 Here Paul refers to what he and his fellow workers told the Thessalonians when they first visited them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “we, when we were with you, gave you” +4:2 vg16 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **through the Lord Jesus** indicates that Paul and his fellow workers said what **the Lord Jesus** wanted them to say. In other words, they spoke with the authority of **the Lord Jesus**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “as we spoke what the Lord Jesus wanted” or “by the authority of the Lord Jesus” +4:3 lit4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γάρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces specific examples of the “commands” that Paul and his fellow workers gave to the Thessalonians (See: [4:2](../04/02.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces specific examples, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Specifically” or “For example, we told you that” +4:3 idjo rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τοῦτο & ἐστιν θέλημα τοῦ Θεοῦ, ὁ ἁγιασμὸς ὑμῶν 1 Here, the word **this** refers to the phrase **your sanctification**. Paul uses this form to emphasize **sanctification**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way that emphasizes **sanctification**. Alternate translation: “your sanctification is the will of God” or “the will of God is your sanctification” +4:3 ycsw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns θέλημα τοῦ Θεοῦ, ὁ ἁγιασμὸς ὑμῶν, 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **will** and **sanctification**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what God wants, that you become holy” +4:3 lgac rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ ἁγιασμὸς ὑμῶν, ἀπέχεσθαι ὑμᾶς 1 Here, the phrase **that you keep yourselves** introduces an explanation of what Paul means when he uses the word **sanctification**. This explanation continues in [4:4–6](../04/04.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “your sanctification, that is, that you keep yourselves” +4:3 uuu4 ἀπέχεσθαι ὑμᾶς ἀπὸ 1 Alternate translation: “that you stay away from” or “that you avoid” +4:3 o59a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς πορνείας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **immorality**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “doing what is sexually immoral” or “acting in sexually immoral ways” +4:4 s4yl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰδέναι ἕκαστον ὑμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **that each of you knows** could: (1) give another example of what “sanctification” means (See: [4:3](../04/03.md)). Alternate translation: “and that each of you knows” (2) describe more specifically what it means to avoid “sexual immorality” (See: [4:3](../04/03.md)). Alternate translation: “more specifically, that each of you knows” +4:4 vhbp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰδέναι ἕκαστον ὑμῶν & κτᾶσθαι 1 Here, the word **knows** could refer specifically to: (1) learning how to do something. Alternate translation: “that each of you learns to possess” (2) understanding something. Alternate translation: “that each of you understands how to possess” +4:4 arkf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism τὸ ἑαυτοῦ σκεῦος, κτᾶσθαι 1 Here, the word **vessel** could refer to: (1) a person’s sexual organ. This is a euphemism. Alternate translation: “to possess his own sexual organ” (2) a man’s wife. This is a metaphor. Alternate translation: “to possess his own wife” +4:4 f4ux rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ ἑαυτοῦ σκεῦος, κτᾶσθαι 1 The meaning of the verb **possess** depends on what the word **vessel** means (See: the previous note): (1) If the word **vessel** refers to the body or more specifically to the sexual organ, the word **possess** refers to people having control over their bodies. Alternate translation: “to exercise control over his sexual organs” or “to exercise sexual self-control” (2) If the word **vessel** refers to a wife, the word **possess** could refer to a man having sex with his wife. Alternate translation: “to have sexual relations with his wife” (3) If the word **vessel** refers to a wife, the word **possess** could refer to a man marrying a woman. Alternate translation: “to marry a wife” +4:4 fpyv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations τὸ ἑαυτοῦ σκεῦος 1 The referent of the word **his** depends on what the word **vessel** means (See: the previous two notes): (1) If the word **vessel** refers to a person’s sexual organ, Paul is using the word **his** in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “his or her own vessel” (2) If the word **vessel** refers to a wife, Paul is using the word **his** to refer only to men and not to women. Alternate translation: “the vessel that is his” +4:4 ihqe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἁγιασμῷ καὶ τιμῇ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **sanctification** and **honor**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in holy and honorable ways” +4:5 y9g2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast μὴ ἐν πάθει ἐπιθυμίας 1 Here, **not in the passion of lust** contrasts with the previous phrase “in holiness and honor” (See: [4:4](../04/04.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “and in contrast, not in the passion of lust” +4:5 utvd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μὴ ἐν πάθει ἐπιθυμίας 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **passion** and **lust**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “not passionately lusting” +4:5 vjej rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession πάθει ἐπιθυμίας 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to connect **passion** and **lust**. More specifically, he could be referring to: (1) **passion** that is characterized by **lust**. Alternate translation: “lustful passion” (2) **lust** that is characterized by **passion**. Alternate translation: “passionate lust” +4:5 nrmz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καθάπερ καὶ τὰ ἔθνη τὰ μὴ εἰδότα τὸν Θεόν 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply words such as “behave” or “act” if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “just as also the Gentiles behave, the ones not knowing God” or “just as also the Gentiles, the ones not knowing God, act” +4:5 w03g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish τὰ ἔθνη τὰ μὴ εἰδότα τὸν Θεόν 1 Here Paul is distinguishing from **Gentiles** who do not know God from Gentiles who do know God. Be sure that this distinction is clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles, specifically the ones not knowing God” or “all the Gentiles who do not know God” +4:5 lbvc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τὰ μὴ εἰδότα τὸν Θεόν 1 Here, the phrase **not knowing God** means that these **Gentiles** do not listen to, trust in, or obey God. It does not mean that they do not know about God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ones not listening to God” or “the ones not obeying God” +4:6 ho6h rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal τὸ μὴ ὑπερβαίνειν 1 Here, the phrase **not to transgress** could introduce: (1) the purpose of what Paul has said in [4:3–5](../04/03.md) about abstaining from sexual immorality. Alternate translation: “in order not to transgress” (2) another example of what “sanctification” means (See: [4:3](../04/03.md)). Alternate translation: “and that each of you does not transgress” (3) another description of what it means to avoid “sexual immorality” (See: [4:3](../04/03.md)). Alternate translation: “that each of you does not transgress” +4:6 wmb6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ὑπερβαίνειν καὶ πλεονεκτεῖν 1 The two terms **transgress** and **take advantage of** work together to express a single idea. The phrase **take advantage of** tells how a person might **transgress**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning in a different way. Alternate translation: “transgress through taking advantage of” or “transgress, taking advantage of” +4:6 yudl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ 1 Paul is using the term **brother** to mean a person who shares the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his believing friend” +4:6 knir rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ 1 Here Paul could be using the masculine form **his brother** to refer to: (1) specific fellow believers, whether men or women. Alternate translation: “any brother or sister” or “his or her brother or sister” (2) specific male believers, specifically men in charge of families. Alternate translation: “any brother in charge of a family” +4:6 ckez rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῷ πράγματι 1 Here, the phrase **this matter** refers to what Paul has been speaking about: sexual morality. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in the area of sexual morality” or “in his sexual behavior” +4:6 q7bf rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διότι 1 Here, the word **for** introduces a reason why the Thessalonians should obey God by avoiding sexual immorality. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason, or you could leave **for** untranslated. Alternate translation: “and you should behave in these ways because” or “all of which you should do since” +4:6 ax3k rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns πάντων τούτων 1 Here, the phrase **all these things** refers to the sinful sexual behaviors that Paul has mentioned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “all these sexually immoral behaviors” or “every sexual sin” +4:6 d1ip rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καθὼς καὶ προείπαμεν ὑμῖν καὶ διεμαρτυράμεθα 1 Here Paul refers to what he and his fellow workers told the Thessalonians when they visited them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “just as we also we also said before to you and testified when we visited you” +4:6 ix4p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet καὶ προείπαμεν ὑμῖν καὶ διεμαρτυράμεθα 1 The terms **said before** and **testified** mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “we also solemnly warned you before” or “we also already testified to you” +4:7 v3np rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason or basis for what Paul has said about avoiding sexual immorality (See: [4:3–6](../04/03.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis. Alternate translation: “All that is important because” +4:7 q4tj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 Here, the word **us** includes Paul, his fellow workers, and the Thessalonians. Your language may require you to mark this form. +4:7 qx6y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, ἀλλ’ ἐν ἁγιασμῷ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **uncleanness** and **sanctification**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “to be unclean, but to be sanctified” or “to act in unclean ways, but in holy ways” +4:7 qli0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλ’ ἐν ἁγιασμῷ 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “but he called us in sanctification” +4:8 mn5y rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result τοιγαροῦν 1 Here, the word **Therefore** introduces an inference or conclusion from what Paul has said in [4:3–7](../04/03.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use another word that introduces an inference or conclusion. Alternate translation: “Because of all that” or “In conclusion” +4:8 gzz8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὁ ἀθετῶν 1 Here, the word **this** refers back to what Paul has commanded the Thessalonians about living holy lives and avoiding sexual immorality. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the one rejecting these commands about sexual morality” or “the one rejecting what we have said about sexual behavior” +4:8 kfcb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure οὐκ ἄνθρωπον ἀθετεῖ, ἀλλὰ τὸν Θεὸν, τὸν διδόντα 1 If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse the two elements here. Alternate translation: “rejects God, not man, and God is the one who gives” +4:8 b7q5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπον 1 Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “a person” or “a man or woman” +4:8 zm4y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish τὸν διδόντα 1 Here Paul is adding more information about **God**. He is not distinguishing between different gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly adds information instead of distinguishing between people. Alternate translation: “who is the one who gives” +4:8 v4lc rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants τὸν διδόντα 1 Many ancient manuscripts read **the one giving**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “the one having given.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. +4:8 azkx rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants ὑμᾶς 1 Many ancient manuscripts read **you**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “us.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. +4:9 uxn8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces a new section in the letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new section, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Next,” +4:9 rpmn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς φιλαδελφίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **love**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “loving the brothers” or “how to love others in a brotherly way” +4:9 qf9x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῆς φιλαδελφίας 1 Here Paul uses the phrase **brotherly love** to refer to love for people who share the same faith, both men and women. If possible, use the same form you have used to translate the word “brothers.” Alternate translation: “love for believers” +4:9 sgen rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὐ χρείαν ἔχετε γράφειν ὑμῖν, αὐτοὶ γὰρ ὑμεῖς θεοδίδακτοί ἐστε, εἰς τὸ ἀγαπᾶν ἀλλήλους 1 If your language would naturally state a reason before its result, you could reverse the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “because you yourselves are taught by God to love one another, you have no need {for us} to write to you” +4:9 l1n7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants ἔχετε 1 Many ancient manuscripts read **you have**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “we have.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. +4:9 fyqe rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **for** introduces a reason why Paul and his fellow workers do not need to write to the Thessalonians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a claim, or you could leave **for** untranslated. Alternate translation: “since” +4:9 ctiq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive αὐτοὶ & ὑμεῖς θεοδίδακτοί ἐστε 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has taught you yourselves” +4:9 zroq rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοὶ & ὑμεῖς & ἐστε 1 For emphasis, Paul is stating the pronoun **you**, which is already implied in the verb **are**. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction in your translation. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. The ULT does so by using the intensive pronoun **yourselves**. Alternate translation: “it is you who are” or “as for you, you are” +4:10 dec9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ γὰρ ποιεῖτε 1 Here, the phrase **For also** introduces another reason why Paul and his fellow workers do not need to write to the Thessalonians (see [4:9](../04/09.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces another reason or basis for a claim, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Again, we do not need to write to you about this, since you do” or “Even more, you do” +4:10 hg7a rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ποιεῖτε αὐτὸ 1 Here, the word **it** refers to “brotherly love” (see [4:9](../04/09.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “you show brotherly love” +4:10 u3fl rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces a slight contrast between what the Thessalonians are doing and how Paul wants them to do it **even more**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Now” or “Yet” +4:10 z51t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit περισσεύειν μᾶλλον 1 Here Paul implies that he and his fellow workers want the Thessalonians to **abound** in brotherly love **even more**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to abound even more in brotherly love” +4:11 d2fg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡσυχάζειν 1 Here, the phrase **to be quiet** refers to living in a peaceful way that does not disrupt others. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to avoid disrupting others” or “to behave calmly around other people” +4:11 j4c7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πράσσειν τὰ ἴδια 1 Here, the phrase **to perform your own things** refers to focusing on one’s own tasks and responsibilities instead of becoming involved in other people’s private affairs. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to focus on your own own affairs” or “to stay out of other people’s business” +4:11 jmt9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐργάζεσθαι ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσὶν ὑμῶν 1 Here Paul uses the phrase **work with your own hands** to indicate that the Thessalonians should support themselves instead of relying on others to provide for them. He does not mean that they must do physical labor. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to provide for yourselves” or “to earn your own living” +4:11 bz8s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καθὼς ὑμῖν παρηγγείλαμεν 1 Here Paul refers to what he and his fellow workers **commanded** the Thessalonians when they visited them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “just as we commanded you when we visited you” +4:12 wj25 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἵνα 1 Here, the phrase **so that** could introduce: (1) the result of doing what Paul has commanded in [4:10–11](../04/10.md). Alternate translation: “with the result that” (2) the purpose of doing what Paul has commanded in [4:10–11](../04/10.md). Alternate translation: “in order that” +4:12 hp6g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor περιπατῆτε 1 Paul speaks of behavior in life as if it were walking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you may act” or “you may live your lives” +4:12 k59r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τοὺς ἔξω 1 Here, the phrase **the ones outside** identifies people who do not belong to the group of believers in Thessalonica. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that refers to people who do not belong to a specific group. Alternate translation: “the outsiders” or “the unbelievers” +4:12 nait rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μηδενὸς 1 Here word translated **nothing** could refer: (1) to things. In this case, Paul wants them to have everything that they need. Alternate translation: “of no essential things” (2) to people. In this case, Paul wants them to be independent and not rely on other people to provide for them. Alternate translation: “of nobody” or “of support from no person” +4:13 vi2y rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces a new section in the letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new section, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Next,” +4:13 lan8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐ θέλομεν & ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative word **ignorant**. Alternate translation: “we want you to know” +4:13 j68e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism τῶν κοιμωμένων 1 Here, the phrase **the ones sleeping** is a polite way to refer to people who have died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar polite phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the ones having passed away” or “the ones who are dead” +4:13 ocjp rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The connecting words **so that** introduce the purpose for which Paul wants to instruct the Thessalonians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a purpose or goal. Alternate translation: “in order that” +4:13 jggl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis οἱ λοιποὶ, οἱ μὴ ἔχοντες ἐλπίδα 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “the rest grieve, the ones not having hope” or “the rest who have no hope grieve” +4:13 p5zs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish οἱ λοιποὶ, οἱ μὴ ἔχοντες ἐλπίδα 1 Here Paul is distinguishing between people who have hope and people who do not have hope. Be sure that this distinction is clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “the rest who do not have hope” or “the rest, that is, those who do not have hope” +4:13 r9f8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj οἱ λοιποὶ 1 Paul is using the adjective **rest** as a noun to refer to a group of people that includes everyone who does not have hope. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the rest of people” or “everyone else” +4:13 f9eq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐλπίδα 1 Here Paul implies that the **hope** concerns what happens to people after they die. People who do not have **hope** do not expect anyone who dies to live again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “hope that people will live again” or “hope of resurrection” +4:13 puvg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οἱ μὴ ἔχοντες ἐλπίδα 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hope**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the ones not hoping” or “the ones not expecting anything” +4:14 mola rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why the Thessalonians should not grieve like other people do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a claim, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “You should not grieve in those ways because,” or “Indeed,” +4:14 j09o rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 Paul speaks as if this were a hypothetical situation, but he means that it must be true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is uncertain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because” +4:14 ybz6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive πιστεύομεν 1 Here, the word **we** includes Paul, his fellow workers, and the Thessalonians, so use the inclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. +4:14 tfzg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀνέστη 1 Here, the word **rose** refers to how Jesus came back to life after he **died**. If your language does not use **rose** to describe coming back to life, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “came back to life” or “lived again” +4:14 kmk2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis οὕτως καὶ ὁ Θεὸς 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “we believe that thus also God” +4:14 wr6t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure οὕτως καὶ ὁ Θεὸς 1 The phrase **thus also** could go with: (1) **God will bring**. In this case, **thus also** indicates that believers will experience something that is similar to how Jesus died and rose again. Alternate translation: “we can also believe that, in a similar way, God” (2) the implied phrase “we believe.” In this case, **thus also** indicates that believing that Christians will resurrect is based on believing in Jesus’ resurrection. Alternate translation: “thus also we believe that God” +4:14 qehi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ Θεὸς τοὺς κοιμηθέντας διὰ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἄξει σὺν αὐτῷ 1 Here Paul does not explicitly state all the elements in his comparison between **Jesus** and the **the ones having slept**. He states that Jesus **died and rose**, and he implies that this will be true for **the ones having slept**. He states that **the ones having slept** will be brought **with** Jesus, and he implies that Jesus is coming back to this world. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make these two implicit ideas more explicit. Alternate translation: “God will raise the ones having slept through Jesus and will bring them with him when he comes back” +4:14 skuw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἄξει 1 Here, the phrase **will bring** could mean that: (1) God will send resurrected believers with Jesus when Jesus comes back to this world. Alternate translation: “will send back to earth” (2) God will bring resurrected believers to be with Jesus in heaven. Alternate translation: “will bring to heaven” +4:14 m1fy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism τοὺς κοιμηθέντας 1 See how you translated the similar phrase in [4:13](../04/13.md). Alternate translation: “the ones having passed away” or “the ones who are dead” +4:14 tkhu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure ὁ Θεὸς τοὺς κοιμηθέντας διὰ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἄξει σὺν αὐτῷ 1 Here, the phrase **through Jesus** could go with: (1) **will bring**. In this case, God acts through **Jesus**. Alternate translation: “through Jesus God will bring with him the ones having slept” (2) **having slept**. In this case, Paul is describing people who died while they were believing in **Jesus**. Alternate translation: “God will bring with him the ones having slept in Jesus” or “God will bring with him the believers who have slept” +4:14 tjqj rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτῷ 1 The pronoun **him** refers to **Jesus**. If this is not clear for your readers, you could use the person’s name here. Alternate translation: “with Jesus” +4:15 vvda rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul has said about believers who have died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a further explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “Indeed,” +4:15 cbk8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τοῦτο & ὑμῖν λέγομεν ἐν λόγῳ Κυρίου, ὅτι 1 Here, the word **this** refers to what Paul introduces with the word **that**. This form emphasizes what Paul is about to say. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different form that introduces what a person is about to say. Alternate translation: “we say to you in a word of the Lord that” or “here is what we say to you in a word of the Lord:” +4:15 fdwk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive λέγομεν & ἡμεῖς οἱ ζῶντες 1 Here, the word **we** in the phrase **we say** only includes Paul and his fellow workers. It does not include the Thessalonians. However, the word **we** in the phrase **we, the ones living** does include the Thessalonians. Make sure that this is clear if your language marks these distinctions. +4:15 ni3m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy λόγῳ 1 Paul is using the term **word** to mean a message that is shared by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a message” or “words” +4:15 wpe3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession λόγῳ Κυρίου 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **word** that could be: (1) something that **the Lord** said. Alternate translation: “a word from the Lord” or “a word spoken by the Lord” (2) authorized by **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “a word that the Lord approves” or “a word that has the Lord’s authority” +4:15 hdlr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish ἡμεῖς οἱ ζῶντες, οἱ περιλειπόμενοι 1 Here, the phrases **the ones living** and **the ones surviving** distinguish **we** from other people. Be sure that this distinction is clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “we, by which I mean those of us who live, who survive” +4:15 gbe1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς τὴν παρουσίαν τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Here, the phrase **the coming of the Lord** refers to the specific time in the future when Jesus will come back to earth, judge everyone, punish unbelievers, and reward believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. See how you translated the similar phrase in [3:13](../03/13.md). Alternate translation: “until when the Lord comes back to earth” or “to the return of our Lord to us” +4:15 xd2y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐ μὴ φθάσωμεν 1 The words translated **certainly not** are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “will by no means go before” +4:15 b786 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐ μὴ φθάσωμεν 1 Here, the phrase **will certainly not go before** indicates that people who are alive when Jesus comes back will not meet him first. Instead, believers who have died will meet him first, and then believers who are alive will meet him. Paul explains this further in the following verse (see [4:16](../04/16.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “will certainly not go to Jesus before” or “will certainly not be with Jesus before” +4:15 km0g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism τοὺς κοιμηθέντας 1 See how you translated the similar phrase in [4:13–14](../04/13.md). Alternate translation: “the ones having passed away” or “the ones who are dead” +4:16 ah7p rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ὅτι 1 Here, the word **For** introduces an elaboration or explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse about how living believers will not “go before” dead believers (see [4:15](../04/15.md)). This explanation continues in [4:17](../04/17.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an elaboration or explanation. Alternate translation: “Here is what I mean:” or “More specifically,” +4:16 ygfp rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτὸς ὁ Κύριος 1 For emphasis, Paul is stating the pronoun “him,” which is already implied in the verbal phrase **will come down**. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction in your translation. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. The ULT does so by using the intensive pronoun **himself**. Alternate translation: “it is the Lord who” or “as for the Lord, he” +4:16 c26b rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ἐν κελεύσματι, ἐν φωνῇ ἀρχαγγέλου, καὶ ἐν σάλπιγγι Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul provides a list with three items. This list might refer to: (1) three different actions that all make sounds. Alternate translation: “with a loud command, the voice of an archangel, and a trumpet of God” (2) one action, the **loud command**. This **command** is made up of the **voice of an archangel** and the **trumpet of God**. Alternate translation: “with a loud command given by the voice of an archangel and by a trumpet of God” (3) two different actions, the **loud command** and the **voice of an archangel**, and the **archangel** uses **a trumpet of God**. Alternate translation: “with a loud command and with the voice of an archangel who uses a trumpet of God” +4:16 z9ka rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν κελεύσματι 1 Here Paul does not specify who gives the **loud command**. He implies that it is God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “with a loud command from God” +4:16 breq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession σάλπιγγι Θεοῦ 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe **a trumpet** that is related to **God**. More specifically, the **trumpet** could: (1) be one that **God** commands to be blown. Alternate translation: “a trumpet that God has someone blow” (2) belong to **God**. Alternate translation: “God’s trumpet” +4:16 k7sg rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential καὶ 2 Here, the word **and** introduces an event that comes after the previously described events. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase introduces the next event in a sequence. Alternate translation: “and then” or “and after that” +4:16 dr89 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj οἱ νεκροὶ 1 Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to refer to believers who are **dead**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the dead people” +4:16 xrxu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ 1 Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with **Christ**. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, indicates that Paul is speaking only about **the dead** who are united to Christ, that is, believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that Paul is speaking about believers who have died. Alternate translation: “Christians” or “who believed in Christ” +4:16 xbvx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀναστήσονται 1 Here, the word **rise** refers to people who had died then coming back to life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “will be restored to life” or “will resurrect” +4:16 q6s9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πρῶτον 1 Here, the word **first** indicates that, after Jesus comes down from heaven, **the dead in Christ** will resurrect before anything else happens. Paul indicates in the following verse what happens after they resurrect. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “before anything else happens” or “immediately afterwards” +4:17 iy00 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential ἔπειτα 1 Here, the word **Then** indicates that what Paul is about to describe will only happen after the events he described in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that introduces the next event in a sequence. Alternate translation: “Next,” or “Afterward,” +4:17 pknb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἡμεῖς οἱ ζῶντες, οἱ περιλειπόμενοι ἅμα σὺν αὐτοῖς, ἁρπαγησόμεθα 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “God will catch us, the ones living, the ones surviving, up together with them” +4:17 l5l1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς & πάντοτε & ἐσόμεθα 1 By **we** in both clauses, Paul includes himself, his fellow workers, and the Thessalonians, so use the inclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. +4:17 fc63 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish ἡμεῖς οἱ ζῶντες, οἱ περιλειπόμενοι 1 Here, the phrases **the ones living** and **the ones surviving** distinguish **we** from other people. Be sure that this distinction is clear in your translation. See how you translated the similar phrases in [4:15](../04/15.md). Alternate translation: “we, by which I mean those of us who live, who survive” +4:17 otiq rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to “the dead in Christ” who resurrect. Paul mentioned them in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the referent more explicit. Alternate translation: “the resurrected believers” or “the dead who live again” +4:17 m3gb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν νεφέλαις 1 Here, the phrase **in the clouds** could refer to: (1) the place where believers meet the Lord. In other words, the **clouds** are in the **air**, which is where believers **meet the Lord**. Alternate translation: “up among the clouds” (2) the means by which believers go to meet the Lord. In this case, the **clouds** are what believers stand on as they go to meet the Lord. Some people in Paul’s culture told stories about people standing on clouds as they traveled to heaven. Alternate translation: “on the clouds” or “by means of clouds” +4:17 o7lj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς ἀπάντησιν τοῦ Κυρίου εἰς ἀέρα 1 Here, the phrase **to meet** refers to going to greet someone. Paul could be implying that, after believers greet him, Jesus: (1) continues to earth with all believers. Alternate translation: “to meet the Lord in the air and return to earth with him” (2) goes back up to heaven with all believers, either temporarily or eternally. Alternate translation: “to meet the Lord in the air and go back to heaven with him” +4:17 buz9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς ἀέρα 1 Here, the phrase **in the air** refers to the area above the earth but below heaven, an area often called the sky. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to this area. Alternate translation: “above the earth” or “up in the atmosphere” +4:17 ouvu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὕτως 1 Here, the phrase **in this way** refers to the process that Paul has outlined in this verse and the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the result of a process. Alternate translation: “as a result” or “after all those events” +4:18 gt91 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 Here, the word **Therefore** introduces what Paul wants the Thessalonians to do in response to what he has told them about Jesus’ second coming and the resurrection of dead believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the application of a specific teaching. Alternate translation: “So then” or “Now that I have taught you these things” +4:18 xsus rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τοῖς λόγοις τούτοις 1 Here, the phrase **these words** refers to what Paul has said in [4:13–17](../04/13.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers back to this entire section. Alternate translation: “with all these things that I have taught you” or “with the message I have spoken” +5:intro ay3d 0 # 1 Thessalonians 5 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n9. Teaching on the day of the Lord (4:13–5:11)\n * The timing of the day of the Lord (5:1–11)\n10. Final Commands (5:11–22)\n11. Closing (5:23–28)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The timing of the Lord’s coming\n\nIn [4:13–18](../04/13.md), Paul taught the Thessalonians about what will happen to believers who die before Jesus comes back. In [5:1–11](../05/01.md), he teaches them about how the timing of Jesus’ return should impact how they live now. In these verses, he informs the Thessalonians that Jesus’ second coming will surprise people. Scholars debate whether Paul meant that it would surprise everyone or just people who do not believe. Most likely, Paul meant that no one can know for sure when Jesus will return, but believers will be ready for it while unbelievers will not be ready for it. Paul then explains what the Thessalonians should do to be ready for Jesus’ return: they should “put on” faith, hope, and love (see [5:8](../05/08.md)).\n\n### The Spirit and prophecies\n\nIn [5:19–20](../05/19.md), Paul warns the Thessalonians against “quenching” the Holy Spirit and despising prophecies. Most likely, the commands in the next two verses also relate to prophecies (see [5:21–22](../05/21.md)): the Thessalonians should test all prophecies, hold to those that are right, and avoid those that are wrong. So, Paul wants them to respect all prophecies, since true prophecy comes from the Holy Spirit. However, he also wants them to test prophecies to make sure they really do come from the Holy Spirit. These verses are very short and imply some information, so you may need to make some of these ideas more explicit. See the notes on these verses for translation options. \n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Thief similes\n\nIn [5:2](../05/02.md) and [5:4](../05/04.md), Paul compares Jesus’ second coming to what thieves do and experience. In [5:2](../05/02.md), Paul indicates that Jesus’ second coming will be surprising, just as a thief breaking into a house is surprising. In [5:4](../05/04.md), ancient manuscripts differ in how they express the simile. The reading that the ULT follows indicates that Jesus’ second coming will surprise people who are doing what is wrong, just like the daylight surprises thieves who are breaking into a house. The reading that the ULT mentions in a footnote indicates that Jesus’ second coming is surprising, just as a thief breaking into a house is surprising. With these similes, Paul compares Jesus’ second coming to what thieves do and experience to indicate that Jesus’ second coming will surprise people. Make sure that this meaning is clear in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])\n\n### Birth pain simile\n\nIn [5:3](../05/03.md), Paul compares Jesus’ second coming to the birth pains that a woman experiences during labor. Just as these birth pains come suddenly and cannot be avoided, so Jesus’ second coming will come suddenly, and unbelievers will not be able to escape from Jesus’ judgment. Make sure that this meaning is clear in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])\n\n### Day and night, light and darkness\n\nThroughout [5:1–11](../05/01.md), Paul refers to day and light in contrast to night and darkness. In [5:2](../05/02.md) Paul uses the word “day” in the phrase “the day of the Lord.” In the following verses, he develops the imagery of day and night so that it connects with the idea of the “day of the Lord.” He speaks of people who live in the “day” and in the “light,” which figuratively describes people who know that Jesus is coming back and who live properly and obey God. These people will not be surprised or judged on the “day of the Lord,” since they are “of day.” On the other hand, Paul speaks of people who live in the “night” and in the “darkness,” which figuratively describes people who do not expect Jesus to come back and who live sinfully and disobey God. These people will be surprised and judged on the “day of the Lord,” since they are not “of day.” So, people who want to avoid being judged on “the day of Lord” must live as people “of day,” that is, as obedient and watchful people. Since Paul’s day and night metaphor is directed related to the phrase “the day of the Lord,” preserve the language of day and night if possible. See the notes on these verses for translation possibilities. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### Putting on armor\n\nIn [5:8](../05/08.md), Paul commands the Thessalonians to put on armor, specifically a “breastplate” and a “helmet.” A “breastplate” is armor that protects the vital organs, including the heart and lungs. Paul identifies the “breastplate” with faith and love. A “helmet” is armor that protects the head. Paul identifies the “helmet” with hope. It is unlikely that Paul expected the Thessalonians to interpret these two specific pieces of armor in special ways. Rather, Paul wants the Thessalonians to think about faith, love, and hope as if they were pieces of armor that protect them from evil powers, including sin and the devil. Since Paul uses similar armor metaphors in other letters, preserve the armor language if possible. See the notes on these verses for translation possibilities. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n#### Quenching the Holy Spirit\n\nIn [5:19](../05/19.md), Paul refers to hindering the Holy Spirit as if it were “quenching” a fire. Other passages in the Bible connect the Holy Spirit with fire (for example, see [Acts 2:1–4](../act/02/01.md)), so if possible preserve the metaphor or express the idea as a simile. See the notes on this verse for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +5:1 i2vm rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces a new section in the letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new section, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Next,” +5:1 y4cv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῶν χρόνων καὶ τῶν καιρῶν 1 Here Paul implies that **the times and the seasons** relate to questions concerning when Jesus will come back. In other words, Paul has begun to talk about the timing of Jesus’ second coming. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the times and the seasons after which Jesus will return” or “the times and the seasons related to Jesus’ second coming” +5:1 a8f3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet τῶν χρόνων καὶ τῶν καιρῶν 1 The terms **times** and **seasons** mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together to refer in general to the timing of Jesus’ second coming. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express this idea with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “the precise time” or “the periods of time” +5:1 caue rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὑμῖν γράφεσθαι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, it is clear from the context that it would be Paul and his fellow workers. Alternate translation: “for us to write anything to you” +5:2 mcq9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why the Thessalonians “have no need for anything to be written” to them about the timing of Jesus’ second coming. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a previous claim. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “Indeed,” +5:2 dqgk rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοὶ & ἀκριβῶς οἴδατε 1 For emphasis, Paul is stating the pronoun **you**, which is already implied in the verb **know**. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction in your translation. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. The ULT does so by using the intensive pronoun **yourselves**. Alternate translation: “as for you, you know perfectly well” or “it is you who know perfectly well” +5:2 rss4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἔρχεται 1 Here, Paul speaks of **the day of the Lord** as if it were a person who could come to a place. He means that the event named **the day of the Lord** will happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will happen” or “occurs” +5:2 tmj3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὡς κλέπτης ἐν νυκτὶ οὕτως ἔρχεται 1 Paul is saying that **the day of the Lord** is like **a thief in the night** because people cannot tell when either one will happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “comes in this manner—unexpectedly, as a thief comes unexpectedly in the night” or “comes when people are not looking for it, just as thief steals in the night when people are not looking” +5:2 yvg3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo ὡς & οὕτως 1 Having both terms **in this manner** and **as** in this sentence may be redundant in your language. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “as” +5:3 tbsh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture ὅταν λέγωσιν, εἰρήνη καὶ ἀσφάλεια, τότε αἰφνίδιος αὐτοῖς ἐφίσταται ὄλεθρος 1 Here Paul uses the present tense forms **say** and **comes** to refer to something that will happen in the future. He uses the present tense to indicate that these things will certainly happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “Whenever they will be saying, ‘Peace and safety,’ then sudden destruction will come on them” +5:3 p1wi rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ὅταν λέγωσιν, εἰρήνη καὶ ἀσφάλεια, τότε αἰφνίδιος & ὄλεθρος 1 Here, the word **Whenever** introduces something that is happening when the **sudden destruction comes**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that describes things that happen at the same time. Alternate translation: “While they are saying, ‘Peace and safety,’ sudden destruction” or “They will be saying, ‘Peace and safety,’ but then sudden destruction” +5:3 xzxf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations λέγωσιν, εἰρήνη καὶ ἀσφάλεια, τότε 1 It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “they say that there is peace and safety, then” +5:3 wqgz rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns λέγωσιν & αὐτοῖς & οὐ μὴ ἐκφύγωσιν 1 Here, the pronouns **they**, **them**, and **they** refer to every person who is not a believer. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “unbelievers say … on them … they will certainly not escape” +5:3 mjvd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰρήνη καὶ ἀσφάλεια 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **Peace** and **safety**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “We are peaceful and safe” or “We live peacefully and safely” +5:3 ne9n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns αἰφνίδιος αὐτοῖς ἐφίσταται ὄλεθρος, ὥσπερ ἡ ὠδὶν τῇ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **destruction**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “they will suddenly be destroyed, just as the birth pain comes to the one” +5:3 bw2z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὄλεθρος 1 Here, the word **destruction** refers to severe suffering or punishment. It does not mean that they people who experience the **destruction** cease to exist. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “ruin” or “disaster” +5:3 f1xr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὥσπερ ἡ ὠδὶν τῇ ἐν γαστρὶ ἐχούσῃ; καὶ οὐ μὴ ἐκφύγωσιν 1 Paul is saying that **sudden destruction** during the day of the Lord is like **birth pain** because both events begin suddenly and cannot be avoided. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “just as the birth pain comes suddenly on the one having in the womb, and just as she cannot escape from the birth pain, so they will certainly not escape the destruction” +5:3 iwc2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τῇ ἐν γαστρὶ ἐχούσῃ 1 Here, the phrase **the one having in the womb** refers to a woman who is pregnant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to a woman with child” or “to a woman who is pregnant” +5:3 undo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐ μὴ ἐκφύγωσιν 1 The words translated **certainly not** are two negative words. In this construction, the second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. Instead, it gives greater emphasis to the negative. If your language can use two negatives that do not cancel one another to create a positive meaning, you could use a double negative here. If your language does not use two negatives in that way, you could translate with one strong negative, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “they will by no means escape” +5:4 sk6v rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ὑμεῖς δέ, ἀδελφοί & ἐστὲ 1 Here, the phrase **But you** introduces what is true about the Thessalonians in contrast to what Paul has said about unbelievers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that contrasts the Thessalonians with unbelievers. Alternate translation: “However, as for you, brothers, you are” or “In contrast, brothers, you are” +5:4 b6lv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐκ ἐστὲ ἐν σκότει 1 Here Paul speaks as if the Thessalonians are not in a place that has no light. He could mean that: (1) they are not ignorant about the day of the Lord. Alternate translation: “are not ignorant” or “know about these things” (2) they are not avoiding and disobeying God. Alternate translation: “are not disobeying God” or “are not far away from God” +5:4 fdiu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν σκότει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **darkness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in dark places” or “without the light” +5:4 elp9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification καταλάβῃ 1 Here, Paul speaks of **the day** as if it were a person who could **overtake** the Thessalonians. He means that the event named **the day** will not surprise or shock the Thessalonians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “might surprise” or “might startle” +5:4 ywez rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ἡ ἡμέρα ὑμᾶς ὡς κλέπτας καταλάβῃ 1 Paul is saying that **the day** of the Lord will **overtake** some people as sunshine overtakes **thieves** because both the people and the thieves are surprised by and unprepared for the **day** to arrive. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the day might overtake you as daytime overtakes thieves while they are stealing” or “you are unprepared for the day as thieves are unprepared for the sun to rise” +5:4 otz2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡ ἡμέρα 1 Here Paul is again referring to what he called “the day of the Lord” in [5:2](../05/02.md). Make sure that your readers recognize that this is the same **day**, and express the idea as you did in [5:2](../05/02.md). Alternate translation: “Jesus’ second coming” or “the time when Jesus comes back” +5:4 o2ja rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὡς κλέπτας 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “as daylight overtakes thieves” +5:4 iap8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants ὡς κλέπτας 1 Here, many ancient manuscripts read **as thieves**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “as a thief.” This reading would mean that the **day** overtakes some people **as a thief** overtakes people and steals from them. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. +5:5 ilv4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason or basis for what Paul has said about how the “day” will not overtake the Thessalonians (see [5:2](../05/02.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a previous claim. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “That is true because” +5:5 ddce rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet πάντες & ὑμεῖς υἱοὶ φωτός ἐστε, καὶ υἱοὶ ἡμέρας. οὐκ ἐσμὲν νυκτὸς οὐδὲ σκότους 1 Here, the phrases **sons of the light** and **sons of day** mean basically the same thing. Also, the phrases **of night** and **of darkness** mean basically the same thing. Paul is using these phrases together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis by using a single phrase in each sentence. Alternate translation: “you are all sons of the day. We are not of night” or “you are all sons of the bright day. We are not of the dark night” +5:5 zp3z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom πάντες & ὑμεῖς υἱοὶ φωτός ἐστε, καὶ υἱοὶ ἡμέρας 1 The expression **son of** describes a person who shares the qualities of something. Paul is using this expression to describe the behavior and character of the Thessalonians, since they are people who are characterized by **light** and **day**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you are all characterized by light and characterized by day” or “you all belong to the light and belong to the day” +5:5 o01o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πάντες & ὑμεῖς υἱοὶ φωτός ἐστε, καὶ υἱοὶ ἡμέρας 1 Here Paul speaks of the Thessalonians as if they were characterized by **light** and **day** (see the previous note for the meaning of the phrase **son of**). He means that they obey God and do what is right. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you are all people who obey God and do what is right” +5:5 cxo9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations υἱοὶ φωτός & καὶ υἱοὶ ἡμέρας 1 Although the term **sons** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “children of light and children of day” +5:5 f4uw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession οὐκ ἐσμὲν νυκτὸς οὐδὲ σκότους 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe how **We** are not characterized by **night** or **darkness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “We are not characterized by night nor characterized by darkness” or “We do not belong to the night nor do we belong to the darkness” +5:5 d6fm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐκ ἐσμὲν νυκτὸς οὐδὲ σκότους 1 Here Paul speaks of believers as those who are not characterized by **night** and **darkness** (see the previous note for the meaning of the phrases **of night** and **of darkness**). He means that believers are not people who disobey God and do what is wrong. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we are not people who disobey God and do what is wrong” +5:5 kq0x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἐσμὲν 1 Here, the word **We** includes Paul, his fellow workers, and the Thessalonians. Your language may require you to mark this form. +5:5 h4fd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns σκότους 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **darkness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “of dark places” or “without light” +5:6 paqf rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἄρα οὖν 1 Here, the phrase **So then** introduces what Paul wants believers to do in response to what he has said about Jesus’ second coming. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the application of a specific teaching. Alternate translation: “Because those things are true” or “Now that I have taught you these things” +5:6 y36l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive μὴ καθεύδωμεν & γρηγορῶμεν 1 Here, both times Paul uses the word **us**, it includes Paul, his fellow workers, and the Thessalonians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. +5:6 d2aj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μὴ καθεύδωμεν 1 Here Paul speaks about the people “of the night” and “of the darkness” as if they were sleeping. He means that they are unaware of or unprepared for the Lord’s return because they are living sinfully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “let us not behave sinfully and ignorantly” or “let us not act as if the Lord is not coming” +5:6 x0zh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj οἱ λοιποί 1 Paul is using the adjective **rest** as a noun to refer to a group of people that includes everyone who does not believe. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the rest of people” or “everyone else” +5:6 qylm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis οἱ λοιποί 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “the rest sleep” +5:6 sdww rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor γρηγορῶμεν καὶ νήφωμεν 1 Here, Paul speaks as if believers were guards who needed to **keep watch and be sober**. He means that believers should be aware of and prepared for the Lord’s return, and they should be self-controlled so that they live in a way that pleases God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “let us be spiritually alert and self-controlled” or “let us confidently expect the Lord to return and live in a way that pleases God” +5:7 oyjo rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of the contrast between night and day (see [5:8](../05/08.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a further explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “As you know,” +5:7 fxca rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism οἱ & καθεύδοντες, νυκτὸς καθεύδουσιν; καὶ οἱ μεθυσκόμενοι, νυκτὸς μεθύουσιν 1 Here Paul provides two parallel examples of what people do **at night**. He repeats the same structure and the phrase **at night** in both clauses, which emphasizes **at night**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could combine the two examples into one clause and emphasize **at night** in another way. Alternate translation: “it is at night that people sleep and drunkards get drunk” or “the ones sleeping and the ones getting drunk do so during the night” +5:7 s253 οἱ & καθεύδοντες, νυκτὸς καθεύδουσιν; καὶ οἱ μεθυσκόμενοι, νυκτὸς μεθύουσιν 1 Here Paul provides common examples of what people sometimes do during the **night**. He is not using **sleeping** and **getting drunk** to speak about something else. If it would be helpful in your language, you make it clearer that Paul is providing examples from regular life. Alternate translation: “here are some things that people often do at night: they sleep, or they get drunk” +5:8 wh3g rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces a contrast with the people who “sleep” and “get drunk” during the night (see [5:7](../05/07.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that contrasts two groups of people. Alternate translation: “In contrast,” or “Unlike them,” +5:8 qf05 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 Here, the word **us** includes Paul, his fellow workers, and the Thessalonians. Your language may require you to mark this form. +5:8 yn0c rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἡμέρας ὄντες 1 Here, the phrase **being of day** provides a reason why the Thessalonians should **be sober**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “because we are of day” +5:8 jqqo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡμέρας 1 Here, the phrase **of day** means basically the same thing as the phrase “sons of day” in [5:5](../05/05.md). Paul means that believers obey God and do what is right, just as people usually do what is right during the **day**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “people who obey God and do what is right” +5:8 kisa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡμεῖς δὲ ἡμέρας ὄντες, νήφωμεν 1 Here, the phrase **be sober** contrasts with the phrase “get drunk” in the previous verse ([5:7](../05/07.md)). Paul means that believers should be self-controlled and obedient to God. He does not just mean that they should not get drunk, although that is part of the command. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “But let us, being of day, not get drunk but be self-controlled” +5:8 ev6i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐνδυσάμενοι θώρακα πίστεως καὶ ἀγάπης, καὶ περικεφαλαίαν, ἐλπίδα σωτηρίας 1 Here Paul speaks of Christians acting in **faith** and **love** as if each of them were a soldier putting on a **breastplate**. He speaks of Christians experiencing **the hope of salvation** as if each of them were a soldier putting on a **helmet**. He means that **faith**, **love**, and **hope** protect believers, just as armor protects soldiers. Paul does not directly state what believers are protected from, but he implies that it is sin and evil powers, including the devil. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “acting in faith and love as if they were a breastplate you could put on, and having the hope of salvation as if it were a helmet you would wear” or “protecting yourselves by acting in faith and love and by having the hope of salvation” +5:8 o2ny rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns θώρακα πίστεως καὶ ἀγάπης, καὶ περικεφαλαίαν, ἐλπίδα σωτηρίας 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **faith**, **love**, **hope**, and **salvation**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the breastplate, which stands for believing God and loving people, and a helmet, which stands for hoping that God will save us” +5:8 l89q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession θώρακα πίστεως καὶ ἀγάπης 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to define **the breastplate** as **faith** and **love**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a breastplate, which is faith and love” or “the breastplate that is faith and love” +5:8 iuhj rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown περικεφαλαίαν 1 A **helmet** is a strong hat that a soldier would wear to protect his or her head. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of armor, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “a protective hat” or “something to protect our heads” +5:8 bz9h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἐλπίδα σωτηρίας 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **hope** that is focused on **salvation**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the hope for salvation” or “the hope that expects salvation” +5:9 lrx6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why the Thessalonians should do what Paul has commanded them to do in [5:6–8](../05/06.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the reason or basis for previous commands. Alternate translation: “You should do those things because” or “I urge you to do those things since” +5:9 s2ow rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς & ἡμῶν 1 Here, the words **us** and **our** include Paul, his fellow workers, and the Thessalonians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. +5:9 erz5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς ὀργὴν 1 Here, the word **wrath** refers to how God will punish people who do not believe and who disobey him. This punishment will occur during “the day of the Lord” that Paul has already mentioned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “for future punishment” or “to experience punishment when Jesus returns” +5:9 h5y2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς ὀργὴν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **wrath**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to be punished” +5:9 qmo5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ εἰς 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “but he appointed us for” +5:9 qfcf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession εἰς περιποίησιν σωτηρίας 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **obtaining** something, which is **salvation**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “for obtaining salvation” or “to obtain salvation” +5:9 ynwa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς περιποίησιν σωτηρίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to be saved” +5:10 arhm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish τοῦ ἀποθανόντος περὶ ἡμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **the one having died for us** gives more information about “our Lord Jesus Christ.” It does not distinguish between several Christs. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that adds information instead of making distinctions. Alternate translation: “and he is the one who died for us” or “who died for us” +5:10 usg8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν & γρηγορῶμεν & ζήσωμεν 1 Here, the words **us**, **we**, and **we** include Paul, his fellow workers, and the Thessalonians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. +5:10 qv56 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit περὶ ἡμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **for us** could indicate that Jesus **died**: (1) to benefit or help us. Alternate translation: “for our benefit” (2) instead of or in place of us. Alternate translation: “in place of us” or “instead of us” +5:10 dzq0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 Here, the phrase **so that** introduces the purpose for which Jesus **died**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a purpose. Alternate translation: “in order that” +5:10 w59c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἴτε γρηγορῶμεν εἴτε καθεύδωμεν 1 Here Paul could be using the terms **keep watch** and **sleep** to refer to: (1) being alive and being dead. Alternate translation: “whether we are alive or die” (2) waiting expectantly for Jesus to return and being dead. Alternate translation: “whether we continue to expect Jesus to return or have died” (3) doing what pleases God and not doing what pleases God. Alternate translation: “whether we do not always please God or whether we do what pleases him” +5:11 r921 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ 1 Here, the word **Therefore** introduces what Paul wants the Thessalonians to do in response to what he has told them about Jesus’ second coming and how to be ready for it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the application of a specific teaching. Alternate translation: “So then” or “Now that I have taught you these things” +5:11 m2c9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet παρακαλεῖτε ἀλλήλους, καὶ οἰκοδομεῖτε εἷς τὸν ἕνα 1 The commands **encourage one another** and **build up one the one** mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “encourage one another” or “build one another up” +5:11 fx2f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οἰκοδομεῖτε εἷς τὸν ἕνα 1 Here, Paul is speaking of the Thessalonian believers as if they were a building. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “help one the one become more faithful to Christ” +5:11 kdae rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εἷς τὸν ἕνα 1 Here, the phrase **one the one** indicates that each person should be building up each other person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to people building each other up. Alternate translation: “one another” +5:11 sfv4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καθὼς καὶ ποιεῖτε 1 Here Paul means that the Thessalonians are already doing what he is asking them to do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “which indeed you are already doing for each other” +5:12 pd47 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces a new section in the letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new section, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” +5:12 fqh3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish τοὺς κοπιῶντας ἐν ὑμῖν, καὶ προϊσταμένους ὑμῶν ἐν Κυρίῳ, καὶ νουθετοῦντας ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul is describing one group of people who do three different things. He is not making distinctions between three different groups. Make sure that your translation refers to only one group of people. Alternate translation: “the people who labor among you, who lead you in the Lord, and who admonish you” or “your leaders who labor among you and lead you in the Lord and admonish you” +5:12 dhf3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοὺς κοπιῶντας ἐν ὑμῖν, καὶ προϊσταμένους ὑμῶν ἐν Κυρίῳ, καὶ νουθετοῦντας ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul could be using these three phrases: (1) to refer to three distinct activities. Alternate translation: “the ones laboring among you, leading you in the Lord, and admonishing you” (2) to refer to one primary activity (**laboring**) that he defines as **leading** and **admonishing**. Alternate translation: “the ones laboring among you by leading you in the Lord and by admonishing you” +5:12 f4jv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in the Lord** to describe the union of believers with **the Lord**. In this case, being **in the Lord**, or united to Christ, could: (1) identify the leaders as those who lead people who believe in Christ. Alternate translation: “as Christians” or “as Christ’s people” (2) indicate that **the Lord** has authorized these leaders. Alternate translation: “as the Lord has authorized them” or “as representatives of the Lord” +5:13 jq0o rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ ἡγεῖσθαι αὐτοὺς ὑπέρἐκπερισσοῦ ἐν ἀγάπῃ, διὰ τὸ ἔργον αὐτῶν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the reason before the result. Alternate translation: “and, because of their work, to regard them highly in love” +5:13 mih6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡγεῖσθαι αὐτοὺς ὑπέρἐκπερισσοῦ ἐν ἀγάπῃ 1 Here, the phrase **in love** could give: (1) the context in which the Thessalonians should **regard them highly**. In other words, the Thessalonians should **regard them highly** while they are loving them. Alternate translation: “while you are loving them to regard them highly” (2) the manner in which the Thessalonians should **regard them highly**. Alternate translation: “to regard them highly by loving them” or “to regard them with great love” +5:13 rdgo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἡγεῖσθαι αὐτοὺς ὑπέρἐκπερισσοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **regard them highly** means that the Thessalonians should greatly respect and honor their leaders in the church. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to hold them in high esteem” or “to treat them with respect” +5:13 p6m4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἀγάπῃ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **love**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “and in a loving way” or “and love them” +5:13 rqs8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰρηνεύετε 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “Act peaceably” +5:14 tdxa rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces a new section in the letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new section, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Next,” +5:14 g34k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj νουθετεῖτε τοὺς ἀτάκτους, παραμυθεῖσθε τοὺς ὀλιγοψύχους, ἀντέχεσθε τῶν ἀσθενῶν, μακροθυμεῖτε πρὸς πάντας 1 Paul is using the adjectives **disorderly**, **discouraged**, **weak**, and **all** as nouns to refer to groups of people who can be described by these adjectives. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “Admonish disorderly people, comfort discouraged people, help weak people, be patient toward all people” +5:14 ph3n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοὺς ἀτάκτους 1 Here, the word **disorderly** could describe: (1) people who live in undisciplined and disruptive ways. Alternate translation: “the undisciplined” (2) people who refuse to work to support themselves. Alternate translation: “the idle” or “the lazy” +5:14 yhzw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάντας 1 Here, the word **all** could refer to: (1) people in general. Alternate translation: “all people” (2) just believers. Alternate translation: “all believers” +5:15 vlp7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁρᾶτε 1 Here Paul tells the Thessalonians to see or look at what he wants them to do. He means that he wants them to make sure that it happens. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Ensure that” +5:15 dqs8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κακὸν ἀντὶ κακοῦ τινι ἀποδῷ 1 Here Paul means that the Thessalonians should not do what is **evil** to people who have done what is **evil**. In other words, when someone treats them badly, they should not respond in the same way. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar phrase or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “retaliates against anyone who hurts you” or “responds with evil to anyone who does evil” +5:15 oz10 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 Here, the word **but** introduces a command that is in contrast with repaying **evil for evil**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “and instead,” +5:15 mc2z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor διώκετε 1 Here Paul speaks as if he wants the Corinthians to run after and try to capture **{what is} good**. He speaks in this way because he wants them to do **{what is} good** as persistently as someone who pursues someone or something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “seek after” or “try to do” +5:15 pe3l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ εἰς ἀλλήλους καὶ εἰς πάντας 1 Here, the phrase **one another** refers to the believers in Thessalonica. The word **all** refers to all people, whether they are believers or not. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make these ideas more explicit. Alternate translation: “both for your fellow believers and for all people” or “both for each other and for all other people” +5:15 i0jy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πάντας 1 Paul is using the adjective **all** as a noun to refer to a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “all people” or “everybody” +5:17 l63i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἀδιαλείπτως 1 Paul says **continually** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “very regularly” or “extremely often” +5:18 bt5q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν παντὶ 1 Here, the phrase **In everything** could refer to: (1) every situation or experience. Alternate translation: “In everything that you experience” or “In every circumstance” (2) every moment in time. Alternate translation: “At every time” or “At all times” +5:18 q7gn rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result εὐχαριστεῖτε & γὰρ 1 Here, the word **for** could introduce a reason or basis for: (1) the three commands in [5:16–18](../05/16.md). Alternate translation: “give thanks. Do these things since” (2) just the command to **give thanks**. Alternate translation: “give thanks, which you should do since” +5:18 l3sk rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τοῦτο 1 Here, the word **this** could refer to: (1) the three commands in [5:16–18](../05/16.md) Alternate translation: “these are” (2) just the command to **give thanks**. Alternate translation: “that is” +5:18 sw8b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns θέλημα Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **will**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what God desires” +5:18 mbz1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit θέλημα Θεοῦ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul could mean: (1) that the **will of God** has been revealed **in Christ Jesus**. Alternate translation: “the will of God that has been revealed in Christ Jesus for you” or “the will of God as Christ Jesus has shown it to you” (2) that the **will of God** is for people who are **in Christ Jesus**. In other words, these commands are what God wants people who are in union with **Christ Jesus** to do. Alternate translation: “the will of God for you who are united to Christ Jesus” +5:19 j1ei rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ Πνεῦμα μὴ σβέννυτε 1 Paul speaks of the Holy **Spirit** as if he were a fire that that the Thessalonians should not **quench**. Paul means that the Thessalonians should not hinder or oppose the work of the Holy **Spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Do not restrain the Spirit” or “Do not hinder the Spirit” +5:20 rrza rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases μὴ ἐξουθενεῖτε 1 Here Paul may be giving a specific example of his command not to “quench the Spirit” in [5:19](../05/19.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this connection more explicit. Alternate translation: “Specifically, do not despise” or “For example, do not despise” +5:20 iv1n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes μὴ ἐξουθενεῖτε 1 Paul is using a figure of speech here that expresses a strongly positive meaning by using a negative word, **not**, together with an expression that is the opposite of the intended meaning, **despise**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the positive meaning. Alternate translation: “Honor” or “Respect” +5:21 fmot rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants πάντα δοκιμάζετε 1 Here, many ancient manuscripts read **Test all things**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “But test all things.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. +5:21 ihzh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάντα δοκιμάζετε; τὸ καλὸν κατέχετε 1 Here Paul could be referring to: (1) the “prophecies” that he referred to in the previous verse (see [5:20](../05/20.md)). Alternate translation: “Test all prophecies. Hold fast to those that are good” (2) spiritual gifts, or how the Holy Spirit specially empowers each person. Alternate translation: “Test all spiritual gifts. Hold fast to those that do what is good” (3) anything people say and do. Alternate translation: “Test all things that people say and do. Hold fast to those that are good” +5:21 n1jv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ καλὸν κατέχετε 1 Here Paul speaks as if **what {is} good** were an object that the Thessalonians could grasp tightly. He means that they should believe and act based on whatever is **good**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Adhere to what is good” or “Follow what is good” +5:22 p7gz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπὸ παντὸς εἴδους πονηροῦ ἀπέχεσθε 1 Here, much as in the previous verse ([5:22](../05/22.md)), Paul could be referring to: (1) the “prophecies” that he referred to in [5:20](../05/20.md). Alternate translation: “Keep yourselves from every form of evil prophecy” (2) spiritual gifts, or how the Holy Spirit specially empowers each person. Alternate translation: “Keep yourselves from every form of spiritual gift that does what is evil” (3) anything people say and do. Alternate translation: “Keep yourselves from every form of what people say and do that is evil” +5:22 ics0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession παντὸς εἴδους πονηροῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **every form** that is characterized by **evil**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “every form that evil takes” or “evil in any form” +5:22 z9k0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἴδους 1 Here, the word translated **form** could refer to: (1) a type or kind of something. Alternate translation: “type” (2) the way that something looks or appears. Alternate translation: “appearance” +5:23 ww4y rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces a new section, a blessing from Paul to the Thessalonians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new section, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Next,” +5:23 mqi7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing αὐτὸς & ὁ Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης ἁγιάσαι ὑμᾶς ὁλοτελεῖς, καὶ ὁλόκληρον ὑμῶν τὸ πνεῦμα, καὶ ἡ ψυχὴ, καὶ τὸ σῶμα, ἀμέμπτως ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, τηρηθείη 1 Here Paul is asking God to bless the Thessalonians. You could express this as either a blessing or a prayer, in whichever way is more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we ask the God of peace himself to sanctify you completely, and we ask that your whole spirit, and soul, and body be kept blamelessly at the coming of our Lord Jesus Christ” +5:23 sbxc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ὁ Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form **the God of peace**, which is a title for God found in the New Testament (see [Romans 15:33](../rom/15/33.md); [16:20](../rom/16/20.md); [Philippians 4:9](../php/04/09.md); [Hebrews 13:20](../heb/13/20.md)). In this context, the phrase **the God of peace** could refer to: (1) what God does. Alternate translation: “the God who gives peace” (2) who God is. Alternate translation: “the God who is characterized by peace” (3) Both. Alternate translation: “the peaceful God who gives peace” +5:23 os5l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὁ Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the idea in another way. Make sure that your translation fits the option you chose in the previous note about how **God** and **peace** relate. Alternate translation: “the peaceful God” or “the God who makes people peaceful” +5:23 nb1x rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτὸς & ὁ Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης ἁγιάσαι 1 For emphasis, Paul is stating the pronoun “he,” which is already implied in the the phrase **the God of peace**. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction in your translation. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. The ULT does so by using the intensive pronoun **himself**. Alternate translation: “may he who is the God of peace sanctify” or “may the God of peace indeed sanctify” +5:23 xvfz rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ 1 Here, the word **and** could introduce: (1) a second blessing or prayer. Alternate translation: “and also” (2) a more specific explanation of the first blessing or prayer. Alternate translation: “that is,” or “and more specifically,” +5:23 vkhs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁλόκληρον ὑμῶν τὸ πνεῦμα, καὶ ἡ ψυχὴ, καὶ τὸ σῶμα, ἀμέμπτως & τηρηθείη. 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it is God. Alternate translation: “may he keep blamelessly your whole spirit, and soul, and body” +5:23 s36k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁλόκληρον ὑμῶν τὸ πνεῦμα, καὶ ἡ ψυχὴ, καὶ τὸ σῶμα 1 Here Paul uses the three terms **spirit**, **soul**, and **body** together to refer to the whole person. These three terms could: (1) describe different aspects of the whole person from different perspectives. In this case, the three terms do not define three separate pieces that together make up a person. You could use fewer or more terms to refer to different aspects of the person. Alternate translation: “your whole body and soul” or “your whole life, mind, feelings, and desires” (2) describe three separate pieces that together make up a person. In this case, you should use two terms to refer to two different non-physical parts (**spirit** and **soul**) and one term to refer to one physical part (**body**). Alternate translation: “your whole mind, and life, and flesh” +5:23 gcy8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀμέμπτως 1 Here, the word **blamelessly** could refer to: (1) the situation in which the **spirit**, **soul**, and **body** are **kept**. Alternate translation: “in a blameless state” (2) the result of the **spirit**, **soul**, and **body** being **kept**. Alternate translation: “so that they are blameless” +5:23 nyma rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **the coming of our Lord Jesus Christ** refers to the specific time in the future when Jesus will come back to earth, judge everyone, punish unbelievers, and reward believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. See how you translated the similar phrase in [4:15](../04/15.md). Alternate translation: “when our Lord Jesus Christ comes back to earth” or “at return of our Lord Jesus Christ to us” +5:23 tzxf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Here, the word **our** includes Paul, Silvanus, Timothy, the Thessalonians, and all believers. Your language may require you to mark this form. +5:24 i03k rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result πιστὸς ὁ καλῶν ὑμᾶς, ὃς καὶ ποιήσει 1 Here, the clause **Faithful {is} the one calling you** gives the reason why God will be the one **who will also do {it}**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “Because the one calling you is faithful, he also will do it” +5:24 c3jg rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὁ καλῶν ὑμᾶς, ὃς 1 Here, the pronouns **he** and **who** refer to “the God of peace” (see [5:23](../05/23.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer directly to God. Alternate translation: “is God who calls you, who” +5:24 lg3b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ποιήσει 1 Here Paul does not state directly what God **will do**. He implies that God will do what Paul prayed for in the previous verse (see [5:23](../05/23.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “will do those things” or “will do what I have prayed for” +5:25 xxi3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit προσεύχεσθε καὶ 1 Here, **also** indicates that the Thessalonians should be praying for Paul, Silas, and Timothy just as Paul, Silas, and Timothy pray for them (see [5:23](../05/23.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “just as we pray for you, pray also” +5:26 v9iy rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἐν φιλήματι ἁγίῳ 1 A **holy kiss** was a symbolic action to show familial love between believers. In some cultures, a kiss as a greeting is appropriate, but in other cultures it is not appropriate. The idea of a **holy kiss** is that it be a greeting that is appropriate in the culture, whether it be a kiss, a hug, a handshake, or something else, and also that it be holy, that is, appropriate between God’s people. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action in the text or in a footnote. Alternate translation: “warmly, as fellow believers” +5:27 xn0n rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-oathformula ἐνορκίζω ὑμᾶς τὸν Κύριον 1 The phrase **{by} the Lord** could be: (1) an oath formula. Use a natural way in your language to express an oath. Alternate translation: “I make you swear before the Lord” or “I solemnly require that you promise the Lord” (2) Paul’s claim that **the Lord** has authorized him. Alternate translation: “As one who represents the Lord, I solemnly charge you” +5:27 n5cn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀναγνωσθῆναι τὴν ἐπιστολὴν 1 In Paul’s culture, letters sent to a group were normally **read** out loud by one person to everyone else in the group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to have this letter read by somebody out loud” +5:27 yp7e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀναγνωσθῆναι τὴν ἐπιστολὴν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to have someone read this letter” +5:27 pqkw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πᾶσιν τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 Many ancient manuscripts read **all the brothers**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “all the holy brothers.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. +5:28 ykkr rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, μεθ’ ὑμῶν 1 As was customary in his culture, Paul closes his letter with a blessing for the Thessalonians. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “May you experience kindness from our Lord Jesus Christ within you” or “I pray that you will have grace from our Lord Jesus Christ” +5:28 n8ur rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, μεθ’ ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “May our Lord Jesus Christ act graciously toward you” +5:28 ccb5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡμῶν 1 Here, the word **our** includes Paul, Silvanus, Timothy, the Thessalonians, and all believers. Your language may require you to mark this form. +5:28 d35d rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants μεθ’ ὑμῶν 1 Here, many ancient manuscripts read **{be} with you**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts add “Amen” after **{be} with you**. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. diff --git a/tn_2TH.tsv b/tn_2TH.tsv index b9ee85b..001d48f 100644 --- a/tn_2TH.tsv +++ b/tn_2TH.tsv @@ -1,198 +1,198 @@ Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note -front:intro krd6 0 # Introduction to 2 Thessalonians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the book of 2 Thessalonians\n\n1. Greetings and thanksgiving (1:1–2)\n1. Believers suffer from persecution (1:3–12)\n * God uses persecution to increase faith, love, and endurance in believers (1:3–4)\n * God is just: (1:5–12)\n * God will make believers worthy of his kingdom\n * God will give relief to believers\n * God will punish those who persecute believers\n1. Some believers misunderstand about the second coming of Christ (2:1–12)\n * Christ’s return has not yet happened (2:1–2)\n * Instruction about the events that will precede the return of Christ (2:3–12)\n1. Paul’s confidence that God will save the Thessalonian believers (2:13–17)\n * Paul calls the Thessalonian believers to “stand firm” (2:13–15)\n * Paul prays that God will comfort them (2:16–17)\n1. Paul requests that the Thessalonian believers pray for him (3:1–5)\n1. Paul give commands about idle believers (3:6–15)\n1. Closing (3:16–17)\n\n### Who wrote 2 Thessalonians?\n\nPaul wrote 2 Thessalonians. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted believers. After he became a believer, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.\n\nPaul is the author of this letter, but he includes Silvanus and Timothy as senders of the letter. Paul wrote this letter while he, Silvanus, and Timothy were staying in the city of Corinth.\n\n### What is the book of 2 Thessalonians about?\n\nPaul wrote this letter to the believers in the city of Thessalonica. He encouraged the believers because they were being persecuted. He told them to continue living in a way that pleased God. He also wanted to teach them again about Christ’s return. He also warned them that they should not be idle but should work as they wait for Christ to return.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Thessalonians” or “Second Thessalonians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to the Church in Thessalonica,” or “The Second Letter to the Christians/believers in Thessalonica.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What is the “second coming” of Jesus?\n\nPaul wrote much in this letter about Jesus’ eventual return to Earth. When Jesus returns, he will judge all mankind. He will also rule over creation. And he will cause there to be peace everywhere. Paul also explained that a “man of lawlessness” will come before Christ’s return. This person will obey Satan and cause many people to oppose God. But Jesus will destroy this person when he returns.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?\n\nPaul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.\n\n### How are pronouns used in this letter?\n\nIn this letter, the words “we” and “us” refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. If your language differentiates between inclusive and exclusive pronouns, use an exclusive pronoun for these. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n\nIn this letter, the words “you” and “your” are plural and refer to the Thessalonian believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])\n\n### What are the major issues in the text of the book of 2 Thessalonians?\n\nFor the following verses, some ancient manuscripts have a different reading than others. The ULT follows the reading that scholars consider to be the most accurate and puts the other reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in your area that your people are familiar with, consider using the reading that it follows. If not, translators are advised to follow the reading in the ULT.\n* “and the man of lawlessness is revealed” (2:3). The ULT, UST, and most modern versions read this way. Other versions follow the reading, “and the man of sin is revealed.”\n* “For God chose you as the firstfruits for salvation” (2:13) The ULT, UST, and some other versions read this way. The other reading is, “For God chose you from the first/beginning for salvation.”\n\n(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -1:intro m987 0 # 2 Thessalonians 1 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\nVerses 1–2 formally introduce this letter. Letters in the ancient Near East commonly had introductions of this type in which the sender identified himself, then the recipient, then gave a greeting.\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Paradox\n\nA paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible.\n\nA paradox occurs in verses 4–5 where Paul talks about the Thessalonian believers’ faithfulness through persecution as “evidence of the righteous judgment of God.” People would not normally think that believing in God while being persecuted is a sign of God’s righteous judgment. But the fact that God gave them the ability to persevere in their faith is evidence that God claims them as his own and will judge them as worthy of his kingdom. In verses 5–10, Paul goes on to explain more of God’s righteous judgment, that God will reward those who believe in him and that he will punish those who afflict his people. ([2 Thessalonians 1:4–5](./04.md))\n\nAnother paradox occurs in verse 9 where Paul describes the penalty for rejecting God as “eternal destruction.” Normally when something is destroyed it ceases to exist. But in this case, the people who reject God will experience eternal separation from God, as the verse goes on to explain. Being separated from God destroys all that was enjoyable about their lives, and this continuous destruction is what they experience through eternity. ([2 Thessalonians 1:9](../01/09.md)) -1:1 hm3e rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Σιλουανὸς 1 **Silvanus** is the Latin form of “Silas.” **Silvanus** is the name of a man, the same person listed in the book of Acts as Paul’s fellow traveler. If your readers may not know that these two are the same person, you could use the name “Silas” in the text and “Silvanus” in the footnote. -1:1 ge00 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis Παῦλος, καὶ Σιλουανὸς, καὶ Τιμόθεος; τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 You may want to fill in the words necessary to make this a complete sentence. Alternate translation: “Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy send this letter to the church” -1:1 l8q8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Παῦλος, καὶ Σιλουανὸς, καὶ Τιμόθεος 1 Although **Paul** wrote this letter, he identifies **Silvanus and Timothy** as also sending it. This means that they were with him and were in agreement with it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could make that clear, as in the UST. -1:1 eajo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Θεῷ Πατρὶ ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ 1 Here Paul speaks of the believers as though they were occupying space inside of God and Jesus. This metaphor expresses the idea that believers are spiritually united to God and Jesus. If this might be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “united to God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” or “sharing life with God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” -1:2 g6rb rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Many languages have different ways to offer good wishes as they greet. Paul greeted his letter recipients with a blessing. Use a form that would be a good wish or blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “We pray that God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ give you grace and peace” or “I wish you grace and peace from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ” or “May the grace and peace of God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ be your portion” or “May God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ show grace and give peace to your hearts” -1:2 bv9m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **Grace** and **peace**, you can express these ideas as verbs or in another way. Alternate translation: “May God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ be gracious to you and give rest to your inner being” or “...be favorable to you and make you at ease” or “...be kind to you and set your heart at rest” +front:intro krd6 0 # Pengantar kepada 2 Tesalonika\n\n\n\n## Bagian 1: Pengantar Umum\n\n### Garis besar kitab 2 Tesalonika\n\n1. Salam dan ucapan syukur (1:1-2)\n1. Orang-orang percaya menderita penganiayaan (1:3-12)\n * Allah memakai penganiayaan untuk meningkatkan iman, kasih, dan ketekunan di dalam diri orang percaya (1:3-4)\n * Allah itu adil: (1:5-12)\n * Allah akan menjadikan orang-orang percaya layak menerima kerajaan-Nya\n * Allah akan memberikan kelegaan kepada orang-orang percaya\n * Allah akan menghukum mereka yang menganiaya orang-orang percaya\n1. Beberapa orang percaya salah mengerti tentang kedatangan Kristus yang kedua kali (2:1-12)\n * Kedatangan Kristus kembali belum terjadi (2:1-2)\n * Instruksi tentang peristiwa-peristiwa yang akan mendahului kedatangan Kristus kembali (2:3-12)\n1. Keyakinan Paulus bahwa Allah akan menyelamatkan jemaat Tesalonika (2:13-17)\n * Paulus memanggil jemaat Tesalonika untuk "berdiri teguh" (2:13-15)\n * Paulus berdoa agar Allah menghiburkan mereka (2:16-17)\n1. Paulus meminta jemaat di Tesalonika untuk mendoakannya (3:1-5)\n1. Paulus memberikan perintah tentang orang-orang percaya yang menganggur (3:6-15)\n1. Penutup (3:16-17)\n\n### Siapa yang menulis Kitab 2 Tesalonika?\n\nPaulus menulis 2 Tesalonika. Ia berasal dari kota Tarsus. Ia dikenal sebagai Saulus pada masa awal kehidupannya. Sebelum menjadi seorang Kristen, Paulus adalah seorang Farisi. Dia menganiaya orang-orang percaya. Setelah ia menjadi orang percaya, ia melakukan perjalanan beberapa kali ke seluruh Kekaisaran Romawi untuk menceritakan tentang Yesus kepada orang-orang.\n\nPaulus adalah penulis surat ini, tetapi ia menyertakan Silwanus dan Timotius sebagai pengirim surat. Paulus menulis surat ini ketika ia, Silwanus, dan Timotius tinggal di kota Korintus.\n\n### Tentang apakah kitab 2 Tesalonika ini?\n\nPaulus menulis surat ini kepada orang-orang percaya di kota Tesalonika. Ia menyemangati orang-orang percaya karena mereka sedang dianiaya. Dia mengatakan kepada mereka untuk terus hidup dengan cara yang berkenan kepada Allah. Ia juga ingin mengajarkan kembali kepada mereka tentang kedatangan Kristus kembali. Ia juga memperingatkan mereka bahwa mereka tidak boleh berdiam diri, tetapi harus terus bekerja sambil menantikan kedatangan Kristus.\n\n### Bagaimana seharusnya judul buku ini diterjemahkan?\n\nPara penerjemah dapat memilih untuk menyebut kitab ini dengan judul tradisionalnya, yaitu "2 Tesalonika" atau "Tesalonika Kedua". Atau mereka dapat memilih judul yang lebih jelas, seperti "Surat Kedua Paulus kepada Jemaat di Tesalonika," atau "Surat Kedua kepada orang-orang Kristen/orang-orang percaya di Tesalonika." (Lihat: [[rc://*/ta/man/terjemahan/terjemahan-nama]])\n\n## Bagian 2: Konsep Agama dan Budaya yang Penting\n\n### Apa yang dimaksud dengan "kedatangan Yesus yang kedua kali"?\n\nPaulus menulis banyak hal dalam surat ini tentang kedatangan Yesus kembali ke bumi. Ketika Yesus datang kembali, Ia akan menghakimi seluruh umat manusia. Dia juga akan memerintah atas ciptaan. Dan dia akan membawa damai sejahtera di mana-mana. Paulus juga menjelaskan bahwa "manusia durhaka" akan datang sebelum kedatangan Kristus kembali. Orang ini akan menaati Iblis dan menyebabkan banyak orang menentang Allah. Tetapi Yesus akan membinasakan orang ini ketika Ia datang kembali.\n\n## Bagian 3: Masalah-masalah Penting dalam Penerjemahan\n\n### Apa yang Paulus maksudkan dengan ungkapan "di dalam Kristus", "di dalam Tuhan", dan sebagainya?\n\nPaulus bermaksud untuk mengungkapkan gagasan tentang persatuan yang sangat erat antara Kristus dan orang-orang percaya. Silakan lihat pendahuluan kitab Roma untuk mengetahui lebih lanjut tentang ungkapan semacam ini.\n\n### Bagaimana kata ganti digunakan dalam surat ini?\n\nDalam surat ini, kata "kami" dan "kita" merujuk kepada Paulus, Silwanus, dan Timotius, kecuali jika tidak disebutkan. Jika bahasa Anda membedakan kata ganti inklusif dan eksklusif, gunakan kata ganti eksklusif untuk ini. (Lihat: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n\nDalam surat ini, kata "kamu" dan " engkau" berbentuk jamak dan merujuk kepada jemaat di Tesalonika. (Lihat: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-youingular]])\n\n### Apa saja masalah utama dalam teks kitab 2 Tesalonika?\n\nUntuk ayat-ayat berikut ini, beberapa naskah kuno memiliki pembacaan yang berbeda dengan yang lain. ULT mengikuti pembacaan yang dianggap paling akurat oleh para ahli dan menempatkan pembacaan lainnya dalam catatan kaki. Jika ada terjemahan Alkitab di daerah Anda yang sudah dikenal oleh masyarakat, pertimbangkanlah untuk menggunakan pembacaan yang diikuti. Jika tidak, penerjemah disarankan untuk mengikuti bacaan dalam ULT.\n* "dan manusia durhaka itu dinyatakan" (2:3). ULT, UST, dan sebagian besar versi modern membacanya demikian. Versi lain membaca, "dan manusia durhaka itu dinyatakan."\n* "Sebab Allah telah memilih kamu sebagai buah sulung untuk memperoleh keselamatan." (2:13) Versi ULT, UST, dan beberapa versi lain membacanya demikian. Bacaan lainnya adalah, "Sebab Allah telah memilih kamu dari yang sulung untuk diselamatkan."\n\n(Lihat: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +1:intro m987 0 # 2 Tesalonika 1 Catatan Umum\r\n\r\n## Struktur dan Format\r\n\r\nAyat 1-2 secara resmi memperkenalkan surat ini. Surat-surat di Timur Dekat kuno biasanya memiliki pengantar seperti ini di mana pengirim memperkenalkan dirinya, kemudian penerima, lalu memberikan salam.\r\n\r\n## Kesulitan-kesulitan penerjemahan lain yang mungkin terjadi dalam pasal ini\r\n\r\n### Paradoks\r\n\r\nParadoks adalah sebuah pernyataan benar yang tampaknya menggambarkan sesuatu yang mustahil.\r\n\r\nSebuah paradoks muncul dalam ayat 4-5 di mana Paulus berbicara tentang kesetiaan jemaat Tesalonika dalam menghadapi penganiayaan sebagai "bukti dari penghakiman Allah yang adil." Orang biasanya tidak akan berpikir bahwa percaya kepada Tuhan ketika dianiaya adalah tanda penghakiman Allah yang adil. Tetapi fakta bahwa Allah memberi mereka kemampuan untuk bertekun dalam iman mereka adalah bukti bahwa Allah mengklaim mereka sebagai milik-Nya dan akan menghakimi mereka sebagai orang-orang yang layak menerima kerajaan-Nya. Dalam ayat 5-10, Paulus menjelaskan lebih lanjut tentang penghakiman Allah yang adil, bahwa Allah akan memberi pahala kepada mereka yang percaya kepada-Nya dan menghukum mereka yang menyengsarakan umat-Nya. ([2 Tesalonika 1:4-5](./04.md))\r\n\r\nParadoks lain terjadi dalam ayat 9 di mana Paulus menggambarkan hukuman bagi orang yang menolak Allah sebagai "kebinasaan kekal". Biasanya, ketika sesuatu dihancurkan, ia tidak akan ada lagi. Namun dalam kasus ini, orang-orang yang menolak Allah akan mengalami keterpisahan yang kekal dari Allah, seperti yang dijelaskan dalam ayat selanjutnya. Terpisah dari Tuhan akan menghancurkan semua hal yang menyenangkan dalam hidup mereka, dan kehancuran yang terus menerus inilah yang akan mereka alami selama-lamanya. ([2 Tesalonika 1:9](../01/09.md)) +1:1 hm3e rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Σιλουανὸς 1 **Silwanus** adalah bentuk bahasa Latin dari "Silas." **Silwanus** adalah nama seorang pria, orang yang sama yang tercantum dalam kitab Kisah Para Rasul sebagai rekan seperjalanan Paulus. Jika pembaca Anda mungkin tidak mengetahui bahwa keduanya adalah orang yang sama, Anda dapat menggunakan nama "Silas" dalam teks dan "Silwanus" dalam catatan kaki. +1:1 ge00 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis Παῦλος, καὶ Σιλουανὸς, καὶ Τιμόθεος; τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 Anda mungkin ingin mengisi kata-kata yang diperlukan untuk menjadikannya sebuah kalimat yang lengkap. Terjemahan alternatif: "Paulus, Silwanus, dan Timotius mengirimkan surat ini kepada jemaat" +1:1 l8q8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Παῦλος, καὶ Σιλουανὸς, καὶ Τιμόθεος 1 Meskipun **Paulus** yang menulis surat ini, ia menyebutkan bahwa **Silwanus dan Timotius** juga mengirimkan surat ini. Ini berarti bahwa mereka bersamanya dan setuju dengan surat itu. Jika itu akan membantu para pembaca Anda, Anda dapat menjelaskannya dengan jelas, seperti dalam UST. +1:1 eajo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Θεῷ Πατρὶ ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ 1 Di sini Paulus berbicara tentang orang-orang percaya seolah-olah mereka menempati ruang di dalam diri Allah dan Yesus. Metafora ini mengungkapkan gagasan bahwa orang-orang percaya secara rohani bersatu dengan Allah dan Yesus. Jika hal ini mungkin disalahpahami dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat mengungkapkan maknanya dengan jelas. Terjemahan alternatif: "bersatu dengan Allah Bapa dan Tuhan Yesus Kristus" atau "berbagi kehidupan dengan Allah Bapa dan Tuhan Yesus Kristus" +1:2 g6rb rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Banyak bahasa memiliki cara yang berbeda untuk menyampaikan harapan baik saat mereka menyapa. Paulus menyapa para penerima suratnya dengan sebuah berkat. Gunakanlah bentuk yang merupakan harapan atau berkat yang baik dalam bahasa Anda. Terjemahan alternatif: "Kami berdoa agar Allah Bapa dan Tuhan Yesus Kristus memberikan kasih karunia dan damai sejahtera kepadamu" atau "Semoga kasih karunia dan damai sejahtera dari Allah Bapa dan Tuhan Yesus Kristus" atau "Semoga kasih karunia dan damai sejahtera dari Allah Bapa dan Tuhan Yesus Kristus menjadi bagianmu" atau "Semoga Allah Bapa dan Tuhan Yesus Kristus memberikan kasih karunia dan damai sejahtera di dalam hatimu" +1:2 bv9m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan kata benda abstrak untuk gagasan di balik **Anugerah** dan **Damai**, Anda dapat mengekspresikan gagasan ini sebagai kata kerja atau dengan cara lain. Terjemahan alternatif: "Semoga Allah Bapa dan Tuhan Yesus Kristus bermurah hati kepadamu dan memberikan ketenangan pada batinmu" atau "... berkenan kepadamu dan membuatmu tenang" atau "... bersikaplah baik kepadamu dan buatlah hatimu tenang" 1:3 o6v9 rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verses 3–12, Paul gives thanks for the believers in Thessalonica and prays for them. A heading for this section might be, “Thanks and Prayers.” -1:3 m6z5 εὐχαριστεῖν ὀφείλομεν & πάντοτε 1 Paul here uses the word **ought** to express that he has a moral obligation to God to **give thanks** for the believers in Thessalonica. Use a natural expression for this in your language. Alternate translation: “We are bound always to thank” or “We can do no other than to thank” or “We must give thanks continually to” -1:3 ea59 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole εὐχαριστεῖν ὀφείλομεν τῷ Θεῷ πάντοτε 1 Paul uses **always** as a generalization meaning “often” or “regularly.” Alternate translation: “We should often give thanks to God” -1:3 o01t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εὐχαριστεῖν ὀφείλομεν τῷ Θεῷ πάντοτε περὶ ὑμῶν, ἀδελφοί 1 If your readers might think that Paul is expressing an obligation only and that he does not actually pray for the Thessalonians, you could express the reality explicitly. Alternate translation: “We always thank God for you, brothers, as we ought” -1:3 h6t9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. If your readers understand that it is addressed only to men, you may need to use both the masculine and the feminine forms of that word in your language. If you use a nonfigurative word such as “believers”, see that both the genders are addressed. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” -1:3 ezaf rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns καθὼς ἄξιόν ἐστιν 1 If it is difficult to express **just as it is fitting** in your language or if it is unclear what **it** refers to, consider starting a new sentence here to state it clearly. Alternate translation: “When we give thanks for you we are doing the right thing” or “Giving thanks for you is right for us to be doing” or “ & is the right thing to do” -1:3 emu9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὑπεραυξάνει ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **faith**, you can express this idea as a verb. Alternate translation: “you believe in Christ more and more” or “you increasingly trust in Christ” or “you rely on Christ more each day” -1:3 xy7k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πλεονάζει ἡ ἀγάπη ἑνὸς ἑκάστου, πάντων ὑμῶν, εἰς ἀλλήλους 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **love**, you can express this idea as a verb. Alternate translation: “each of you sincerely loves one another more and more” -1:3 bmn6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns ἀλλήλους 1 Here, **one another** means fellow believers. Alternate translation: “each other” or “each believer” -1:4 kx1n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτοὺς ἡμᾶς 1 Here, **ourselves** is added to **we** to emphasize that even the apostle Paul and his associates are boasting about the Thessalonian believers. Alternate translation: “even we” or “we are the ones who” -1:4 gcth rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς ὑπομονῆς ὑμῶν, καὶ πίστεως 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **endurance** and **faith** or if it is unclear how these two terms relate, you can express these same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how you patiently continue to trust in Jesus” or “how you persevere in believing in the Lord” -1:4 qlo9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς διωγμοῖς ὑμῶν, καὶ ταῖς θλίψεσιν 1 The two words **persecutions** and **afflictions** are saying very similar things. The repetition is used to emphasize how difficult life has been for the Thessalonian believers. If two words are difficult to find in your language or if your language does not use repetition in this way, you can use one word with this meaning and make the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “as you have been going through all these very difficult times” or “as people make you suffer in all the ways” -1:4 md0d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πίστεως ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς διωγμοῖς ὑμῶν 1 Here, **faith in all your persecutions** does not mean to believe in or trust in persecutions. If your readers might be confused by that, you could express it more clearly. Alternate translation: “faith in Jesus Christ during all the times you are persecuted” -1:5 rs3b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔνδειγμα τῆς δικαίας κρίσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ, εἰς τὸ καταξιωθῆναι ὑμᾶς 1 The **evidence** that Paul is referring to here is the faithful endurance of the Thessalonian believers while suffering persecution, which he mentioned in verse 4. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. It may also be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Your endurance while suffering is a clear indication of God’s righteous judgment, that he considers you worthy” or “Your faithfulness through persecution shows that God is just and right to consider you worthy” -1:5 dad9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἰς τὸ καταξιωθῆναι ὑμᾶς τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that God will consider you worthy to be part of his kingdom” -1:5 xm2g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὑπὲρ ἧς καὶ πάσχετε 1 Here, **also** could mean: (1) the Thessalonian believers are suffering for the kingdom of God as well as being counted worthy of it. Alternate translation: “being a part of which is also the reason that you are suffering” (2) the Thessalonian believers are suffering along with other believers. Alternate translation: “which is why you are going through sufferings along with many others” -1:6 cxx1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴπερ δίκαιον παρὰ Θεῷ 1 Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since you know that God is just” or “for God is certainly right” -1:6 id3i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor παρὰ Θεῷ, ἀνταποδοῦναι τοῖς θλίβουσιν ὑμᾶς θλῖψιν 1 Here, **to return** means to cause someone to experience the same thing that they did to someone else as though the same action were bouncing back onto the people who did that action. Use a natural expression for this kind of reciprocal action. Alternate translation: “for God to afflict those who are afflicting you” or “for God to pay back those who are afflicting you” “for God to do the same to those who are afflicting you” -1:6 zemk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀνταποδοῦναι τοῖς θλίβουσιν ὑμᾶς θλῖψιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **affliction**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to afflict those who are afflicting you” or “to trouble those who are troubling you” -1:7 hxy2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καὶ ὑμῖν & ἄνεσιν 1 The words **and relief to you** continue the description of what God is right “to return” to people (verse 6). If this would not be understood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “and it is righteous for God to give relief to you” -1:7 l3ht rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns καὶ ὑμῖν τοῖς θλιβομένοις, ἄνεσιν μεθ’ ἡμῶν 1 Here, **you who are being afflicted** refers to the Thessalonian believers, and **us** refers to Paul and his associates. Other people are afflicting both groups because of their faith in Jesus. Alternate translation: “and relief to you who are being afflicted just as we are being afflicted” -1:7 knbb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὑμῖν & ἄνεσιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **relief**, you can express this idea with a verb or in another way. Alternate translation: “to relieve you” or “to rescue you” -1:7 bcxy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τοῖς θλιβομένοις 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom other people are afflicting” or “from the affliction that others are causing you” -1:7 fh5g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῇ ἀποκαλύψει τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, **at the revealing** is an indication of the time when the suffering believers will have relief from their suffering. Alternate translation: “at the time when the Lord Jesus is revealed” or “when everyone sees the Lord Jesus coming” -1:8 p1ie rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns διδόντος ἐκδίκησιν τοῖς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **vengeance**, you can express this idea in another way. Since this is part of God’s justice, do not use a word that implies that God is doing something illegal or inappropriate. Alternate translation: “punishing the people” or “judging the ones” -1:8 ynt4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῖς μὴ εἰδόσι Θεὸν 1 Here, **the ones not having known God** refers to those who have refused the relationship with God that he had offered to them. Alternate translation: “on those who did not want to know God” or “on those who have rejected God” -1:8 gv0v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ τοῖς μὴ ὑπακούουσιν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ 1 The phrase, **not obeying the gospel** could refer to: (1) the same people as **those not having known God**. Alternate translation: “and who are not obeying the gospel” (2) a separate group. Alternate translation: “and also on those who are not obeying the gospel” -1:8 m37v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὑπακούουσιν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ 1 The phrase, **obeying the gospel** is an idiom that means to live according to everything that God tells us in the gospel message. Alternate translation: “living according to the message of the gospel” or “heeding the admonitions that are part of the gospel message” -1:8 dkkx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the general possessive form **of our Lord Jesus** to describe **the gospel**. The specific meaning here is that the gospel is about Jesus. Alternate translation: “the gospel that is about our Lord Jesus” or “the gospel message that tells us about our Lord Jesus” -1:9 plw5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οἵτινες δίκην τίσουσιν 1 Here, **who** refers to the people who are not obeying the gospel, not to the Lord Jesus. You may prefer to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Those people will pay the penalty” -1:9 peog rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οἵτινες δίκην τίσουσιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of the word **penalty**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “who will be punished by God” or “whom God will punish” -1:9 ebf1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom δίκην τίσουσιν 1 Here, the phrase **pay the penalty** is an idiom meaning to suffer the consequences of doing something bad. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “will suffer the consequences” or “will undergo the retribution” -1:9 yruv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὄλεθρον αἰώνιον 1 Here, **eternal destruction** further describes the **penalty** that people will experience if they refuse to “obey the gospel.” The **destruction** that these people will experience is **eternal**, that is, it never ends. Therefore, do not translate with the meaning that these people will cease to exist. They will continue to exist, but continually experience the ruin of their lives. If necessary, put this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “God will punish them eternally” -1:9 qhta rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Here, **the face of the Lord** is an idiom meaning the presence of the Lord. Alternate translation: “away from our Lord Jesus” or “separated from the presence of the Lord Jesus” -1:9 htqg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῆς δόξης τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ 1 Here, the possessive form is describing **power** that has **glory**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use the adjective “glorious” to describe the **power**. Alternate translation: “his glorious power” -1:9 wmdm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς δόξης τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of **glory** and **power**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “experiencing how magnificent and powerful he is” -1:10 ugk9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὅταν ἔλθῃ & ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἐκείνῃ 1 Here, **that day** is the day when Jesus will return to the world. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the day when Jesus returns to the world” -1:10 bi2u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐνδοξασθῆναι ἐν τοῖς ἁγίοις αὐτοῦ, καὶ θαυμασθῆναι ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς πιστεύσασιν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as his saints glorify him and all those who have believed marvel at him” -1:10 wsvb rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἐνδοξασθῆναι ἐν τοῖς ἁγίοις αὐτοῦ, καὶ θαυμασθῆναι 1 Here, the two verbs **to be glorified**and **to be marveled at** indicate the result of Jesus’ coming, not the purpose. Use a connector here that indicates result. Alternate translation: “as his saints glorify him and all those who have believed marvel at him” or “with the result that his saints will glorify him and all those who have believed will marvel at him” -1:10 z1hg ἐνδοξασθῆναι ἐν τοῖς ἁγίοις αὐτοῦ, καὶ θαυμασθῆναι ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς πιστεύσασιν 1 The **saints** and **the ones having believed** are one group of people, not two. If your readers might be confused by this, you could combine these into one phrase. Alternate translation: “with the result that all of his saints, that is, the believers, will glorify him and marvel at him” or “as all of his people glorify him and marvel at him” -1:10 e56p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐπιστεύθη τὸ μαρτύριον ἡμῶν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you have believed our witness when we shared it with you” or “when we testified about the saving power of Jesus Christ, you believed what we said” -1:11 zy14 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς ὃ 1 Here, **For this** connects verse 11 to verse 10, so that verse 11 gives the means or method (prayer for the Thessalonian believers) for reaching the purpose that verse 10 has just described (for Jesus to “be glorified … and marveled at”). Use a natural way in your language for introducing this relationship. Alternate translation: “This is why” or “To this end” -1:11 ik19 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole καὶ προσευχόμεθα πάντοτε περὶ ὑμῶν 1 Paul is using **always** as an exaggeration in order to emphasize how often he prays for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. Alternate translation: “we also pray regularly for you” or “we continue to pray for you” -1:11 hiv9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῆς κλήσεως 1 Here, **calling** refers to God appointing or choosing people to belong to him and to proclaim his message of salvation through Jesus. Alternate translation: “to appoint you to belong to him” -1:11 r8gk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πληρώσῃ πᾶσαν εὐδοκίαν ἀγαθωσύνης, καὶ ἔργον πίστεως ἐν δυνάμει 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **desire**, **goodness**, **faith**, and **power**, you can express these ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “he may make you able to do all of the good things that you want to do because you trust in Jesus and because God is powerful” or “he may empower you to act on what you believe in order to do good things in every way that you desire, because God is powerful” -1:11 c7o6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καὶ πληρώσῃ 1 Here, **and he may fulfill** adds another reason why Paul and his associates **pray always** for the Thessalonian believers. This part of the sentence assumes some of the words from earlier in the sentence. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the earlier part of the sentence. Alternate translation: “and we also pray so that he may fulfill” -1:12 nvth rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ὅπως 1 Here, **so that** introduces the purpose for which Paul and his associates pray all of the things mentioned in verse 11. It is a repetition of the same purpose that was given in verse 10, using similar words. Alternate translation: “and we also pray so that” -1:12 c6ec rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, **the name of our Lord Jesus** stands for the person of the Lord Jesus. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the reputation of our Lord Jesus” or “our Lord Jesus” -1:12 q994 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὅπως ἐνδοξασθῇ τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ, ἐν ὑμῖν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. This could mean: (1) the Thessalonian believers will glorify Jesus. Alternate translation: “so that you would glorify the name of our Lord Jesus” (2) others will glorify Jesus because of what he has done for the Thessalonian believers. Alternate translation: “so that people would glorify the name of our Lord Jesus because of you” -1:12 pg2i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐν αὐτῷ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and Jesus might glorify you” -1:12 l4l1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐν αὐτῷ 1 The phrase **and you in him** leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could make a complete sentence by supplying these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and so that you might be glorified in him” or “and so that he might glorify you” -1:12 z8k9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns κατὰ τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “according to how exceedingly kind our God and the Lord Jesus Christ are to you” or “as our God and the Lord Jesus Christ continue to abundantly bless you” -1:12 z1my τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 The phrase translated as **our God and the Lord Jesus Christ** could refer to: (1) two persons of the Trinity, God the Father and Jesus the Son. (2) one person, Jesus, who is both God and Lord. Alternate translation: “of our God and Lord, Jesus Christ” -2:intro jq9r 0 # 2 Thessalonians 2 General Notes\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Man of lawlessness\n\nThis person is also called “the son of destruction” and “the lawless one” in this chapter. He is not Satan, but he is empowered by Satan and is the leader of those who do Satan’s evil work in the world in the last days. He is certainly one of the “antichrists” mentioned by John (1 John 2:18) and may be the final one, described as a beast in Revelation 13. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/antichrist]])\n\n### Sits in the temple of God\n\nPaul could be referring to the Jerusalem temple that the Romans destroyed several years after he wrote this letter. Or he could be referring to a future physical temple, or to the church as the spiritual temple of God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2:1 r36t rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verses 1–12, Paul exhorts believers not to be deceived about the day Jesus will come back and warns them about the coming man of lawlessness. A heading for this section might be, “The Man of Lawlessness” or “The Deception before Jesus Returns.” -2:1 q1uq rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section. -2:1 uy4z rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ὑπὲρ τῆς παρουσίας τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ ἡμῶν ἐπισυναγωγῆς ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 The **coming of our Lord Jesus Christ** and **our gathering to him** are two actions that happen at the same time. You can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “regarding the time of our Lord Jesus coming when we will be gathered together unto him” -2:1 sx2f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὑπὲρ τῆς παρουσίας τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ ἡμῶν ἐπισυναγωγῆς ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 If it is more natural in your language, you could use active verbs for the events of **coming** and **gathering**. Alternate translation: “about the time when our Lord Jesus will come and gather us to himself” -2:1 cvg5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” -2:2 b8b2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives εἰς τὸ μὴ ταχέως σαλευθῆναι ὑμᾶς ἀπὸ τοῦ νοὸς 1 The phrase **shaken in your mind** refers to a person’s thoughts being unsettled. You could also express this positively. Alternate translation: “for you to remain firm in your thinking” -2:2 fj52 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives μηδὲ θροεῖσθαι 1 The phrase **to be troubled** refers to a person’s emotions being unsettled. You could also express this positively. Alternate translation: “and remain peaceful when a message comes” or “and keep calm when you hear something” -2:2 d334 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis μήτε διὰ πνεύματος, μήτε διὰ λόγου, μήτε δι’ ἐπιστολῆς, ὡς δι’ ἡμῶν 1 Paul is leaving out some words here that might be necessary in your language. If it is helpful, you could supply these words. Alternate translation: “when you receive a message either by means of a spirit or by means of a spoken word or by means of a written letter that pretends to be coming from us” -2:2 ll80 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὡς δι’ ἡμῶν 1 Paul is leaving out some words here that might be necessary in your language. If it is helpful, you could supply these words. Alternate translation: “that claims to have come from us” or “trying to deceive you that it is from us” -2:2 k4dk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὡς ὅτι 1 Paul is leaving out some words here that might be necessary in your language. If it is helpful, you could supply these words. Alternate translation: “that talks as if” or “that falsely claims that” -2:2 ib6m ἡ ἡμέρα τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Here, **the day of the Lord** refers to the time when Jesus will come back to the earth for all believers. -2:3 l9c5 μή τις ὑμᾶς ἐξαπατήσῃ κατὰ μηδένα τρόπον 1 Alternate translation: “Do not permit anyone to fool you” or “Do not believe at all the wrong words that people are telling you about this” -2:3 ej66 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὅτι ἐὰν μὴ ἔλθῃ ἡ ἀποστασία πρῶτον 1 Here, Paul is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “for the day of the Lord will not come unless the apostacy comes first” -2:3 y7ch rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ ἀποστασία 1 Here, **the apostacy** refers to a future time when many people will turn away from God. If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express it in another way. Alternate translation: “the time when many people will rebel against God” -2:3 e86v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀποκαλυφθῇ ὁ ἄνθρωπος τῆς ἀνομίας 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the man of lawlessness arrives” or “the man of lawlessness makes himself known” -2:3 jsyj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ὁ ἄνθρωπος τῆς ἀνομίας 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **man** who is characterized by **lawlessness**. By this Paul means that this man will oppose all of God’s commandments and instructions. If this is not clear in your language, you could express this another way. Alternate translation: “the lawless man” or “the man who opposes God’s rule” -2:3 tkg9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀπωλείας 1 Here, **son of destruction** is an idiom meaning a person who is destined for destruction. Alternate translation: “the one who will be destroyed” or “the one whom God will destroy” -2:3 x6p0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀπωλείας 1 God will destroy this person some time after the events of verse 4. If it would be helpful in your language, consider moving this phrase to the end of verse 4. -2:4 t485 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πάντα λεγόμενον θεὸν ἢ σέβασμα 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “everything that people call God or whatever they worship” -2:4 sk8t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture αὐτὸν & καθίσαι 1 Here, **he himself sits** is part of a description of the kinds of things that this person does. If it is confusing in your language to use the present tense for this, you could use the future tense, since this will happen in the future. Alternate translation: “he himself will sit” -2:4 wj33 ἀποδεικνύντα ἑαυτὸν ὅτι ἔστιν Θεός 1 Here, **showing that he himself is God** does not mean that this man is God, but only that he is displaying himself to the world as though he were God. Alternate translation: “showing himself as God” or “attempting to demonstrate to people that he himself is God” -2:5 rsz1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὐ μνημονεύετε ὅτι, ἔτι ὢν πρὸς ὑμᾶς, ταῦτα ἔλεγον ὑμῖν 1 Paul is not asking for information here, but is using the question form to remind the Thessalonians of what he taught when he was with them previously. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement. See the UST. -2:5 lkk7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ταῦτα 1 Here, **these things** refers to the topics that Paul mentioned in verses 3 and 4, including the rebellion against God, the man of lawlessness, and the return of Jesus on the day of the Lord. -2:6 hph0 καὶ νῦν τὸ κατέχον οἴδατε 1 There are two possibilities for understanding the function of the word **now** here. (1) It goes with **the one restraining {him}**. Alternate translation: “And you know what is restraining him now” or (2) it goes with **you know**. Alternate translation: “And now you know what is restraining him” -2:6 ask4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὸ ἀποκαλυφθῆναι αὐτὸν ἐν τῷ αὐτοῦ καιρῷ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the proper time, when God will allow him to reveal himself” -2:7 faa5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast γὰρ 1 Here, the word translated **For** serves to connect this sentence as a contrast to what Paul has said about **lawlessness**, starting in verse 3. Until here, Paul was talking about lawlessness in the future, but now he wants to clarify that people are already being lawless.Use a natural way in your language for introducing this contrast. Alternate translation: “Now” or “Actually,” -2:7 si9i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸ & μυστήριον ἤδη ἐνεργεῖται τῆς ἀνομίας 1 Here, **lawlessness** is characterized as a **mystery** because we cannot understand why people rebel against God’s wise instructions unless we understand the spiritual forces at work, which Paul explains here. If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you can express them in another way. Alternate translation: “people are already mysteriously rebelling against God” or “Satan is already secretly leading people to reject God’s laws, as this man will do” -2:7 fcu7 ὁ κατέχων 1 To restrain someone is to hold him back or to keep him from doing what he wants to do. Alternate translation: “the one who has been holding him back” -2:7 bijc rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns γένηται 1 Here, **he** refers to the one who is restraining the man of lawlessness. If this is not clear to your readers, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the one who restrains the man of lawlessness moves” -2:7 tt88 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐκ μέσου γένηται 1 Here Paul speaks of the person who is restraining the man of lawlessness as though he were standing in front of him and blocking his path. If this does not make sense in your language, you could use an equivalent metaphor or you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternative translation: “he stops restraining him” -2:8 hn67 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ τότε ἀποκαλυφθήσεται ὁ ἄνομος 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and then God will allow the lawless one to show himself” -2:8 vay9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῷ πνεύματι τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 In this figure of speech, **breath** represents the power of God and **mouth** represents the spoken word of Jesus. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “by the power of his spoken word” -2:8 hy3y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἀνελεῖ τῷ πνεύματι τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ, καὶ καταργήσει τῇ ἐπιφανείᾳ τῆς παρουσίας αὐτοῦ 1 These two phrases describe the same event. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize how much more powerful Jesus is than the man of lawlessness. If it is confusing for your readers to talk about killing someone and then bringing him to nothing, you could reverse the order of the phrases, as in the UST, or you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “will destroy by his glorious appearance and with the breath of his mouth” -2:9 sp9v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession οὗ ἐστιν ἡ παρουσία, κατ’ ἐνέργειαν τοῦ Σατανᾶ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **work** that **Satan** does. If this is not clear in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Satan will bring this man and will work through him” -2:9 rikg οὗ 1 Here, **whom** refers back to the man of lawlessness. Alternate translation: “of the man of lawlessness” -2:9 bd5m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἐν πάσῃ δυνάμει, καὶ σημείοις, καὶ τέρασιν ψεύδους 1 Here, **all** is hyperbole. It can apply to: (1) only **power**, with the meaning “much” or “great.” Alternate translation: “with great power to do signs and false wonders” or (2) **power**, **signs**, and **wonders**, with the meaning “many kinds of.” Alternate translation: “with many kinds of power, signs, and false wonders” or (3) a combination of the two. Alternate translation: “with much power to do all kinds of signs and false wonders” -2:9 kcaw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν πάσῃ δυνάμει, καὶ σημείοις, καὶ τέρασιν ψεύδους 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **power**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “with very powerful signs and false wonders” or “who made him very powerful to do signs and false wonders” -2:9 fjfn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet καὶ σημείοις, καὶ τέρασιν ψεύδους 1 The words **signs** and **wonders** often occur together and mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how amazing they are. If your language does not have two words for this or does not use repetition to do this, you can use one word and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “and amazing false miracles” -2:10 tf75 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάσῃ 1 Here, **all** is hyperbole and could mean: (1) “a high degree of” or (2) “many kinds of” -2:10 ippb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἐν πάσῃ ἀπάτῃ ἀδικίας 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **deceit** that results from **unrighteousness**. If the relationship of the words is not clear in your language, you could express it more explicitly. Alternate translation: “because he is so unrighteous, he will be very deceptive” -2:10 b55e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν πάσῃ ἀπάτῃ ἀδικίας, τοῖς ἀπολλυμένοις 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **deceit** and **unrighteousness**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “because he is so unrighteous, he will completely deceive those who are perishing” -2:10 e8hi rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἀνθ’ ὧν 1 What follows this phrase is the reason that the people are perishing. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a reason. You may want to start a new sentence here and end what came before it with a period. Alternate translation: “They are perishing because” -2:10 rtua rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀγάπην τῆς ἀληθείας οὐκ ἐδέξαντο 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **love** and **truth**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Also, your language might prefer an expression other than **love** for something as impersonal as **truth**. Alternate translation: “they did not want to consider the true message about Jesus to be important” -2:10 sl5b rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result εἰς τὸ σωθῆναι αὐτούς 1 This phrase could express: (1) the result of receiving the love of the truth. Alternate translation: “and thus be saved” or (2) the purpose of loving the truth. Alternate translation: “so that they could be saved” -2:10 xst1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἰς τὸ σωθῆναι αὐτούς 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, that would be God. Alternate translation: “for God to save them” or “so that God would save them” -2:11 sj1v rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διὰ τοῦτο 1 What follows **because of this** is the result of the action of the people who “did not receive the love of the truth” in verse 10. Use a connector that shows that what the people did in verse 10 is the reason for what follows in this verse. Alternate translation: “for this reason” or “because the people did not receive the love of the truth” -2:11 en8e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πέμπει αὐτοῖς ὁ Θεὸς ἐνέργειαν πλάνης, εἰς τὸ πιστεῦσαι αὐτοὺς τῷ ψεύδει 1 Paul is speaking of **God** allowing something to happen to people as if he is **sending** something to them. Alternate translation: “God is allowing them to think wrongly so that they believe the lies of the man of lawlessness” -2:11 u7a0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἐνέργειαν πλάνης 1 Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **working** that is characterized by **error**. This means something that works to produce error in them. Alternate translation: “the ability to think in a wrong way” -2:11 nass rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς τὸ πιστεῦσαι αὐτοὺς 1 Here, **for** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God sends the **working of error**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “so that they may believe” -2:11 bkpm rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns εἰς τὸ πιστεῦσαι αὐτοὺς 1 Here, **them** refers to the people who “did not receive the love of the truth” in verse 10. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “so that these people may believe” or “in order that the people who did not receive the love of the truth may believe” -2:12 x33k rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 This phrase introduces a purpose clause. This follows the purpose clause of verse 11, so you may want to link them together. Alternate translation: “and furthermore, so that” or “and therefore” -2:12 d63e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive κριθῶσιν πάντες 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, that would be God. Alternate translation: “God may judge all of them” -2:12 pkw8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οἱ 1 Here, **the ones** refers back to the people that Paul has described with similar terms in verse 10. These are the same people who “did not receive the love of the truth” and instead accepted the “deceit of unrighteousness.” You may want to start a new sentence here and end what came before with a period. Alternate translation: “Those are the people” -2:12 m1cl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οἱ μὴ πιστεύσαντες τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, ἀλλὰ εὐδοκήσαντες τῇ ἀδικίᾳ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **truth** and **unrighteousness**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “those who have not believed the true message but have enjoyed doing sinful things” or “those people who have rejected the true message about the Lord and instead have chosen to do what is wrong” -2:13 w83a rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings 0 # General Information:\n\nPaul now changes topics. If you are using section headings, you could put one here before verse 13. Suggested heading: “Paul gives thanks to God for the believers and encourages them.” -2:13 b3hh δὲ 1 The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to indicate/show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section. -2:13 dze5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἡμεῖς & ὀφείλομεν εὐχαριστεῖν & πάντοτε 1 The word **always** is a generalization. This is used to emphasize the importance of the action. If this is not natural in your language, you could use the alternative renderings given. Alternate translation: “we should continually give thanks” or “we must thank God at all times” -2:13 m418 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς & ὀφείλομεν 1 Here, **we** refers to three men, Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy. If you have exclusive and inclusive first-person pronouns in your language, this should be an exclusive pronoun. -2:13 ia4x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀδελφοὶ ἠγαπημένοι ὑπὸ Κυρίου 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “for the Lord loves you, brothers” -2:13 v15j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοὶ 1 Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. If your readers understand that it is addressed only to men, you may need to use both the masculine and the feminine forms of that word in your language. If you use a nonfigurative word such as “believers”, see that both the genders are addressed. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” -2:13 l7a8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀπαρχὴν εἰς σωτηρίαν 1 Being among the first people to be saved is spoken of as if the Thessalonian believers were **firstfruits**. Alternate translation: “to be among the first people who believe” or “to be some of the first people whom God was saving” -2:13 bpqn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀπαρχὴν εἰς σωτηρίαν ἐν ἁγιασμῷ Πνεύματος καὶ πίστει ἀληθείας 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could change the abstract nouns **salvation**, **sanctification**, **belief**, and **truth** into verbal forms. Alternate translation: “to be among the first people who believe what is true, and whom God has saved and set apart for himself by his Spirit” -2:14 e0gy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis διὰ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου ἡμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **through our gospel** does not mean that the gospel belongs to Paul and his companions. It refers to the gospel about Jesus that Paul and his companions preached. Alternate translation: “through the gospel that we preached to you” -2:14 thmh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς περιποίησιν δόξης τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 The phrase **to the acquiring of the glory of our Lord Jesus Christ** does not mean that we will take over or divide up the glory of Jesus Christ. It means that the believers will share in Christ’s glory. Alternate translation: “so that you might share in the glory of our Lord Jesus Christ” or “in order that you might receive glory like our Lord Jesus Christ” -2:14 pke7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς περιποίησιν δόξης τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you can express the same idea with a different form. Alternate translation: “so that you might become glorious like our Lord” -2:15 holv rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἄρα οὖν 1 The words **So then** connect this verse with verses 13 and 14 as their logical conclusion. Because God did the wonderful things in those verses, the Thessalonians should do what verse 15 says. Use a natural way to introduce a conclusion in your language. Alternate translation: “Therefore” or “Because God did all of that for you” -2:15 pa9j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Here, **brothers** means fellow believers in Jesus, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” -2:15 u9ss rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor στήκετε 1 Here, the phrase **stand firm** is used to mean to not change one’s beliefs but, rather, to remain steadfast in what one believes. If this would be unclear in your language, consider using an equivalent expression, or use plain language. Alternate translation: “continue to believe the truth” or “do not give up your faith” -2:15 l4vr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κρατεῖτε τὰς παραδόσεις 1 Here, **traditions** refers to the truths about Christ that Paul and the other apostles taught. Paul speaks of them as if his readers could hold on to them with their hands. Alternate translation: “do not give up believing those truths” or “continue to believe the true teachings” -2:15 cpdo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet στήκετε καὶ κρατεῖτε 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize the importance of doing this. If your language does not use repetition to do this, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “keep on firmly believing” or “do not allow anyone to change your mind in any way about” -2:15 whp8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐδιδάχθητε 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “we have taught you” -2:15 z2vs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche διὰ λόγου 1 Here, **by word** is an expression that means that Paul had been present with them and taught them personally. Alternate translation: “by what we said to you in person” or “when we were talking to you.” -2:15 jrg4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δι’ ἐπιστολῆς ἡμῶν 1 You can make clear the implicit information that **by our letter** refers to what Paul taught to the Thessalonians in an earlier letter (probably 1 Thessalonians). Alternate translation: “by what we wrote to you in a letter” -2:16 g8m1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section. -2:16 njk1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing αὐτὸς δὲ ὁ Κύριος ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς ὁ Πατὴρ ἡμῶν 1 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul ends this section with a blessing. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “Now may our Lord Jesus Christ himself, and God our Father” or “We pray that our Lord Jesus Christ himself, and God our Father” -2:16 yge9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν & ἡμῶν & ἡμᾶς 1 The words **our** and **us** refer to all believers including the writers. If you have exclusive and inclusive first-person plural pronouns in your language, these should be inclusive pronouns. -2:16 cm54 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς & Κύριος ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς 1 Here, **himself** gives additional emphasis to the phrase **Lord Jesus Christ**. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “our Lord Jesus Christ, the very one” -2:16 h3gk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δοὺς παράκλησιν αἰωνίαν, καὶ ἐλπίδα ἀγαθὴν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **comfort** and **hope**, you can express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “always comforts us and has given us good things to hope for” -2:16 iirq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν χάριτι 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because of how gracious he is to us” -2:17 x3rr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy παρακαλέσαι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας, καὶ στηρίξαι 1 Here, the word **hearts** represents both the emotion and will of a person. If **hearts** does not mean this in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “may he give comfort and strength to your livers” or “may he comfort you and strengthen you” -2:17 yw5f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἐν παντὶ ἔργῳ καὶ λόγῳ ἀγαθῷ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the phrase **work and word** with verbs. Alternative translation: “in every good thing that you do and say” or “so that you could do and say everything that is good.” -3:intro b8hk 0 # 2 Tesalonika 3 Catatan Umum\n\n## Konsep-Konsep Khusus dalam Bab ini\n\n## Orang-orang yang menganggur dan malas\n\nDi Tesalonika, rupanya ada masalah dengan orang-orang di dalam gereja yang mampu bekerja tetapi tidak mau bekerja. (Lihat: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explisit]])\n\n### Apa yang harus kamu lakukan jika saudaramu berbuat dosa?\n\nDalam pasal ini, Paulus mengajarkan bahwa orang Kristen harus hidup dengan cara yang menghormati Allah. Orang Kristen juga harus saling mendorong dan bertanggung jawab atas apa yang mereka lakukan. Gereja juga bertanggung jawab untuk mendorong orang percaya untuk bertobat jika mereka berbuat dosa (Lihat: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] dan [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]]) -3:1 k33i rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings 0 # Informasi Umum:\r\n\r\nDalam ayat 1-5, Paulus meminta jemaat untuk mendoakan dia dan rekan-rekannya serta menguatkan mereka. Judul untuk bagian ini mungkin adalah, "Berdoalah untuk Kami." -3:1 jy75 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases τὸ λοιπὸν 1 Di sini, kata **Akhirnya** menandai perubahan topik. **Berdoalah** bukanlah perintah terakhir yang Paulus berikan, tetapi ini adalah cara Paulus membuka bagian terakhir dari suratnya di mana ia akan membahas beberapa hal yang tersisa. Terjemahan alternatif: "Satu hal lagi" atau "Jadi, lanjutkanlah" -3:1 m1s5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Di sini, **saudara-saudara** berarti sesama orang Kristen, termasuk pria dan wanita. Terjemahan alternatif: "saudara-saudari seiman" -3:1 v8k2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Kata ganti **kami** merujuk pada Paulus dan teman-temannya. Jika Anda memiliki kata ganti orang pertama yang eksklusif dan inklusif dalam bahasa Anda, kata ganti ini haruslah kata ganti eksklusif. -3:1 r54v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τρέχῃ 1 Paulus berbicara tentang **firman** Allah yang menyebar seolah-olah berlari dari satu tempat ke tempat lain. Ia membandingkan penyebaran firman Allah yang begitu cepat dengan seseorang yang menyampaikan kabar baik kepada orang lain. Terjemahan alternatif: "dapat menyebar dengan cepat" atau "dapat didengar oleh banyak orang" -3:1 yvkm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ δοξάζηται 1 Anda dapat menyatakannya dalam bentuk aktif, jika konstruksi pasif tidak alami dalam bahasa Anda. Terjemahan alternatif: "dan banyak orang akan menghormatinya" -3:1 egho rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καθὼς καὶ πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 Frasa ini tidak menyertakan beberapa kata yang mungkin diperlukan oleh banyak bahasa untuk melengkapi. Jika akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat menyediakan kata-kata ini dari konteksnya. Terjemahan alternatif: "sama seperti yang juga terjadi padamu" atau "yang persis seperti yang kamu lakukan" -3:2 xg2h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ῥυσθῶμεν 1 Anda dapat menyatakan ini dalam bentuk aktif. Terjemahan alternatif: "Semoga Tuhan menyelamatkan kita" atau "Semoga Tuhan menyelamatkan kita" -3:2 h11p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἀτόπων καὶ πονηρῶν 1 Dua istilah **para pengacau** dan **orang-orang jahat** pada dasarnya memiliki arti yang sama dan digunakan bersama-sama untuk menekankan jumlah kejahatan. Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan pengulangan untuk melakukan hal ini atau jika Anda tidak memiliki dua kata untuk atribut-atribut ini, Anda dapat menggunakan satu frasa dan memberikan penekanan dengan cara lain. Terjemahan alternatif: "orang-orang yang sangat jahat" atau "banyak orang jahat" -3:2 p1ct rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes οὐ γὰρ πάντων ἡ πίστις 1 Frasa **bukan semua orang** adalah pernyataan negatif yang menekankan betapa langkanya iman. Jika hal ini membingungkan dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat mengungkapkan maknanya secara positif. Terjemahan alternatif: "karena hanya beberapa orang yang percaya kepada Tuhan" atau "karena orang yang percaya kepada Yesus hanya sedikit" -3:2 appf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ πίστις 1 Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan kata benda abstrak untuk ide **iman**, Anda dapat mengungkapkan ide yang sama dengan cara lain. Terjemahan alternatif: "percaya kepada Yesus" -3:3 yx9g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὃς στηρίξει 1 Kata **menguatkan** di sini mengacu pada kekuatan rohani, bukan kekuatan fisik. Jika akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat menjelaskan hal ini dalam terjemahan Anda. Terjemahan alternatif: "yang akan menguatkanmu secara rohani" atau "yang akan membuatmu kuat secara batiniah" -3:3 p91k τοῦ πονηροῦ 1 Ini bisa berarti: (1) si jahat, yaitu Iblis. Terjemahan alternatif: "Setan" atau (2) kejahatan secara umum. Terjemahan alternatif: "kejahatan" -3:4 xk85 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πεποίθαμεν δὲ 1 Frasa **Kami percaya** mungkin membingungkan dalam beberapa bahasa. Jika itu terjadi dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat menerjemahkannya sebagai frasa kata benda. Terjemahan alternatif: "Kami juga beriman" atau "Kami juga percaya" -3:4 w79e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πεποίθαμεν δὲ ἐν Κυρίῳ ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς 1 Hal ini dapat berarti: (1) Paulus memiliki keyakinan terhadap jemaat di Tesalonika karena hubungan dekat yang mereka miliki dengan Tuhan Yesus. Dalam hal ini, Paulus berbicara tentang hubungan ini seolah-olah mereka berada di dalam Tuhan Yesus. Terjemahan alternatif: "Karena kamu bersatu dengan Tuhan, maka kami pun yakin" (2) Paulus memiliki keyakinan dalam Tuhan Yesus, bahwa Ia akan membuat mereka melakukan apa yang benar. Terjemahan alternatif: "Karena kami percaya kepada Tuhan Yesus untuk memampukan kamu, kami juga yakin" -3:5 giz4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ & Κύριος κατευθύναι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας εἰς τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Di sini, **hati** adalah singkatan dari pikiran atau pikiran seseorang. Jika pembaca Anda tidak memahami hal ini, Anda dapat menggunakan ungkapan yang setara atau bahasa yang lebih sederhana. Terjemahan alternatif: "kiranya Tuhan membuatmu mengerti kasih Allah dan ketekunan Kristus" atau "kiranya Tuhan menolongmu untuk mengetahui kasih Allah dan ketekunan Kristus" -3:5 wre3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Paulus berbicara tentang **kasih** Allah dan **ketabahan** Kristus seolah-olah keduanya adalah tujuan di sebuah jalan. Jika pembaca Anda tidak memahami kiasan ini, Anda dapat mengungkapkan maknanya dengan cara yang tidak kiasan. Terjemahan alternatif: "untuk mengetahui betapa Allah mengasihi Anda dan ketekunan yang diberikan Kristus kepada Anda" -3:5 dzbn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession εἰς τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Di sini, **kasih Allah** dapat berarti (1) kasih yang berasal dari Allah. Terjemahan alternatif: "untuk mengetahui betapa Allah mengasihi Anda" atau (2) kasih yang diberikan manusia kepada Allah. Terjemahan alternatif: "untuk lebih mengasihi Allah" -3:5 ia7x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Di sini, **ketabahan Kristus** dapat berarti (1) ketabahan yang diberikan Kristus kepada umat-Nya. Terjemahan alternatif: "mengalami ketekunan yang diberikan Kristus kepadamu" atau (2) ketekunan yang dimiliki Kristus melalui penderitaan-Nya. Terjemahan alternatif: "untuk mengetahui seberapa besar ketekunan yang telah Kristus berikan kepadamu" -3:6 mst3 rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings 0 # Informasi Umum:\r\n\r\nDalam ayat 6-15, Paulus memberikan beberapa instruksi terakhir kepada jemaat mengenai bekerja dan tidak berpangku tangan. Judul untuk bagian ini mungkin adalah, "Orang Percaya Harus Bekerja." -3:6 v33v rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Kata yang diterjemahkan **Sekarang** menandai perubahan topik. Anda dapat menggunakan cara alami dalam bahasa Anda untuk menunjukkan bahwa ini adalah bagian baru dengan topik yang berbeda dari bagian sebelumnya. -3:6 x9l8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί & ἀδελφοῦ 1 Di sini, kata **saudara-saudara** dan **saudara** merujuk kepada sesama orang Kristen, termasuk pria dan wanita. Terjemahan alternatif: "saudara-saudara ... saudara laki-laki atau perempuan" -3:6 y4a9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Di sini, **nama** adalah singkatan dari pribadi Yesus Kristus. Ini juga dapat berarti "dengan otoritas dari." Jika menggunakan istilah ini tidak jelas dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat mengungkapkannya secara langsung. Terjemahan alternatif: "seolah-olah Tuhan kita Yesus Kristus sendiri yang berbicara" atau "dengan otoritas yang diberikan Tuhan kita Yesus Kristus kepada kita" -3:6 jvw1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Di sini, **kita** merujuk kepada semua orang percaya. Jika Anda memiliki kata ganti orang pertama jamak yang eksklusif dan inklusif dalam bahasa Anda, kata ganti ini haruslah kata ganti inklusif. -3:6 x2r8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀτάκτως περιπατοῦντος 1 Di sini Paulus berbicara tentang orang-orang yang tidak hidup dengan baik seolah-olah mereka berjalan dengan cara yang sembarangan. Jika pembaca Anda tidak memahami metafora ini, Anda dapat menggunakan metafora yang setara dari budaya Anda. Atau, Anda dapat mengungkapkan maknanya dengan cara yang tidak kiasan. Terjemahan alternatif: "yang hidup dengan cara yang buruk" atau "yang tidak hidup dengan benar" -3:6 se1g τὴν παράδοσιν 1 Di sini, **ajaran** mengacu pada ajaran yang diterima para rasul dari Yesus dan diteruskan kepada semua orang percaya. Terjemahan alternatif: "ajaran-ajaran" atau "petunjuk-petunjuk" -3:7 h222 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μιμεῖσθαι ἡμᾶς 1 Frasa **mengikuti** mungkin merupakan kata yang sulit untuk diterjemahkan ke dalam bahasa Anda. Dalam hal ini, Anda dapat membuatnya menjadi eksplisit. Terjemahan alternatif: "bertindak seperti yang dilakukan oleh rekan kerja saya dan saya" -3:7 b1i1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἠτακτήσαμεν ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Paulus menggunakan bentuk negatif ganda untuk menekankan hal yang positif. Jika bentuk negatif ganda ini akan disalahpahami dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat menerjemahkannya sebagai pernyataan positif. Terjemahan alternatif: "kami hidup di tengah-tengah kamu sebagai orang-orang yang sangat disiplin" atau "kami bekerja dengan tekun ketika kami bersama kamu" -3:8 ruh3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἄρτον 1 Paulus merujuk pada **roti** di sini karena itu adalah makanan yang paling umum dan mendasar bagi mereka. Jika pembaca Anda tidak terbiasa dengan **roti** atau jika itu adalah jenis makanan yang dianggap tidak biasa atau mewah, Anda dapat menggunakan ungkapan umum untuk makanan biasa. Terjemahan alternatif: "makanan" atau "apa saja" -3:8 d9h1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας ἐργαζόμενοι 1 Di sini, **malam dan siang** membentuk sebuah merisme, yang berarti "sepanjang waktu". Jika dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat menjelaskan bahwa mereka tidak bekerja tanpa beristirahat sama sekali, maka Anda dapat memperjelas maknanya. Terjemahan alternatif: "bekerja sepanjang waktu dengan sedikit istirahat" atau "kami bekerja hampir terus menerus" -3:8 w8fq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἐν κόπῳ καὶ μόχθῳ 1 Di sini, **berjuang** dan **kerja keras** memiliki arti yang sangat mirip. Paulus menggunakan pengulangan ini untuk menekankan bahwa mereka bekerja sangat keras. Jika Anda tidak memiliki dua kata yang mirip yang dapat Anda gunakan di sini atau jika Anda tidak wajar menggunakan pengulangan seperti itu, Anda dapat menekankan hal ini dengan cara lain. Terjemahan alternatif: "dengan usaha keras" atau "dalam keadaan yang sangat sulit" -3:9 sn3k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐχ ὅτι οὐκ ἔχομεν ἐξουσίαν, ἀλλ’ 1 Paulus menggunakan bentuk negatif ganda untuk menekankan hal yang positif. Jika bentuk negatif ganda ini akan disalahpahami dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat menerjemahkannya sebagai pernyataan positif. Terjemahan alternatif: "dan kami memang berhak menerima makanan dari kamu, tetapi sebaliknya kami bekerja untuk makanan kami" -3:9 lrjr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἑαυτοὺς τύπον δῶμεν ὑμῖν 1 Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan kata benda abstrak untuk ide **teladan**, Anda dapat mengekspresikan ide yang sama dengan cara lain. Terjemahan alternatif: "kami mungkin akan menunjukkan jalan yang benar bagimu" atau "kami mungkin akan menunjukkan cara hidup untukmu" -3:9 z0up μιμεῖσθαι 1 Lihat bagaimana Anda menerjemahkan **teladan** dalam ayat 7. -3:10 c652 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives εἴ τις οὐ θέλει ἐργάζεσθαι, μηδὲ ἐσθιέτω 1 Anda dapat menyatakannya dalam bentuk positif, jika bentuk ini sulit dipahami dalam bahasa Anda. Terjemahan alternatif: "Jika seseorang ingin makan, dia harus bekerja" -3:11 ey6c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τινας περιπατοῦντας & ἀτάκτως 1 Di sini, **berjalan** berarti perilaku dalam kehidupan. Anda dapat menggunakan metafora yang setara dari budaya Anda, jika tersedia. Jika tidak, Anda dapat mengekspresikan maknanya dengan cara yang tidak kiasan. Terjemahan alternatif: "beberapa orang yang hidup bermalas-malasan" atau "beberapa orang yang malas" -3:11 iv1z rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἀλλὰ περιεργαζομένους 1 Orang yang ikut campur adalah orang yang mencampuri urusan orang lain tanpa diminta untuk membantu. -3:12 bm6z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μετὰ ἡσυχίας 1 Di sini, **dengan tenang** adalah kebalikan dari ikut campur. Paulus menasihati para pencampuri untuk berhenti terlibat dalam urusan orang lain. Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan kata benda abstrak untuk ide **ketenangan**, Anda dapat mengungkapkan ide yang sama dengan cara lain. Terjemahan alternatif: "dengan cara yang tenang dan damai" -3:13 jx8t rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δέ 1 Paulus di sini menggunakan kata **Tetapi** untuk mengontraskan orang percaya yang malas dengan orang percaya yang bekerja keras. Gunakan cara yang alami dalam bahasa Anda untuk memperkenalkan kontras. Terjemahan alternatif: "Mengenai" -3:13 e59v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ὑμεῖς 1 Kata **kamu** merujuk kepada semua orang percaya di Tesalonika, jadi kata ini harus dalam bentuk jamak. -3:13 usu9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Di sini, **saudara-saudara** berarti sesama orang Kristen, termasuk pria dan wanita. Terjemahan alternatif: "saudara-saudari seiman" -3:14 mzs4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῷ λόγῳ ἡμῶν 1 Paulus mengacu pada perintahnya kepada jemaat Tesalonika sebagai sebuah **katakan**. Jika pembaca Anda tidak memahami hal ini, Anda dapat menggunakan ungkapan yang setara atau bahasa yang lebih sederhana. Terjemahan alternatif: "perintah kami" -3:14 nv3v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τοῦτον σημειοῦσθε 1 Paulus ingin jemaat Tesalonika memperhatikan siapa orang ini. Terjemahan alternatif: "tunjukkan orang itu" atau "pastikan semua orang tahu siapa dia" -3:14 y552 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἵνα ἐντραπῇ 1 Paulus memerintahkan jemaat untuk menghindari orang percaya yang malas sebagai tindakan disiplin. Jika perlu, Anda dapat membuat hal ini eksplisit untuk memperjelas maknanya. Terjemahan alternatif: "supaya ia tahu bahwa kemalasannya itu salah" -3:15 idj6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφόν 1 Meskipun istilah **saudara** bersifat maskulin, Paulus menggunakan kata ini dalam pengertian umum yang mencakup laki-laki dan perempuan. Terjemahan alternatif: "sesama orang percaya" -3:16 nef4 rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings 0 # Informasi Umum:\r\n\r\nDalam ayat 16-18, Paulus memberikan kata penutup kepada jemaat di Tesalonika. Judul untuk bagian ini mungkin adalah, "Kata-kata Penutup." -3:16 z1zs rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Kata yang diterjemahkan **Sekarang** menandai perubahan topik. Anda dapat menggunakan cara alami dalam bahasa Anda untuk menunjukkan bahwa ini adalah bagian baru dengan topik yang berbeda dari bagian sebelumnya. -3:16 whb9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing αὐτὸς & ὁ Κύριος τῆς εἰρήνης, δῴη ὑμῖν 1 Paulus mengakhiri surat ini dengan berkat yang juga merupakan doa. Gunakanlah bentuk yang dapat dikenali orang sebagai berkat atau doa dalam bahasa Anda. Terjemahan alternatif: "Aku berdoa supaya Tuhan yang membawa damai sejahtera itu sendiri memberikannya kepadamu" -3:16 zl1s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς & ὁ Κύριος τῆς εἰρήνης 1 Di sini, **Ia (sendiri)** menekankan bahwa Tuhan adalah sumber damai sejahtera dan bahwa Ia secara pribadi akan memberikan damai sejahtera kepada orang-orang percaya. -3:17 c2cb ὁ ἀσπασμὸς τῇ ἐμῇ χειρὶ, Παύλου, ὅ ἐστιν σημεῖον ἐν πάσῃ ἐπιστολῇ, οὕτως γράφω 1 Terjemahan alternatif: "Aku, Paulus, menulis salam ini dengan tanganku sendiri, yang aku lakukan dalam setiap surat, sebagai tanda bahwa surat ini benar-benar dariku, karena begitulah caraku menulis" -3:17 e3sa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τῇ ἐμῇ χειρὶ 1 Di sini, frasa **dengan tanganku sendiri** adalah sebuah idiom yang berarti "dengan tulisan tangan saya sendiri." Jika pembaca Anda tidak akan memahami hal ini, Anda dapat menggunakan idiom yang setara atau menggunakan bahasa biasa. Terjemahan alternatif: "Saya sendiri yang menulis" -3:17 wg3f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὕτως γράφω 1 Paulus menegaskan bahwa surat ini berasal darinya dan bukan pemalsuan. Jika itu akan membantu para pembaca Anda, Anda dapat mengungkapkannya secara eksplisit. Terjemahan alternatif: "Anda dapat mengetahui bahwa surat ini berasal dari saya karena beginilah cara saya menulis" -3:18 h18b rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, μετὰ πάντων ὑμῶν 1 Paulus mengakhiri surat ini dengan satu berkat lagi. Gunakanlah bentuk yang dapat dikenali orang sebagai berkat dalam bahasa Anda. Terjemahan alternatif: "Aku berdoa agar kasih karunia Tuhan kita Yesus Kristus menyertai kamu sekalian" +1:3 m6z5 εὐχαριστεῖν ὀφείλομεν & πάντοτε 1 Di sini Paulus menggunakan kata "mengupayakan" untuk menyatakan bahwa ia memiliki kewajiban moral kepada Allah untuk "mengucap syukur" atas jemaat di Tesalonika. Gunakan ungkapan yang wajar untuk hal ini dalam bahasa Anda. Terjemahan alternatif: "Kita terikat untuk selalu mengucap syukur" atau "Kita tidak dapat melakukan hal lain selain mengucap syukur" atau "Kita harus terus mengucap syukur kepada" +1:3 ea59 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole εὐχαριστεῖν ὀφείλομεν τῷ Θεῷ πάντοτε 1 Paulus menggunakan **selalu** sebagai sebuah generalisasi yang berarti "sering" atau "secara teratur." Terjemahan alternatif: "Kita harus sering mengucap syukur kepada Allah" +1:3 o01t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εὐχαριστεῖν ὀφείλομεν τῷ Θεῷ πάντοτε περὶ ὑμῶν, ἀδελφοί 1 Jika pembaca Anda mungkin berpikir bahwa Paulus hanya mengungkapkan sebuah kewajiban dan ia tidak benar-benar berdoa untuk jemaat di Tesalonika, Anda dapat mengungkapkan kenyataannya secara eksplisit. Terjemahan alternatif: "Kami selalu mengucap syukur kepada Allah untuk kamu, saudara-saudara, sebagaimana seharusnya" +1:3 h6t9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Di sini, **saudara-saudara** berarti sesama orang Kristen, termasuk pria dan wanita. Jika pembaca Anda memahami bahwa kata ini hanya ditujukan kepada laki-laki, Anda mungkin perlu menggunakan bentuk maskulin dan feminin dari kata tersebut dalam bahasa Anda. Jika Anda menggunakan kata yang tidak berbentuk figuratif seperti "orang-orang percaya", pastikan bahwa kedua jenis kelamin tersebut disapa. Terjemahan alternatif: "saudara-saudara seiman" +1:3 ezaf rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns καθὼς ἄξιόν ἐστιν 1 Jika sulit untuk mengungkapkan **seperti yang seharusnya** dalam bahasa Anda atau jika tidak jelas apa yang dimaksud, pertimbangkan untuk memulai kalimat baru di sini untuk menyatakannya dengan jelas. Terjemahan alternatif: "Ketika kami mengucap syukur kepada-Mu, kami melakukan hal yang benar" atau "Mengucap syukur kepada-Mu adalah hal yang benar untuk kami lakukan" atau "& adalah hal yang benar untuk dilakukan" +1:3 emu9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὑπεραυξάνει ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν 1 Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan kata benda abstrak untuk gagasan di balik *keimanan**, Anda dapat mengekspresikan gagasan ini sebagai kata kerja. Terjemahan alternatif: "Anda semakin percaya kepada Kristus" atau "Anda menjadi semakin percaya kepada Kristus" atau "Anda semakin mengandalkan Kristus setiap hari" +1:3 xy7k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πλεονάζει ἡ ἀγάπη ἑνὸς ἑκάστου, πάντων ὑμῶν, εἰς ἀλλήλους 1 Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan kata benda abstrak untuk ide di balik **cinta**, Anda dapat mengekspresikan ide ini sebagai kata kerja. Terjemahan alternatif: " Masing-masing dari kalian dengan tulus saling mengasihi satu sama lain" +1:3 bmn6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns ἀλλήλους 1 Di sini, **satu sama lain** berarti sesama orang percaya. Terjemahan alternatif: " satu dengan yang lain" atau "setiap orang percaya" +1:4 kx1n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτοὺς ἡμᾶς 1 Di sini, **kami** ditambahkan pada kata **kita** untuk menekankan bahwa bahkan rasul Paulus dan rekan-rekannya pun membanggakan jemaat di Tesalonika. Terjemahan alternatif: "bahkan kami" atau "kami adalah orang-orang yang" +1:4 gcth rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς ὑπομονῆς ὑμῶν, καὶ πίστεως 1 Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan kata benda abstrak untuk gagasan **ketahanan** dan **iman** atau jika tidak jelas bagaimana kedua istilah ini berhubungan, Anda dapat mengekspresikan gagasan yang sama dengan cara lain. Terjemahan alternatif: "bagaimana Anda dengan sabar terus percaya kepada Yesus" atau "bagaimana Anda bertekun dalam percaya kepada Tuhan" +1:4 qlo9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς διωγμοῖς ὑμῶν, καὶ ταῖς θλίψεσιν 1 Dua kata **penganiayaan** dan **penderitaan** mengatakan hal yang sangat mirip. Pengulangan ini digunakan untuk menekankan betapa sulitnya kehidupan jemaat di Tesalonika. Jika dua kata tersebut sulit ditemukan dalam bahasa Anda atau jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan pengulangan dengan cara ini, Anda dapat menggunakan satu kata dengan arti ini dan memberikan penekanan dengan cara lain. Terjemahan alternatif: "karena kamu telah mengalami masa-masa yang sangat sulit ini" atau "karena orang-orang membuat kamu menderita dalam segala hal" +1:4 md0d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πίστεως ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς διωγμοῖς ὑμῶν 1 Di sini, **bertekuntlah dalam segala penganiayaan** tidak berarti percaya atau mempercayai penganiayaan. Jika pembaca Anda mungkin bingung dengan hal itu, Anda dapat mengungkapkannya dengan lebih jelas. Terjemahan alternatif: "beriman kepada Yesus Kristus selama kamu dianiaya" +1:5 rs3b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔνδειγμα τῆς δικαίας κρίσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ, εἰς τὸ καταξιωθῆναι ὑμᾶς 1 Bukti yang Paulus maksudkan di sini adalah ketekunan jemaat Tesalonika yang setia ketika mengalami penganiayaan, yang ia sebutkan dalam ayat 4. Jika akan membantu pembaca Anda, Anda dapat menyatakannya secara jelas. Mungkin juga akan sangat membantu jika Anda memulai kalimat baru di sini. Terjemahan alternatif: "Ketekunanmu dalam penderitaan adalah indikasi yang jelas dari penghakiman Allah yang adil, bahwa Ia menganggapmu layak" atau "Kesetiaanmu dalam menghadapi penganiayaan menunjukkan bahwa Allah itu adil dan benar untuk menganggapmu layak" +1:5 dad9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἰς τὸ καταξιωθῆναι ὑμᾶς τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Anda dapat menyatakan ini dalam bentuk aktif. Terjemahan alternatif: "bahwa Allah akan menganggapmu layak untuk menjadi bagian dari kerajaan-Nya" +1:5 xm2g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὑπὲρ ἧς καὶ πάσχετε 1 Di sini, **juga** dapat berarti: (1) jemaat di Tesalonika menderita demi kerajaan Allah dan juga dianggap layak untuk itu. Terjemahan alternatif: "menjadi bagian daripadanya, yang juga menjadi alasan mengapa kamu menderita" (2) jemaat di Tesalonika menderita bersama dengan orang-orang percaya lainnya. Terjemahan alternatif: "itulah sebabnya kamu mengalami penderitaan bersama dengan banyak orang lain" +1:6 cxx1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴπερ δίκαιον παρὰ Θεῷ 1 Paulus berbicara seolah-olah ini adalah sebuah kemungkinan hipotetis, tetapi yang ia maksudkan adalah bahwa hal ini adalah benar. Jika bahasa Anda tidak menyatakan sesuatu sebagai suatu kondisi apakah itu pasti atau benar, dan jika pembaca Anda mungkin berpikir bahwa apa yang Paulus katakan tidak pasti, maka Anda dapat menerjemahkan kata-katanya sebagai pernyataan yang pasti. Terjemahan alternatif: "Karena kamu tahu, bahwa Allah itu adil" atau "karena Allah pasti benar" +1:6 id3i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor παρὰ Θεῷ, ἀνταποδοῦναι τοῖς θλίβουσιν ὑμᾶς θλῖψιν 1 Di sini, **membalas** berarti membuat seseorang mengalami hal yang sama seperti yang mereka lakukan pada orang lain, seolah-olah tindakan yang sama memantul kembali pada orang yang melakukan tindakan tersebut. Gunakan ekspresi yang alami untuk tindakan timbal balik semacam ini. Terjemahan alternatif: "agar Allah menimpakan penderitaan kepada mereka yang menimpakan penderitaan kepadamu" atau "agar Allah membalas mereka yang menimpakan penderitaan kepadamu" "agar Allah melakukan hal yang sama kepada mereka yang menimpakan penderitaan kepadamu" +1:6 zemk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀνταποδοῦναι τοῖς θλίβουσιν ὑμᾶς θλῖψιν 1 Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan kata benda abstrak untuk konsep **penderitaan**, Anda dapat mengekspresikan konsep yang sama dengan cara lain. Terjemahan alternatif: "menyengsarakan mereka yang menyengsarakanmu" atau "menyusahkan mereka yang menyusahkanmu" +1:7 hxy2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καὶ ὑμῖν & ἄνεσιν 1 Kata-kata "dan kelegaan bagimu" melanjutkan penjelasan tentang apa yang benar dari Allah untuk "mengembalikan" manusia (ayat 6). Jika hal ini tidak dapat dipahami dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat menyediakan kata-kata ini dari konteksnya. Terjemahan alternatif: "dan adalah benar bagi Allah untuk memberikan kelegaan kepadamu" +1:7 l3ht rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns καὶ ὑμῖν τοῖς θλιβομένοις, ἄνεσιν μεθ’ ἡμῶν 1 Di sini, **kamu yang sedang menderita** mengacu kepada jemaat Tesalonika, dan **kami** mengacu kepada Paulus dan rekan-rekannya. Orang lain menimpa kedua kelompok ini karena iman mereka kepada Yesus. Terjemahan alternatif: "dan kelegaan bagi kamu yang sedang menderita, sama seperti kami yang sedang menderita" +1:7 knbb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὑμῖν & ἄνεσιν 1 Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan kata benda abstrak untuk ide di balik **kelegaan**, Anda dapat mengekspresikan ide ini dengan kata kerja atau dengan cara lain. Terjemahan alternatif: "untuk meringankan bebanmu" atau "untuk menyelamatkanmu" +1:7 bcxy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τοῖς θλιβομένοις 1 Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan bentuk pasif seperti ini, Anda dapat menyatakannya dalam bentuk aktif atau dengan cara lain yang wajar dalam bahasa Anda. Terjemahan alternatif: "yang ditindas oleh orang lain" atau "dari penderitaan yang ditimbulkan oleh orang lain kepadamu" +1:7 fh5g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῇ ἀποκαλύψει τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 Di sini, **pada saat penyingkapan** adalah sebuah indikasi waktu ketika orang-orang percaya yang menderita akan mendapatkan kelegaan dari penderitaan mereka. Terjemahan alternatif: "pada waktu Tuhan Yesus menyatakan diri" atau "ketika semua orang melihat Tuhan Yesus datang" +1:8 p1ie rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns διδόντος ἐκδίκησιν τοῖς 1 Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan kata benda abstrak untuk ide di balik **pembalasan**, Anda dapat mengekspresikan konsep ini dengan cara lain. Karena ini adalah bagian dari keadilan Allah, jangan gunakan kata yang menyiratkan bahwa Allah melakukan sesuatu yang ilegal atau tidak pantas. Terjemahan alternatif: "menghukum orang-orang" atau "menghakimi orang-orang" +1:8 ynt4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῖς μὴ εἰδόσι Θεὸν 1 Di sini, **orang-orang yang tidak mengenal Allah** merujuk kepada mereka yang telah menolak hubungan dengan Allah yang telah Ia tawarkan kepada mereka. Terjemahan alternatif: "pada mereka yang tidak mau mengenal Allah" atau "pada mereka yang telah menolak Allah" +1:8 gv0v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ τοῖς μὴ ὑπακούουσιν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ 1 Frasa "tidak menaati Injil" dapat merujuk kepada: (1) orang-orang yang sama dengan **mereka yang tidak mengenal Allah**. Terjemahan alternatif: "dan yang tidak menaati Injil" (2) suatu kelompok yang terpisah. Terjemahan alternatif: "dan juga pada mereka yang tidak menaati Injil" +1:8 m37v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὑπακούουσιν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ 1 Frasa "taat kepada Injil" adalah sebuah ungkapan yang berarti hidup sesuai dengan segala sesuatu yang Allah katakan kepada kita dalam berita Injil. Terjemahan alternatif: "hidup sesuai dengan berita Injil" atau "mengindahkan nasihat yang merupakan bagian dari berita Injil" +1:8 dkkx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ 1 Di sini, Paulus menggunakan bentuk kepemilikan umum **Tuhan kita Yesus** untuk menggambarkan **Injil**. Makna spesifiknya di sini adalah bahwa Injil adalah tentang Yesus. Terjemahan alternatif: "Injil yang adalah tentang Tuhan kita Yesus" atau "berita Injil yang menceritakan tentang Tuhan kita Yesus" +1:9 plw5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οἵτινες δίκην τίσουσιν 1 Di sini, **siapa** merujuk kepada orang-orang yang tidak menaati Injil, bukan kepada Tuhan Yesus. Anda dapat memilih untuk memulai kalimat baru di sini. Terjemahan alternatif: "Orang-orang itu akan membayar hukuman" +1:9 peog rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οἵτινες δίκην τίσουσιν 1 Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan kata benda abstrak untuk ide kata **penalti**, Anda dapat mengekspresikan ide yang sama dengan cara lain. Terjemahan alternatif: "yang akan dihukum oleh Allah" atau "yang akan dihukum oleh Allah" +1:9 ebf1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom δίκην τίσουσιν 1 Di sini, frasa **menanggung konsekuensi** adalah sebuah idiom yang berarti menderita akibat melakukan sesuatu yang buruk. Jika pembaca Anda tidak memahami hal ini, Anda dapat menggunakan idiom yang setara atau menggunakan bahasa yang lebih sederhana. Terjemahan alternatif: "akan menanggung akibatnya" atau "akan menjalani pembalasan" +1:9 yruv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὄλεθρον αἰώνιον 1 Di sini, **kehancuran kekal** lebih jauh menggambarkan **hukuman** yang akan dialami orang-orang yang menolak untuk "menaati Injil." Kehancuran yang akan dialami oleh orang-orang ini bersifat "kekal", artinya, tidak akan pernah berakhir. Oleh karena itu, jangan diterjemahkan dengan arti bahwa orang-orang ini akan lenyap. Mereka akan terus ada, tetapi terus mengalami kehancuran dalam hidup mereka. Jika perlu, cantumkan informasi ini dalam catatan kaki. Terjemahan alternatif: "Allah akan menghukum mereka untuk selama-lamanya" +1:9 qhta rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Di sini, **wajah Tuhan** adalah sebuah ungkapan yang berarti kehadiran Tuhan. Terjemahan alternatif: "jauh dari Tuhan Yesus" atau "terpisah dari hadirat Tuhan Yesus" +1:9 htqg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῆς δόξης τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ 1 Di sini, bentuk posesif menggambarkan **kekuatan** yang memiliki **kemuliaan**. Jika hal ini tidak jelas dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat menggunakan kata sifat "mulia" untuk mendeskripsikan **kekuatan** tersebut. Terjemahan alternatif: "kekuatannya yang mulia" +1:9 wmdm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς δόξης τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ 1 Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan kata benda abstrak untuk konsep **kemuliaan** dan **kekuatan**, Anda dapat mengekspresikan ide yang sama dengan cara lain. Terjemahan alternatif: "mengalami betapa agung dan berkuasanya Dia" +1:10 ugk9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὅταν ἔλθῃ & ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἐκείνῃ 1 Di sini, **hari itu** adalah hari di mana Yesus akan datang kembali ke dunia. Jika itu akan membantu pembaca Anda, Anda dapat mengungkapkannya secara eksplisit. Terjemahan alternatif: "pada hari ketika Yesus datang kembali ke dunia" +1:10 bi2u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐνδοξασθῆναι ἐν τοῖς ἁγίοις αὐτοῦ, καὶ θαυμασθῆναι ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς πιστεύσασιν 1 Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan bentuk pasif seperti ini, Anda dapat menyatakannya dalam bentuk aktif atau dengan cara lain yang wajar dalam bahasa Anda. Terjemahan alternatif: "sebagaimana orang-orang kudus-Nya memuliakan Dia dan semua orang yang percaya kagum kepada-Nya" +1:10 wsvb rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἐνδοξασθῆναι ἐν τοῖς ἁγίοις αὐτοῦ, καὶ θαυμασθῆναι 1 Di sini, dua kata kerja **dimuliakan** dan **kagum** menunjukkan hasil dari kedatangan Yesus, bukan tujuannya. Gunakan kata penghubung di sini yang menunjukkan hasil. Terjemahan alternatif: "sebagaimana orang-orang kudus-Nya memuliakan Dia dan semua orang yang telah percaya kagum kepada-Nya" atau "dengan hasil bahwa orang-orang kudus-Nya akan memuliakan Dia dan semua orang yang telah percaya akan kagum kepada-Nya" +1:10 z1hg ἐνδοξασθῆναι ἐν τοῖς ἁγίοις αὐτοῦ, καὶ θαυμασθῆναι ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς πιστεύσασιν 1 **Orang-orang kudus** dan **orang-orang yang beriman** adalah satu kelompok orang, bukan dua. Jika pembaca Anda mungkin bingung dengan hal ini, Anda dapat menggabungkannya menjadi satu frasa. Terjemahan alternatif: "sehingga semua orang kudus-Nya, yaitu orang-orang yang percaya, akan memuliakan Dia dan kagum kepada-Nya" atau "sebagaimana semua umat-Nya memuliakan Dia dan kagum kepada-Nya" +1:10 e56p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐπιστεύθη τὸ μαρτύριον ἡμῶν ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς 1 Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan bentuk pasif seperti ini, Anda dapat menyatakannya dalam bentuk aktif atau dengan cara lain yang wajar dalam bahasa Anda. Terjemahan alternatif: " amu telah percaya pada kesaksian kami ketika kami membagikannya kepadamu" atau "ketika kami bersaksi tentang kuasa penyelamatan Yesus Kristus, kamu telah mempercayai apa yang kami katakan" +1:11 zy14 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς ὃ 1 Di sini, **Untuk itu** menghubungkan ayat 11 dengan ayat 10, sehingga ayat 11 memberikan cara atau metode (doa untuk jemaat Tesalonika) untuk mencapai tujuan yang baru saja dijelaskan oleh ayat 10 (supaya Yesus "dipermuliakan... dan dikagumi"). Gunakan cara yang alami dalam bahasa Anda untuk memperkenalkan hubungan ini. Terjemahan alternatif: "Inilah sebabnya" atau "Untuk tujuan ini" +1:11 ik19 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole καὶ προσευχόμεθα πάντοτε περὶ ὑμῶν 1 Paulus menggunakan kata **selalu** sebagai ungkapan yang berlebihan untuk menekankan betapa seringnya ia berdoa bagi mereka. Jika itu akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat menggunakan ungkapan yang setara dalam bahasa Anda. Terjemahan alternatif: "kami juga berdoa secara teratur untuk kamu" atau "kami terus berdoa untuk kamu" +1:11 hiv9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῆς κλήσεως 1 Di sini, **memanggil** merujuk kepada Allah yang menunjuk atau memilih orang-orang untuk menjadi milik-Nya dan untuk memberitakan pesan keselamatan-Nya melalui Yesus. Terjemahan alternatif: "menunjuk kamu untuk menjadi milik-Nya" +1:11 r8gk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πληρώσῃ πᾶσαν εὐδοκίαν ἀγαθωσύνης, καὶ ἔργον πίστεως ἐν δυνάμει 1 Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan kata benda abstrak untuk konsep-konsep seperti **keinginan**, **kebaikan**, **keyakinan**, dan **kekuatan**, Anda dapat mengekspresikannya dengan cara lain. Terjemahan alternatif: "Ia dapat membuat Anda mampu melakukan semua hal baik yang ingin Anda lakukan karena Anda percaya kepada Yesus dan karena Allah berkuasa" atau "Ia dapat memberi Anda kekuatan untuk bertindak berdasarkan apa yang Anda percayai untuk melakukan hal-hal yang baik dalam segala hal yang Anda inginkan, karena Allah berkuasa" +1:11 c7o6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καὶ πληρώσῃ 1 Di sini, **dan Ia dapat menggenapi** menambahkan alasan lain mengapa Paulus dan rekan-rekannya **selalu berdoa** untuk jemaat di Tesalonika. Bagian kalimat ini mengasumsikan beberapa kata dari kalimat sebelumnya. Jika hal ini akan disalahpahami dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat memberikan kata-kata ini dari bagian awal kalimat. Terjemahan alternatif: "dan kami juga berdoa supaya Ia mengabulkannya" +1:12 nvth rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ὅπως 1 Di sini, **sehingga** memperkenalkan tujuan Paulus dan rekan-rekannya mendoakan semua hal yang disebutkan dalam ayat 11. Ini adalah pengulangan dari tujuan yang sama yang diberikan dalam ayat 10, dengan menggunakan kata-kata yang serupa. Terjemahan alternatif: "dan kami juga berdoa supaya" +1:12 c6ec rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ 1 Di sini, **nama Tuhan Yesus** berarti pribadi Tuhan Yesus. Jika pembaca Anda tidak memahami hal ini, Anda dapat menggunakan ungkapan yang setara atau bahasa yang lebih sederhana. Terjemahan alternatif: " nama baik Tuhan Yesus kita" atau "Tuhan Yesus kita" +1:12 q994 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὅπως ἐνδοξασθῇ τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ, ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan bentuk pasif seperti ini, Anda bisa menyatakannya dalam bentuk aktif atau dengan cara lain yang wajar dalam bahasa Anda. Ini bisa berarti: (1) orang-orang percaya di Tesalonika akan memuliakan Yesus. Terjemahan alternatif: "supaya kamu memuliakan nama Tuhan Yesus" (2) orang lain akan memuliakan Yesus karena apa yang telah Ia lakukan bagi jemaat Tesalonika. Terjemahan alternatif: "supaya orang-orang memuliakan nama Tuhan kita Yesus karena kamu" +1:12 pg2i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐν αὐτῷ 1 Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan bentuk pasif seperti ini, Anda dapat menyatakannya dalam bentuk aktif atau dengan cara lain yang wajar dalam bahasa Anda. Terjemahan alternatif: "dan Yesus akan memuliakan kamu" +1:12 l4l1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐν αὐτῷ 1 Frasa **dan kamu di dalam dia** menghilangkan beberapa kata yang dibutuhkan oleh sebuah kalimat dalam banyak bahasa untuk melengkapi kalimat tersebut. Jika hal ini akan disalahpahami dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat membuat kalimat yang lengkap dengan menyediakan kata-kata ini dari awal kalimat. Terjemahan alternatif: "dan supaya kamu dipermuliakan di dalam Dia" atau "dan supaya Dia mempermuliakan kamu" +1:12 z8k9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns κατὰ τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν 1 Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan kata benda abstrak untuk konsep **anugerah**, Anda dapat mengekspresikan konsep yang sama dengan cara lain. Terjemahan alternatif: "sesuai dengan betapa besar kebaikan Allah kita dan Tuhan Yesus Kristus kepadamu" atau "sebagaimana Allah kita dan Tuhan Yesus Kristus terus memberkati kamu dengan berlimpah" +1:12 z1my τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Frasa yang diterjemahkan sebagai **Allah kita dan Tuhan Yesus Kristus** dapat merujuk kepada: (1) dua pribadi dari Trinitas, Allah Bapa dan Yesus Anak. (2) satu pribadi, Yesus, yang adalah Allah dan Tuhan. Terjemahan alternatif: "dari Allah dan Tuhan kita, Yesus Kristus" +2:intro jq9r 0 # 2 Tesalonika 2 Catatan Umum\n\n## Beberapa Konsep Khusus dalam Pasal ini\n\n### Manusia durhaka\n\nOrang ini juga disebut "anak kebinasaan" dan "si pendurhaka" dalam pasal ini. Dia bukan Iblis, tetapi dia diberi kuasa oleh Iblis dan merupakan pemimpin dari mereka yang melakukan pekerjaan jahat Iblis di dunia pada akhir zaman. Dia tentu saja salah satu dari "antikristus" yang disebutkan oleh Yohanes (1 Yohanes 2:18) dan mungkin yang terakhir, yang digambarkan sebagai binatang buas dalam Wahyu 13. (Lihat: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/antikristus]])\n\n### Duduk di bait Allah\n\nPaulus bisa jadi merujuk kepada Bait Allah di Yerusalem yang dihancurkan oleh bangsa Romawi beberapa tahun setelah ia menulis surat ini. Atau bisa juga ia merujuk kepada bait suci fisik di masa depan, atau kepada gereja sebagai bait suci rohani Allah. (Lihat: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explisit]]) +2:1 r36t rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings 0 # Informasi Umum:\r\n\r\nDalam ayat 1-12, Paulus menasihati orang-orang percaya agar tidak tertipu tentang hari kedatangan Yesus kembali dan memperingatkan mereka tentang kedatangan manusia durhaka. Judul untuk bagian ini bisa berupa, "Manusia durhaka" atau "Penyesatan sebelum Yesus datang kembali." +2:1 q1uq rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Kata yang diterjemahkan **Sekarang** menandai perubahan topik. Anda dapat menggunakan cara alami dalam bahasa Anda untuk menunjukkan bahwa ini adalah bagian baru dengan topik yang berbeda dari bagian sebelumnya. +2:1 uy4z rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ὑπὲρ τῆς παρουσίας τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ ἡμῶν ἐπισυναγωγῆς ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 Kedatangan Tuhan kita Yesus Kristus dan pertemuan kita dengan-Nya adalah dua tindakan yang terjadi pada saat yang sama. Anda dapat memperjelas hal ini dalam terjemahan Anda dengan kata atau frasa penghubung yang tepat. Terjemahan alternatif: "tentang waktu kedatangan Tuhan kita Yesus, apabila kita dikumpulkan bersama-sama dengan Dia" +2:1 sx2f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὑπὲρ τῆς παρουσίας τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ ἡμῶν ἐπισυναγωγῆς ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 Jika lebih alami dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat menggunakan kata kerja aktif untuk peristiwa **datang** dan **berkumpul**. Terjemahan alternatif: "tentang waktu Tuhan kita Yesus akan datang dan mengumpulkan kita kepada-Nya" +2:1 cvg5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Di sini, **saudara-saudara** berarti sesama orang Kristen, termasuk pria dan wanita. Terjemahan alternatif: "saudara-saudari seiman" +2:2 b8b2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives εἰς τὸ μὴ ταχέως σαλευθῆναι ὑμᾶς ἀπὸ τοῦ νοὸς 1 Frasa **terguncang dalam pikiran Anda** mengacu pada pikiran seseorang yang tidak tenang. Anda juga dapat mengungkapkan hal ini secara positif. Terjemahan alternatif: "agar Anda tetap teguh dalam pemikiran Anda" +2:2 fj52 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives μηδὲ θροεῖσθαι 1 Frasa **terganggu** mengacu pada emosi seseorang yang tidak tenang. Anda juga dapat mengungkapkannya secara positif. Terjemahan alternatif: "dan tetaplah tenang ketika menerima sebuah berita" atau "tetaplah tenang ketika mendengar sesuatu" +2:2 d334 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis μήτε διὰ πνεύματος, μήτε διὰ λόγου, μήτε δι’ ἐπιστολῆς, ὡς δι’ ἡμῶν 1 Paulus meninggalkan beberapa kata di sini yang mungkin diperlukan dalam bahasa Anda. Jika itu membantu, Anda dapat menyediakan kata-kata ini. Terjemahan alternatif: "ketika kamu menerima pesan baik melalui roh atau melalui perkataan yang diucapkan atau melalui surat tertulis yang seolah-olah berasal dari kami" +2:2 ll80 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὡς δι’ ἡμῶν 1 Paulus meninggalkan beberapa kata di sini yang mungkin diperlukan dalam bahasa Anda. Jika itu membantu, Anda dapat menyediakan kata-kata ini. Terjemahan alternatif: "yang mengaku berasal dari kami" atau "berusaha menipu kamu bahwa itu berasal dari kami" +2:2 k4dk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὡς ὅτι 1 Paulus meninggalkan beberapa kata di sini yang mungkin diperlukan dalam bahasa Anda. Jika itu membantu, Anda dapat menyediakan kata-kata ini. Terjemahan alternatif: "yang berbicara seolah-olah" atau "yang secara keliru mengklaim bahwa" +2:2 ib6m ἡ ἡμέρα τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Di sini, **hari Tuhan** mengacu pada waktu ketika Yesus akan datang kembali ke bumi untuk semua orang percaya. +2:3 l9c5 μή τις ὑμᾶς ἐξαπατήσῃ κατὰ μηδένα τρόπον 1 Terjemahan alternatif: "Jangan biarkan siapa pun membodohi kamu" atau "Jangan percaya sama sekali dengan kata-kata yang salah yang dikatakan orang tentang hal ini" +2:3 ej66 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὅτι ἐὰν μὴ ἔλθῃ ἡ ἀποστασία πρῶτον 1 Di sini, Paulus meninggalkan beberapa kata yang dibutuhkan oleh sebuah kalimat dalam banyak bahasa untuk menjadi lengkap. Jika itu akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat menyediakan kata-kata ini dari ayat sebelumnya. Terjemahan alternatif: "karena hari Tuhan tidak akan datang sebelum kemurtadan terjadi terlebih dahulu" +2:3 y7ch rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ ἀποστασία 1 Di sini, **kemurtadan** mengacu pada masa depan ketika banyak orang akan berpaling dari Allah. Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan kata benda abstrak untuk konsep ini, Anda dapat mengungkapkannya dengan cara lain. Terjemahan alternatif: "waktu ketika banyak orang akan memberontak terhadap Allah" +2:3 e86v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀποκαλυφθῇ ὁ ἄνθρωπος τῆς ἀνομίας 1 Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan bentuk pasif dengan cara ini, Anda dapat mengekspresikan konsep tersebut dalam bentuk aktif atau dengan cara lain yang wajar dalam bahasa Anda. Terjemahan alternatif: "orang durhaka itu datang" atau "orang durhaka itu menyatakan dirinya" +2:3 jsyj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ὁ ἄνθρωπος τῆς ἀνομίας 1 Paulus menggunakan bentuk posesif untuk menggambarkan seorang **manusia** yang dicirikan oleh **ketidaktaatan**. Dengan ini Paulus bermaksud bahwa orang ini akan menentang semua perintah dan petunjuk Allah. Jika hal ini tidak jelas dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat mengungkapkannya dengan cara lain. Terjemahan alternatif: "orang durhaka" atau "orang yang menentang pemerintahan Allah" +2:3 tkg9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀπωλείας 1 Di sini, **anak kebinasaan** adalah sebuah ungkapan yang berarti seseorang yang ditakdirkan untuk dihancurkan. Terjemahan alternatif: "orang yang akan dihancurkan" atau "orang yang akan dibinasakan oleh Allah" +2:3 x6p0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-events ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀπωλείας 1 Allah akan membinasakan orang ini beberapa waktu setelah peristiwa-peristiwa di ayat 4. Jika hal ini akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, pertimbangkanlah untuk memindahkan frasa ini ke akhir ayat 4. +2:4 t485 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πάντα λεγόμενον θεὸν ἢ σέβασμα 1 Anda dapat menyatakan ini dalam bentuk aktif. Terjemahan alternatif: "segala sesuatu yang disebut Allah atau apa pun yang mereka sembah" +2:4 sk8t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture αὐτὸν & καθίσαι 1 Di sini, **dia sendiri duduk** adalah bagian dari deskripsi jenis hal yang dilakukan orang tersebut. Jika dalam bahasa Anda membingungkan untuk menggunakan bentuk waktu sekarang untuk hal ini, Anda dapat menggunakan bentuk waktu yang akan datang, karena hal ini akan terjadi di masa depan. Terjemahan alternatif: "Dia sendiri akan duduk" +2:4 wj33 ἀποδεικνύντα ἑαυτὸν ὅτι ἔστιν Θεός 1 Di sini, **menunjukkan bahwa dirinya adalah Allah** tidak berarti bahwa orang ini adalah Allah, tetapi hanya bahwa dia menunjukkan dirinya kepada dunia seolah-olah dia adalah Allah. Terjemahan alternatif: "menunjukkan dirinya sebagai Allah" atau "berusaha menunjukkan kepada orang-orang bahwa dia sendiri adalah Allah" +2:5 rsz1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὐ μνημονεύετε ὅτι, ἔτι ὢν πρὸς ὑμᾶς, ταῦτα ἔλεγον ὑμῖν 1 Paulus tidak meminta informasi di sini, tetapi menggunakan bentuk pertanyaan untuk mengingatkan jemaat Tesalonika akan apa yang telah ia ajarkan kepada mereka. Jika Anda tidak menggunakan pertanyaan retoris untuk tujuan ini dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat menerjemahkan kata-katanya sebagai sebuah pernyataan. Lihat UST. +2:5 lkk7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ταῦτα 1 Di sini, **hal-hal ini** mengacu pada topik-topik yang Paulus sebutkan dalam ayat 3 dan 4, termasuk pemberontakan terhadap Allah, manusia durhaka, dan kembalinya Yesus pada hari Tuhan. +2:6 hph0 καὶ νῦν τὸ κατέχον οἴδατε 1 Ada dua kemungkinan untuk memahami fungsi kata **sekarang** di sini. (1) Kata ini berhubungan dengan **yang menahannya**. Terjemahan alternatif: "Dan kamu tahu apa yang menahannya sekarang" atau (2) kata ini bisa juga berarti **kamu tahu**. Terjemahan alternatif: "Dan sekarang kamu tahu apa yang menahannya" +2:6 ask4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὸ ἀποκαλυφθῆναι αὐτὸν ἐν τῷ αὐτοῦ καιρῷ 1 Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan bentuk pasif dengan cara ini, Anda dapat mengekspresikan konsep tersebut dalam bentuk aktif atau dengan cara lain yang wajar dalam bahasa Anda. Terjemahan alternatif: "waktu yang tepat, ketika Allah mengizinkan Dia menyatakan diri-Nya" +2:7 faa5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast γὰρ 1 Di sini, kata yang diterjemahkan **Sebab** berfungsi untuk menghubungkan kalimat ini sebagai kontras dari apa yang Paulus katakan tentang **kedurhakaan**, yang dimulai dari ayat 3. Sampai di sini, Paulus berbicara tentang kedurhakaan di masa depan, tetapi sekarang ia ingin menjelaskan bahwa orang-orang sudah menjadi durhaka, gunakanlah cara yang alami dalam bahasa Anda untuk memperkenalkan kontras ini. Terjemahan alternatif: "Sekarang" atau "Sebenarnya," +2:7 si9i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸ & μυστήριον ἤδη ἐνεργεῖται τῆς ἀνομίας 1 Di sini, " kedurhakaan" dicirikan sebagai "misteri" karena kita tidak dapat memahami mengapa orang memberontak terhadap perintah Allah yang bijaksana kecuali jika kita memahami tentang kekuatan-kekuatan spiritual yang sedang bekerja, seperti yang dijelaskan oleh Paulus di sini. Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan kata benda abstrak untuk menjelaskan konsep-konsep ini, Anda dapat mengungkapkannya dengan cara lain. Terjemahan alternatif: "manusia secara misterius telah memberontak terhadap Allah" atau "Iblis secara diam-diam telah memimpin manusia untuk menolak hukum-hukum Allah, seperti yang akan dilakukan oleh orang ini" +2:7 fcu7 ὁ κατέχων 1 Menahan seseorang berarti menghambat atau mencegahnya melakukan apa yang ingin ia lakukan. Terjemahan alternatif: "orang yang telah menahannya" +2:7 bijc rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns γένηται 1 Di sini, kata **dia** merujuk kepada orang yang menahan si pendurhaka. Jika hal ini tidak jelas bagi pembaca Anda, Anda dapat menyatakannya secara eksplisit. Terjemahan alternatif: "orang yang menahan orang durhaka bergerak" +2:7 tt88 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐκ μέσου γένηται 1 Di sini Paulus berbicara tentang orang yang menahan si pendurhaka seolah-olah ia berdiri di depannya dan menghalangi jalannya. Jika hal ini tidak masuk akal dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat menggunakan metafora yang setara atau Anda dapat mengekspresikan maknanya dengan cara yang tidak kiasan. Terjemahan alternatif: "dia berhenti menahannya" +2:8 hn67 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ τότε ἀποκαλυφθήσεται ὁ ἄνομος 1 Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan bentuk pasif seperti ini, Anda dapat menyatakannya dalam bentuk aktif atau dengan cara lain yang wajar dalam bahasa Anda. Terjemahan alternatif: "dan kemudian Allah akan mengizinkan si pendurhaka untuk menunjukkan dirinya" +2:8 vay9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῷ πνεύματι τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 Dalam kiasan ini, **nafas** melambangkan kuasa Allah dan **mulut** melambangkan perkataan Yesus. Jika pembaca Anda tidak akan memahami hal ini, Anda dapat menggunakan ungkapan yang setara atau bahasa yang sederhana. Terjemahan alternatif: "dengan kuasa firman yang diucapkan-Nya" +2:8 hy3y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἀνελεῖ τῷ πνεύματι τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ, καὶ καταργήσει τῇ ἐπιφανείᾳ τῆς παρουσίας αὐτοῦ 1 Kedua frasa ini menggambarkan peristiwa yang sama. Paulus mengatakan hal yang sama dua kali, dengan cara yang sedikit berbeda, untuk menekankan betapa jauh lebih berkuasanya Yesus dibandingkan dengan manusia durhaka. Jika membingungkan bagi pembaca Anda untuk berbicara tentang membunuh seseorang dan kemudian membuatnya tidak berdaya, Anda dapat membalik urutan frasa-frasa tersebut, seperti dalam UST, atau Anda dapat menggabungkan kedua frasa tersebut menjadi satu. Terjemahan alternatif: "akan menghancurkan dengan penampilannya yang mulia dan dengan nafas dari mulutnya" +2:9 sp9v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession οὗ ἐστιν ἡ παρουσία, κατ’ ἐνέργειαν τοῦ Σατανᾶ 1 Di sini, Paulus menggunakan bentuk posesif untuk menggambarkan **pekerjaan** yang **Setan** lakukan. Jika hal ini tidak jelas dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat menyatakannya secara eksplisit. Terjemahan alternatif: " Setan akan membawa orang ini dan akan bekerja melalui dia" +2:9 rikg οὗ 1 Di sini, **siapa** merujuk kembali kepada orang durhaka. Terjemahan alternatif: "orang yang tidak taat hukum" +2:9 bd5m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἐν πάσῃ δυνάμει, καὶ σημείοις, καὶ τέρασιν ψεύδους 1 Di sini, kata **semua** adalah hiperbola. Hal ini dapat diterapkan pada: (1) hanya **kekuatan**, dengan makna "banyak" atau "hebat". Terjemahan alternatif: "dengan kekuatan besar untuk melakukan tanda-tanda dan keajaiban-keajaiban palsu" atau (2) **kekuatan**, **tanda-tanda**, dan **keajaiban-keajaiban**, dengan arti "berbagai macam." Terjemahan alternatif: "dengan berbagai macam kuasa, tanda, dan mukjizat palsu" atau (3) kombinasi keduanya. Terjemahan alternatif: "dengan banyak kuasa untuk melakukan berbagai macam tanda dan keajaiban palsu" +2:9 kcaw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν πάσῃ δυνάμει, καὶ σημείοις, καὶ τέρασιν ψεύδους 1 Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan kata benda abstrak untuk konsep **kekuatan**, Anda dapat mengekspresikan konsep yang sama dengan cara lain. Terjemahan alternatif: "dengan tanda-tanda yang sangat kuat dan keajaiban-keajaiban palsu" atau "yang membuatnya sangat berkuasa untuk melakukan tanda-tanda dan keajaiban-keajaiban palsu" +2:9 fjfn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet καὶ σημείοις, καὶ τέρασιν ψεύδους 1 Kata **tanda-tanda** dan **keajaiban** sering muncul bersama dan pada dasarnya berarti hal yang sama. Pengulangan digunakan untuk menekankan betapa menakjubkannya mereka. Jika bahasa Anda tidak memiliki dua kata untuk hal ini atau tidak menggunakan pengulangan untuk melakukan hal ini, Anda dapat menggunakan satu kata dan memberikan penekanan dengan cara lain. Terjemahan alternatif: "dan mukjizat-mukjizat palsu yang menakjubkan" +2:10 tf75 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάσῃ 1 Di sini, **semua** adalah hiperbola dan dapat berarti: (1) "tingkat yang tinggi" atau (2) "berbagai jenis" +2:10 ippb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἐν πάσῃ ἀπάτῃ ἀδικίας 1 Di sini Paulus menggunakan bentuk posesif untuk menggambarkan **penipuan** yang dihasilkan dari **ketidakbenaran**. Jika hubungan kata-kata tersebut tidak jelas dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat mengungkapkannya secara lebih jelas. Terjemahan alternatif: "karena ia sangat tidak benar, ia akan sangat menipu" +2:10 b55e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν πάσῃ ἀπάτῃ ἀδικίας, τοῖς ἀπολλυμένοις 1 Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan kata benda abstrak untuk gagasan **penipuan** dan **ketidakbenaran**, Anda dapat mengekspresikan konsep yang sama dengan cara lain. Terjemahan alternatif: "karena ia sangat tidak benar, ia akan sepenuhnya menipu mereka yang akan binasa" +2:10 e8hi rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἀνθ’ ὧν 1 Apa yang terjadi setelah frasa ini adalah alasan mengapa orang-orang itu binasa. Gunakan cara yang alami dalam bahasa Anda untuk memperkenalkan alasan. Anda mungkin ingin memulai kalimat baru di sini dan mengakhiri kalimat sebelumnya dengan titik. Terjemahan alternatif: "Mereka binasa karena" +2:10 rtua rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀγάπην τῆς ἀληθείας οὐκ ἐδέξαντο 1 Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan kata benda abstrak untuk konsep **kasih** dan **kebenaran**, Anda dapat mengekspresikan konsep yang sama dengan cara lain. Selain itu, bahasa Anda mungkin lebih memilih ekspresi selain **kasih** untuk sesuatu yang tidak bersifat pribadi seperti **kebenaran**. Terjemahan alternatif: "mereka tidak mau menganggap berita yang benar tentang Yesus sebagai sesuatu yang penting" +2:10 sl5b rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result εἰς τὸ σωθῆναι αὐτούς 1 Frasa ini dapat mengungkapkan: (1) hasil dari menerima kasih kebenaran. Terjemahan alternatif: "dan dengan demikian diselamatkan" atau (2) tujuan dari mencintai kebenaran. Terjemahan alternatif: "sehingga mereka dapat diselamatkan" +2:10 xst1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἰς τὸ σωθῆναι αὐτούς 1 Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan bentuk pasif seperti ini, Anda dapat mengekspresikan konsep tersebut dalam bentuk aktif atau dengan cara lain yang wajar dalam bahasa Anda. Jika Anda harus menyatakan siapa yang melakukan tindakan itu, itu adalah Allah. Terjemahan alternatif: "agar Allah menyelamatkan mereka" atau " supaya Allah menyelamatkan mereka" +2:11 sj1v rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διὰ τοῦτο 1 Apa yang terjadi selanjutnya **karena hal ini** adalah akibat dari tindakan orang-orang yang "tidak menerima kasih kebenaran" dalam ayat 10. Gunakan kata penghubung yang menunjukkan bahwa apa yang dilakukan oleh orang-orang dalam ayat 10 adalah alasan dari apa yang terjadi setelahnya dalam ayat ini. Terjemahan alternatif: "karena alasan ini" atau "karena orang-orang itu tidak menerima kasih kebenaran" +2:11 en8e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πέμπει αὐτοῖς ὁ Θεὸς ἐνέργειαν πλάνης, εἰς τὸ πιστεῦσαι αὐτοὺς τῷ ψεύδει 1 Paulus berbicara tentang **Allah** yang mengizinkan sesuatu terjadi pada manusia seolah-olah Dia **mengirimkan** sesuatu kepada mereka. Terjemahan alternatif: "Allah membiarkan mereka berpikir salah sehingga mereka percaya kepada dusta si pendurhaka" +2:11 u7a0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἐνέργειαν πλάνης 1 Paulus menggunakan bentuk posesif untuk menggambarkan suatu **pekerjaan** yang ditandai dengan **kesalahan**. Ini berarti sesuatu yang bekerja untuk menghasilkan kesalahan di dalamnya. Terjemahan alternatif: "kemampuan untuk berpikir dengan cara yang salah" +2:11 nass rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς τὸ πιστεῦσαι αὐτοὺς 1 Di sini, kata kata**untuk** memperkenalkan klausa tujuan. Paulus sedang menyatakan tujuan Allah mengirimkan bagaimana **bekerjanya kesalahan**. Gunakan cara yang wajar dalam bahasa Anda untuk memperkenalkan klausa tujuan. Terjemahan alternatif: "supaya mereka menjadi percaya" +2:11 bkpm rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns εἰς τὸ πιστεῦσαι αὐτοὺς 1 Di sini, **mereka** merujuk kepada orang-orang yang "tidak menerima kasih kebenaran" dalam ayat 10. Jika hal ini mungkin membingungkan pembaca Anda, Anda dapat mengungkapkan maknanya secara eksplisit. Terjemahan alternatif: "supaya orang-orang ini menjadi percaya" atau "supaya orang-orang yang tidak menerima kasih kebenaran menjadi percaya" +2:12 x33k rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 Frasa ini memperkenalkan klausa tujuan. Ini mengikuti klausa tujuan dari ayat 11, jadi Anda mungkin ingin menghubungkan keduanya. Terjemahan alternatif: "dan lebih jauh lagi, sehingga" atau "dan karena itu" +2:12 d63e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive κριθῶσιν πάντες 1 Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan bentuk pasif seperti ini, Anda dapat mengekspresikan ide tersebut dalam bentuk aktif atau dengan cara lain yang alami dalam bahasa Anda. Jika Anda harus menyatakan siapa yang melakukan tindakan tersebut, itu adalah Allah. Terjemahan alternatif: "Allah dapat menghakimi mereka semua" +2:12 pkw8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οἱ 1 Di sini, **mereka** merujuk kembali kepada orang-orang yang Paulus gambarkan dengan istilah yang sama dalam ayat 10. Mereka adalah orang-orang yang sama yang "tidak menerima kasih kebenaran" dan malah menerima "tipu daya kefasikan." Anda mungkin ingin memulai kalimat baru di sini dan mengakhiri kalimat sebelumnya dengan tanda titik. Terjemahan alternatif: "Mereka adalah orang-orang itu" +2:12 m1cl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οἱ μὴ πιστεύσαντες τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, ἀλλὰ εὐδοκήσαντες τῇ ἀδικίᾳ 1 Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan kata benda abstrak untuk konsep **kebenaran** dan **ketidakbenaran**, Anda dapat mengekspresikan konsep yang sama dengan cara lain. Terjemahan alternatif: "mereka yang tidak percaya pesan yang benar tetapi senang melakukan hal-hal yang berdosa" atau "orang-orang yang telah menolak berita yang benar tentang Tuhan dan malah memilih untuk melakukan apa yang salah" +2:13 w83a rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings 0 # Informasi Umum:\r\n\r\nPaulus sekarang berganti topik. Jika Anda menggunakan bagian judul, Anda dapat meletakkannya di sini sebelum ayat 13. Judul yang disarankan: "Paulus mengucap syukur kepada Allah untuk orang-orang percaya dan menguatkan mereka." +2:13 b3hh δὲ 1 Kata yang diterjemahkan **Sekarang** menandai perubahan topik. Anda dapat menggunakan cara alami dalam bahasa Anda untuk mengindikasikan/menunjukkan bahwa ini adalah bagian baru dengan topik yang berbeda dari bagian sebelumnya. +2:13 dze5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἡμεῖς & ὀφείλομεν εὐχαριστεῖν & πάντοτε 1 Kata **selalu** adalah sebuah generalisasi. Ini digunakan untuk menekankan pentingnya tindakan tersebut. Jika ini tidak alami dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat menggunakan terjemahan alternatif yang diberikan. Terjemahan alternatif: "kita harus senantiasa mengucap syukur" atau "kita harus selalu bersyukur kepada Allah" +2:13 m418 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς & ὀφείλομεν 1 Di sini, **kami** merujuk pada tiga orang, yaitu Paulus, Silwanus, dan Timotius. Jika Anda memiliki kata ganti orang pertama yang eksklusif dan inklusif dalam bahasa Anda, ini seharusnya merupakan kata ganti eksklusif. +2:13 ia4x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀδελφοὶ ἠγαπημένοι ὑπὸ Κυρίου 1 Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan bentuk pasif seperti ini, Anda dapat mengatakannya dengan bentuk aktif. Terjemahan alternatif: "karena Tuhan mengasihimu, saudara-saudara" +2:13 v15j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοὶ 1 Di sini, **saudara-saudara** berarti sesama orang Kristen, termasuk pria dan wanita. Jika pembaca Anda memahami bahwa kata ini hanya ditujukan kepada laki-laki, Anda mungkin perlu menggunakan bentuk maskulin dan feminin dari kata tersebut dalam bahasa Anda. Jika Anda menggunakan kata nonfiguratif seperti "orang-orang percaya", pastikan bahwa kedua jenis kelamin tersebut disapa. Terjemahan alternatif: "saudara-saudara seiman" +2:13 l7a8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀπαρχὴν εἰς σωτηρίαν 1 Menjadi bagian dari orang-orang pertama yang diselamatkan dikatakan seolah-olah jemaat di Tesalonika adalah **buah sulung**. Terjemahan alternatif: "menjadi salah satu dari orang-orang pertama yang percaya" atau "menjadi sebagian dari orang-orang pertama yang diselamatkan Allah" +2:13 bpqn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀπαρχὴν εἰς σωτηρίαν ἐν ἁγιασμῷ Πνεύματος καὶ πίστει ἀληθείας 1 Jika itu akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat mengubah kata benda abstrak **keselamatan**, **pengudusan**, **kepercayaan**, dan **kebenaran** ke dalam bentuk verbal. Terjemahan alternatif: "menjadi bagian dari orang-orang pertama yang percaya kepada apa yang benar, dan yang telah diselamatkan dan dikhususkan Allah bagi diri-Nya sendiri oleh Roh-Nya" +2:14 e0gy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis διὰ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου ἡμῶν 1 Di sini, frasa **melalui Injil kami** tidak berarti bahwa Injil adalah milik Paulus dan teman-temannya. Frasa ini merujuk kepada Injil tentang Yesus yang diberitakan oleh Paulus dan teman-temannya. Terjemahan alternatif: "melalui Injil yang telah kami beritakan kepadamu" +2:14 thmh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς περιποίησιν δόξης τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Frasa **untuk memperoleh kemuliaan Tuhan kita Yesus Kristus** tidak berarti bahwa kita akan mengambil alih atau membagi-bagi kemuliaan Yesus Kristus. Itu berarti bahwa orang-orang percaya akan berbagi dalam kemuliaan Kristus. Terjemahan alternatif: "supaya kamu mendapat bagian dalam kemuliaan Tuhan kita Yesus Kristus" atau "supaya kamu beroleh kemuliaan seperti Tuhan kita Yesus Kristus" +2:14 pke7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς περιποίησιν δόξης τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν 1 Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan kata benda abstrak untuk konsep **kemuliaan**, Anda dapat mengekspresikan konsep yang sama dengan bentuk yang berbeda. Terjemahan alternatif: "supaya kamu menjadi mulia seperti Tuhan kita" +2:15 holv rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἄρα οὖν 1 Kata **Jadi, demikianlah** menghubungkan ayat ini dengan ayat 13 dan 14 sebagai kesimpulan logisnya. Karena Allah telah melakukan hal-hal yang ajaib dalam ayat-ayat tersebut, maka jemaat Tesalonika harus melakukan apa yang dikatakan dalam ayat 15. Gunakan cara yang alami untuk menyampaikan kesimpulan dalam bahasa Anda. Terjemahan alternatif: "Oleh karena itu" atau "Karena Allah telah melakukan semua itu untukmu" +2:15 pa9j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Di sini, **saudara-saudara** berarti sesama orang yang percaya kepada Yesus, termasuk pria dan wanita. Terjemahan alternatif: "saudara- saudari seiman" +2:15 u9ss rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor στήκετε 1 Di sini, frasa **berdiri teguh** digunakan untuk tidak mengubah keyakinan seseorang, melainkan tetap teguh pada apa yang diyakini. Jika hal ini tidak jelas dalam bahasa Anda, pertimbangkan untuk menggunakan ungkapan yang setara, atau gunakan bahasa yang sederhana. Terjemahan alternatif: "teruslah percaya pada kebenaran" atau "janganlah menyerah pada imanmu" +2:15 l4vr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κρατεῖτε τὰς παραδόσεις 1 Di sini, **tradisi** merujuk kepada kebenaran tentang Kristus yang diajarkan oleh Paulus dan para rasul lainnya. Paulus berbicara tentang mereka seolah-olah para pembacanya dapat memegangnya dengan tangan mereka. Terjemahan alternatif: "janganlah menyerah untuk mempercayai kebenaran-kebenaran itu" atau "teruslah percaya pada ajaran-ajaran yang benar" +2:15 cpdo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet στήκετε καὶ κρατεῖτε 1 Kedua frasa ini pada dasarnya memiliki arti yang sama. Pengulangan digunakan untuk menekankan pentingnya melakukan hal ini. Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan pengulangan untuk melakukan hal ini, Anda dapat menggunakan satu frasa dan memberikan penekanan dengan cara lain. Terjemahan alternatif: "tetaplah teguh pada pendirian" atau "jangan biarkan siapa pun mengubah pikiran Anda dengan cara apa pun tentang" +2:15 whp8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐδιδάχθητε 1 Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan bentuk pasif seperti ini, Anda dapat mengatakannya dengan bentuk aktif. Terjemahan alternatif: "kami telah mengajar kamu" +2:15 z2vs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche διὰ λόγου 1 Di sini, **dengan perkataan** adalah ungkapan yang berarti bahwa Paulus hadir bersama mereka dan mengajar mereka secara pribadi. Terjemahan alternatif: "dengan perkataan kami kepadamu secara langsung" atau "ketika kami berbicara denganmu." +2:15 jrg4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δι’ ἐπιστολῆς ἡμῶν 1 Anda dapat memperjelas informasi tersirat bahwa **yang dimaksud dengan surat kami** mengacu pada apa yang Paulus ajarkan kepada jemaat di Tesalonika dalam surat sebelumnya (mungkin 1 Tesalonika). Terjemahan alternatif: "melalui apa yang telah kami tuliskan kepadamu dalam sebuah surat" +2:16 g8m1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Kata yang diterjemahkan **Sekarang** menandai perubahan topik. Anda dapat menggunakan cara alami dalam bahasa Anda untuk menunjukkan bahwa ini adalah bagian baru dengan topik yang berbeda dari bagian sebelumnya. +2:16 njk1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing αὐτὸς δὲ ὁ Κύριος ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς ὁ Πατὴρ ἡμῶν 1 # Pernyataan Penghubung:\r\n\r\nPaulus mengakhiri bagian ini dengan sebuah ucapan berkat. Gunakanlah bentuk yang dapat dikenali orang sebagai berkat dalam bahasa Anda. Terjemahan alternatif: "Sekarang kiranya Tuhan kita Yesus Kristus sendiri dan Allah Bapa kita" atau "Kami berdoa agar Tuhan kita Yesus Kristus sendiri dan Allah Bapa kita" +2:16 yge9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν & ἡμῶν & ἡμᾶς 1 Kata **kami** dan **kita** merujuk kepada semua orang percaya termasuk para penulis. Jika Anda memiliki kata ganti orang pertama jamak yang eksklusif dan inklusif dalam bahasa Anda, kata ganti tersebut haruslah kata ganti inklusif. +2:16 cm54 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς & Κύριος ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς 1 Di sini, **Ia sendiri** memberikan penekanan tambahan pada frasa **Tuhan Yesus Kristus**. Gunakan cara yang wajar dalam bahasa Anda untuk menunjukkan penekanan ini. Terjemahan alternatif: "Tuhan kita Yesus Kristus, yang satu itu" +2:16 h3gk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δοὺς παράκλησιν αἰωνίαν, καὶ ἐλπίδα ἀγαθὴν 1 Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan kata benda abstrak untuk konsep **kenyamanan** dan **harapan**, Anda dapat mengekspresikan konsep yang sama dengan cara lain. Terjemahan alternatif: "selalu menghibur kami dan telah memberi kami hal-hal baik untuk diharapkan" +2:16 iirq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν χάριτι 1 Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan kata benda abstrak untuk konsep **anugerah**, Anda dapat mengekspresikan konsep yang sama dengan cara lain. Terjemahan alternatif: "karena betapa besar kasih karunia-Nya kepada kita" +2:17 x3rr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy παρακαλέσαι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας, καὶ στηρίξαι 1 Di sini, kata **hati** mewakili emosi dan kehendak seseorang. Jika **hati** tidak memiliki arti seperti ini dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat menggunakan ungkapan yang setara atau bahasa biasa. Terjemahan alternatif: "semoga Dia memberikan penghiburan dan kekuatan pada hatimu" atau "semoga Dia menghibur dan menguatkanmu" +2:17 yw5f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἐν παντὶ ἔργῳ καὶ λόγῳ ἀγαθῷ 1 Jika akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat mengungkapkan frasa **bekerja dan kata** dengan kata kerja. Terjemahan alternatif: "dalam setiap hal yang baik yang kamu lakukan dan katakan" atau "agar kamu dapat melakukan dan mengatakan segala sesuatu yang baik." +3:intro b8hk 0 # 2 Thessalonians 3 General Notes\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Idle and lazy persons\n\nIn Thessalonica, there apparently was a problem with people in the church who were able to work but refused to do so. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n\n### What should you do if your brother sins?\n\nIn this chapter, Paul teaches that Christians need to live in a way that honors God. Christians should also encourage one another and hold each other accountable for what they do. The church is also responsible for encouraging believers to repent if they sin. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]]) +3:1 k33i rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verses 1–5, Paul asks the believers to pray for him and his companions and encourages them. A heading for this section might be, “Pray for Us.” +3:1 jy75 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases τὸ λοιπὸν 1 Here, the word **Finally** marks a change in topic. To **pray** is not the final instruction that Paul gives but it is how Paul opens the last section of his letter where he will discuss a few remaining matters. Alternate translation: “One more thing” or “So, continuing on” +3:1 m1s5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” +3:1 v8k2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 The pronoun **us** refers to Paul and his companions. If you have exclusive and inclusive first person pronouns in your language, this should be an exclusive pronoun. +3:1 r54v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τρέχῃ 1 Paul speaks of God’s **word** spreading as if it were running from place to place. He is comparing the rapid spread of God’s word to a person who takes good news to others. Alternate translation: “might spread rapidly” or “might be heard by many people” +3:1 yvkm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ δοξάζηται 1 You can state this in active form, if the passive construction is not natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and that many people would honor it” +3:1 egho rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καθὼς καὶ πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 This phrase leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “just as also happened with you” or “which is exactly what you did” +3:2 xg2h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ῥυσθῶμεν 1 You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God may save us” or “God may rescue us” +3:2 h11p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἀτόπων καὶ πονηρῶν 1 The two terms **perverse** and **evil** mean basically the same thing and are used together to emphasize the amount of evil. If your language does not use repetition to do this or if you do not have two words for these attributes, you can use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “very wicked men” or “many wicked men” +3:2 p1ct rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes οὐ γὰρ πάντων ἡ πίστις 1 The phrase **not everyone** is a negative understatement that emphasizes how rare faith is. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “for only some people believe in the Lord” or “for people who believe in Jesus are few” +3:2 appf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ πίστις 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “believes in Jesus” +3:3 yx9g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὃς στηρίξει 1 The word **strengthen** here refers to spiritual strength, not physical strength. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “who will strengthen you spiritually” or “who will make you inwardly strong” +3:3 p91k τοῦ πονηροῦ 1 This could mean: (1) the evil being Satan. Alternate translation: “Satan” or (2) evil in general. Alternate translation: “evil” +3:4 xk85 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πεποίθαμεν δὲ 1 The phrase **We are also confident** may be confusing in some languages. If that is the case in your language, you could translate this as a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “We also have faith” or “We also trust” +3:4 w79e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πεποίθαμεν δὲ ἐν Κυρίῳ ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς 1 This could mean: (1) Paul has confidence in the Thessalonian believers because of the close relationship that they have with the Lord Jesus. In this case, Paul is speaking of this relationship as if they were inside the Lord Jesus. Alternative translation: “Because you are united to the Lord, we are also confident” (2) Paul has confidence in the Lord Jesus, that he will cause them to do what is right. Alternative translation: “Because we trust in the Lord Jesus to enable you, we are also confident” +3:5 giz4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ & Κύριος κατευθύναι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας εἰς τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **hearts** stands for a person’s thoughts or mind. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “may the Lord cause you to understand the love of God and the endurance of Christ” or “may the Lord help you to know the love of God and the endurance of Christ” +3:5 wre3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Paul speaks of God’s **love** and Christ’s **endurance** as if they were destinations on a path. If your readers would not understand this figure of speech, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “to know how much God loves you and the endurance that Christ supplies you” +3:5 dzbn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession εἰς τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **love of God** can mean (1) the love that comes from God. Alternate translation: “to know how much God loves you” or (2) the love that people give to God. Alternate translation: “to love God more” +3:5 ia7x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession εἰς τὴν ὑπομονὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **endurance of Christ** can mean (1) the endurance that Christ gives to his people. Alternate translation: “to experience the endurance that Christ gives you” or (2) the endurance that Christ had through his suffering. Alternate translation: “to know how much Christ has endured for you” +3:6 mst3 rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verses 6–15, Paul gives the believers some final instructions about working and not being idle. A heading for this section might be, “Believers Must Work.” +3:6 v33v rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section. +3:6 x9l8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί & ἀδελφοῦ 1 Here, the words **brothers** and **brother** refer to fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters … brother or sister” +3:6 y4a9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, **name** stands for the person of Jesus Christ. It can also mean “with the authority of.” If using this term is not clear in your language, you could express it directly. Alternate translation: “as if our Lord Jesus Christ himself were speaking” or “with the authority that our Lord Jesus Christ has given us” +3:6 jvw1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Here, **our** refers to all believers. If you have exclusive and inclusive first-person plural pronouns in your language, this should be an inclusive pronoun. +3:6 x2r8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀτάκτως περιπατοῦντος 1 Here Paul speaks of people who are not living well as if they walk in a haphazard manner. If your readers would not understand this metaphor, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternative translation: “who is living in a bad way” or “who is not living correctly” +3:6 se1g τὴν παράδοσιν 1 Here, **the traditions** refers to the teachings that the apostles received from Jesus and are passing along to all believers. Alternate translation: “the teachings” or “the instructions” +3:7 h222 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μιμεῖσθαι ἡμᾶς 1 The phrase **to imitate** may be a difficult word to translate in your language. In that case, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “to act the way that my fellow workers and I act” +3:7 b1i1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἠτακτήσαμεν ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Paul uses a double negative to emphasize the positive. If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “we lived among you as those who had much discipline” or “we worked diligently when we were with you” +3:8 ruh3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἄρτον 1 Paul refers to **bread** here because it was the most common and basic food for them. If your readers would not be familiar with **bread** or if that is a kind of food that would be considered unusual or extravagant, you could use a general expression for ordinary food. Alternate translation: “food” or “anything” +3:8 d9h1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας ἐργαζόμενοι 1 Here, **night and day** forms a merism, which means “all the time.” If it would be helpful in your language to explain that they did not work without taking any rest whatsoever, then you could make the meaning clear. Alternate translation: “working throughout that time with little rest” or “we worked almost continuously” +3:8 w8fq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἐν κόπῳ καὶ μόχθῳ 1 Here, **toil** and **hardship** have very similar meanings. Paul used this repetition to emphasize that they worked very hard. If you do not have two similar words that you can use here or if it would be unnatural for you to use such repetition, you could emphasize this in another way. Alternate translation: “with great effort” or “in very difficult circumstances” +3:9 sn3k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐχ ὅτι οὐκ ἔχομεν ἐξουσίαν, ἀλλ’ 1 Paul uses a double negative to emphasize the positive. If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “and we certainly have the right to receive food from you, but instead we worked for our food” +3:9 lrjr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἑαυτοὺς τύπον δῶμεν ὑμῖν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **example**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “we might show you the right way in order for you” or “we might demonstrate the way to live for you” +3:9 z0up μιμεῖσθαι 1 See how you translated **imitate** in verse 7. +3:10 c652 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives εἴ τις οὐ θέλει ἐργάζεσθαι, μηδὲ ἐσθιέτω 1 You can state this in positive form, if this form is difficult to understand in your language. Alternate translation: “If a person wants to eat, he must work” +3:11 ey6c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τινας περιπατοῦντας & ἀτάκτως 1 Here, **walking** stands for behavior in life. you can use an equivalent metaphor from your culture, if it is available. Otherwise, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternate translation: “some who are living idle lives” or “some who are being lazy” +3:11 iv1z rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἀλλὰ περιεργαζομένους 1 Meddlers are people who interfere in the affairs of others without being asked to help. +3:12 bm6z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μετὰ ἡσυχίας 1 Here, **with quietness** is the opposite of meddling. Paul exhorts the meddlers to stop getting involved in other people’s affairs. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **quietness**, you can express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in a quiet and peaceful manner” +3:13 jx8t rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δέ 1 Paul here uses the word **But** to contrast the lazy believers with the hardworking believers. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Concerning” +3:13 e59v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ὑμεῖς 1 The word **you** refers to all the Thessalonian believers, so it should be in plural form. +3:13 usu9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” +3:14 mzs4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῷ λόγῳ ἡμῶν 1 Paul is referring to his command to the Thessalonian believers as a **word**. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “our instructions” +3:14 nv3v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τοῦτον σημειοῦσθε 1 Paul wants the Thessalonians to notice who this person is. Alternate translation: “point out that person” or “make sure everyone knows who he is” +3:14 y552 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἵνα ἐντραπῇ 1 Paul instructs believers to avoid lazy believers as a disciplinary action. If necessary, you could make this explicit to make the meaning clear. Alternate translation: “in order that he will know that his laziness is wrong” +3:15 idj6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφόν 1 Although the term **brother** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “a fellow believer” +3:16 nef4 rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings 0 # General Information:\n\nIn verses 16–18, Paul makes closing remarks to the believers at Thessalonica. A heading for this section might be, “Closing Remarks.” +3:16 z1zs rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 The word translated **Now** marks a change in topic. You can use a natural way in your language to show that this is a new section with a different topic than the previous section. +3:16 whb9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing αὐτὸς & ὁ Κύριος τῆς εἰρήνης, δῴη ὑμῖν 1 Paul ends the letter with blessings that are also prayers. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing or prayer in your language. Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord of peace himself may give you” +3:16 zl1s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς & ὁ Κύριος τῆς εἰρήνης 1 Here, **himself** emphasizes that the Lord is the source of peace and that he will personally give peace to believers. +3:17 c2cb ὁ ἀσπασμὸς τῇ ἐμῇ χειρὶ, Παύλου, ὅ ἐστιν σημεῖον ἐν πάσῃ ἐπιστολῇ, οὕτως γράφω 1 Alternate translation: “I, Paul, write this greeting with my own hand, which I do in every letter, as a sign that this letter is truly from me because this is how I write” +3:17 e3sa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τῇ ἐμῇ χειρὶ 1 Here, the phrase **in my own hand** is an idiom meaning “in my own handwriting.” If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “I myself am writing” +3:17 wg3f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὕτως γράφω 1 Paul makes it clear that this letter is from him and is not a forgery. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you could know that the letter is from me because this is how I write” +3:18 h18b rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, μετὰ πάντων ὑμῶν 1 Paul ends the letter with one more blessing. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “I pray that the grace of our Lord Jesus Christ will be with you all” diff --git a/tn_2TI.tsv b/tn_2TI.tsv index e186804..7a75f26 100644 --- a/tn_2TI.tsv +++ b/tn_2TI.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note -front:intro s7fk 0 # Pengantar 1 Timotius\n\n## Bagian 1: Pengenalan Umum\n\n### Garis besar kitab 1 Timotius\n\n1. Pembukaan (1:1–2)\n2. Ucpan Syukur (1:3–5)\n3. Nasihat untuk tetap setia (1:6–18)\n4. Dorongan untuk bertekun (2:1–13)\n5. Petunjuk untuk menentang pengajaran palsu (2:14–4:8)\n6. Rencana perjalanan dan pemberitaan (4:9–18)\n7. Salam (4:19-21)\n8. Penutup surat (4:22)\n\n### Siapa yang menulis kitab 2 Timotius?\n\nPenulis memperkenalkan dirinya sebagai rasul Paulus. Paulus berasal dari kota Tarsus tetapi tinggal di Yerusalem. Dia telah dikenal sebagai Saul di awal kehidupannya. Sebelum menjadi seorang Kristen, Paulus adalah seorang Farisi, dan dia menganiaya orang-orang Kristen. Setelah dia menjadi seorang Kristen, dia melakukan perjalanan beberapa kali ke seluruh Kekaisaran Romawi, memberitakan tentang Yesus kepada orang-orang. Akhirnya, dia ditangkap dan dibawa ke Roma, ibu kota kekaisaran. Setelah beberapa tahun dipenjara, dia dibebaskan. Paulus menulis surat ini beberapa saat setelah pembebasannya dan sebelum dia ditangkap lagi dan dihukum mati.\n\nPaulus menulis surat ini kepada Timotius, yang merupakan murid Paulus dan teman dekatnya. Pada waktu itu Timotius berada di Efesus. Paulus mungkin telah menulis surat-surat lain kepada Timotius, namun ini adalah surat paling awal yang masih kita miliki. Itulah sebabnya kitab ini dikenal dengan nama 2 Timotius atau Dua Timotius.\n\n### Kitab 2 Timotius membahas tentang apa?\n\nKetika Paulus menulis surat ini, ia tahu bahwa ia akan segera meninggal. Ia menulis untuk mendorong Timotius agar terus melayani Tuhan sebagai seorang pemimpin, tidak peduli apa pun yang akan terjadi pada Paulus. Secara khusus, ia memperingatkan Timotius melawan guru-guru palsu, mendorongnya untuk mengajarkan apa yang benar, memperingatkannya tentang orang-orang jahat, dan memintanya untuk mengunjunginya. Di sepanjang surat ini, terlihat jelas bahwa Paulus sangat memperhatikan Timotius dan ingin agar Timotius terus melayani Tuhan dengan baik bahkan setelah Paulus meninggal.\n\n### Bagaimana seharusnya menerjemahkan judul buku ini?\n\nPara penerjemah dapat memilih untuk menyebut kitab ini dengan judul tradisionalnya, “2 Timotius” atau “Dua Timotius.” Atau mereka mungkin memilih judul lain, seperti “Surat Kedua Paulus kepada Timotius.” (Lihat: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Bagian 2: Konsep Penting Tentang Keagamaan dan Budaya\n\n### Siapakah guru-guru palsu itu?\n\nSatu-satunya informasi yang kita miliki tentang siapa guru-guru palsu ini dan apa yang mereka ajarkan berasal dari surat ini dan dari surat-surat yang disebut 1 Timotius dan Titus. Guru-guru palsu ini adalah orang Kristen, atau setidaknya mengaku sebagai orang Kristen. Mereka mengajar dengan menggunakan teks-teks dan cerita-cerita yang dianggap Paulus tidak dapat dipercaya, mereka berbicara dan memperdebatkan hal-hal yang dianggap Paulus tidak penting, dan mereka menyebabkan perpecahan dan kontroversi. Menurut 1 Timotius, mereka menyuruh orang untuk tidak menikah dan menghindari makan makanan tertentu. Menurut 2 Timotius, beberapa di antara mereka mengatakan bahwa kebangkitan sudah terjadi. Karena satu-satunya informasi tentang guru-guru palsu dan apa yang mereka ajarkan berasal dari surat ini dan 1 Timotius serta Titus, maka yang terbaik adalah tidak merinci secara spesifik ajaran palsu yang dimaksud. Anda harus mempertahankan apa yang Paulus katakan tentang ajaran palsu tanpa membuatnya sesuai dengan jenis ajaran palsu yang mungkin dikenal di daerah Anda.\n\n## Bagian 3: Masalah Penting dalam Penerjemahan\n\n### Apa yang Paulus maksudkan dengan ungkapan "di dalam Kristus Yesus"?\n\nPaulus menggunakan metafora spasial "di dalam Kristus Yesus" sebanyak tujuh kali dalam surat ini. Metafora ini menekankan bahwa orang percaya sangat erat bersatu dengan Kristus seolah-olah mereka berada di dalam Dia. Paulus percaya bahwa hal ini berlaku bagi semua orang percaya, dan terkadang ia menggunakan "di dalam Kristus Yesus" hanya untuk menunjukkan bahwa apa yang ia bicarakan adalah benar bagi mereka yang percaya kepada Yesus. Pada saat yang lain, ia menekankan persatuan dengan Kristus sebagai sarana atau dasar dari suatu pernyataan atau nasihat. Lihat catatan pada ayat-ayat tertentu untuk membantu dalam memahami makna kontekstual dari "di dalam Kristus Yesus." (Lihat: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### Apa yang Paulus maksudkan ketika ia menggunakan kata "iman"?\n\nPaulus menggunakan kata benda abstrak "iman" sebanyak delapan kali dalam surat ini. Kata "iman" dapat merujuk kepada tindakan memiliki "iman" atau kepada isi dari "iman", yaitu apa yang dipercayai oleh orang Kristen. Di banyak tempat dalam 2 Timotius, orang Kristen memiliki pemahaman yang berbeda tentang makna yang dimaksudkan oleh Paulus. Di setiap tempat ini, catatan terjemahan memberikan contoh bagaimana mengungkapkan dua makna yang mungkin, dan UST mencontohkan bagaimana mengungkapkan ide ketika kata "iman" mengacu pada tindakan percaya. (Lihat: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])\n\n### Siapa yang menerima “kasih” yang disebutkan Paulus dalam suratnya?\n\nPaulus menggunakan kata benda abstrak "kasih" sebanyak empat kali dalam surat ini. Ia dapat mengartikan bahwa orang percaya harus mengasihi satu sama lain atau mereka harus mengasihi Allah atau mereka harus mengasihi Allah dan satu sama lain. Namun, jika memungkinkan, Anda harus mengungkapkan gagasan tersebut sehingga dapat mencakup semua kemungkinan ini. Jika Anda harus mengungkapkan siapa yang harus dikasihi, disarankan agar Anda mengindikasikan bahwa itu adalah sesama orang percaya. UST mencontohkan bagaimana mengekspresikan gagasan tersebut dengan cara itu. (Lihat: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/love]])\n\n### Siapa yang dimaksud Paulus dengan kata “kami”, “kita”, dan “milik kita”?\n\nPaulus selalu menggunakan kata ganti orang pertama jamak untuk merujuk kepada dirinya dan Timotius, dan sering kali ia juga menyertakan orang-orang percaya lainnya. Jadi, Anda harus selalu menggunakan bentuk inklusif dari kata ganti orang pertama jamak dalam terjemahan Anda jika bahasa Anda menandai perbedaan itu. (Lihat: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n\n### Kapan kata “kamu” berbentuk tunggal, dan kapan “kamu” berbentuk jamak?\n\nKarena surat ini ditujukan kepada seorang individu, yaitu Timotius, maka setiap bentuk "kamu" di seluruh surat ini adalah tunggal kecuali "kamu" dalam berkat terakhir dalam [4:22](.../04/22.md). Sebuah catatan akan menunjukkan kemunculan bentuk jamak dari "kamu" ini. (Lihat: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])\n\n### Apa permasalahan teks utama dalam teks kitab 1 Timotius?\n\nDalam ayat-ayat berikut ini, naskah-naskah kuno tidak semuanya memiliki kata-kata yang sama. ULT menggunakan kata-kata yang ditemukan di sebagian besar naskah kuno. Ketika Anda menerjemahkan ayat-ayat ini, Anda harus membandingkan ULT dengan terjemahan apa pun yang mungkin sudah dikenal oleh para pembaca Anda untuk mengetahui apa yang diharapkan oleh para pembaca Anda. Kecuali ada alasan yang kuat untuk menggunakan kata-kata alternatif, Anda harus mengikuti ULT. Lihat catatan kaki dan catatan pada setiap ayat untuk informasi lebih lanjut. (Lihat: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])\n\n* "seorang guru" ([1:11](../01/11.md)). Beberapa naskah kuno memiliki ini: "seorang guru bagi bangsa-bangsa lain."\n* "Menderita bersama" ([2:3](../02/03.md)). Beberapa naskah kuno menuliskan hal ini: "Oleh karena itu, kamu harus menderita."\n* "Allah" ([2:14](../02/14.md)). Beberapa naskah kuno menuliskan ini: "Tuhan."\n* "dan oleh penampakan-Nya" ([4:1](../04/01.md)). Beberapa naskah kuno menuliskan ini: "menurut penampakan-Nya."\n* "Tuhan" ([4:22](../04/22.md)). Beberapa naskah kuno menuliskan ini: "Tuhan Yesus Kristus."\n* "Engkau" ([4:22](../04/22.md)). Beberapa naskah kuno menuliskan ini: "Engkau. Amin."\n +front:intro s7fk 0 # Pengantar 1 Timotius\n\n## Bagian 1: Pengenalan Umum\n\n### Garis besar kitab 1 Timotius\n\n1. Pembukaan (1:1–2)\n2. Ucapan Syukur (1:3–5)\n3. Nasihat untuk tetap setia (1:6–18)\n4. Dorongan untuk bertekun (2:1–13)\n5. Petunjuk untuk menentang pengajaran palsu (2:14–4:8)\n6. Rencana perjalanan dan pemberitaan (4:9–18)\n7. Salam (4:19-21)\n8. Penutup surat (4:22)\n\n### Siapa yang menulis kitab 2 Timotius?\n\nPenulis memperkenalkan dirinya sebagai rasul Paulus. Paulus berasal dari kota Tarsus tetapi tinggal di Yerusalem. Dia telah dikenal sebagai Saul di awal kehidupannya. Sebelum menjadi seorang Kristen, Paulus adalah seorang Farisi, dan dia menganiaya orang-orang Kristen. Setelah dia menjadi seorang Kristen, dia melakukan perjalanan beberapa kali ke seluruh Kekaisaran Romawi, memberitakan tentang Yesus kepada orang-orang. Akhirnya, dia ditangkap dan dibawa ke Roma, ibu kota kekaisaran. Setelah beberapa tahun dipenjara, dia dibebaskan. Paulus menulis surat ini beberapa saat setelah pembebasannya dan sebelum dia ditangkap lagi dan dihukum mati.\n\nPaulus menulis surat ini kepada Timotius, yang merupakan murid Paulus dan teman dekatnya. Pada waktu itu Timotius berada di Efesus. Paulus mungkin telah menulis surat-surat lain kepada Timotius, namun ini adalah surat paling awal yang masih kita miliki. Itulah sebabnya kitab ini dikenal dengan nama 2 Timotius atau Dua Timotius.\n\n### Kitab 2 Timotius membahas tentang apa?\n\nKetika Paulus menulis surat ini, ia tahu bahwa ia akan segera meninggal. Ia menulis untuk mendorong Timotius agar terus melayani Tuhan sebagai seorang pemimpin, tidak peduli apa pun yang akan terjadi pada Paulus. Secara khusus, ia memperingatkan Timotius melawan guru-guru palsu, mendorongnya untuk mengajarkan apa yang benar, memperingatkannya tentang orang-orang jahat, dan memintanya untuk mengunjunginya. Di sepanjang surat ini, terlihat jelas bahwa Paulus sangat memperhatikan Timotius dan ingin agar Timotius terus melayani Tuhan dengan baik bahkan setelah Paulus meninggal.\n\n### Bagaimana seharusnya menerjemahkan judul buku ini?\n\nPara penerjemah dapat memilih untuk menyebut kitab ini dengan judul tradisionalnya, “2 Timotius” atau “Dua Timotius.” Atau mereka mungkin memilih judul lain, seperti “Surat Kedua Paulus kepada Timotius.” (Lihat: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Bagian 2: Konsep Penting Tentang Keagamaan dan Budaya\n\n### Siapakah guru-guru palsu itu?\n\nSatu-satunya informasi yang kita miliki tentang siapa guru-guru palsu ini dan apa yang mereka ajarkan berasal dari surat ini dan dari surat-surat yang disebut 1 Timotius dan Titus. Guru-guru palsu ini adalah orang Kristen, atau setidaknya mengaku sebagai orang Kristen. Mereka mengajar dengan menggunakan teks-teks dan cerita-cerita yang dianggap Paulus tidak dapat dipercaya, mereka berbicara dan memperdebatkan hal-hal yang dianggap Paulus tidak penting, dan mereka menyebabkan perpecahan dan kontroversi. Menurut 1 Timotius, mereka menyuruh orang untuk tidak menikah dan menghindari makan makanan tertentu. Menurut 2 Timotius, beberapa di antara mereka mengatakan bahwa kebangkitan sudah terjadi. Karena satu-satunya informasi tentang guru-guru palsu dan apa yang mereka ajarkan berasal dari surat ini dan 1 Timotius serta Titus, maka yang terbaik adalah tidak merinci secara spesifik ajaran palsu yang dimaksud. Anda harus mempertahankan apa yang Paulus katakan tentang ajaran palsu tanpa membuatnya sesuai dengan jenis ajaran palsu yang mungkin dikenal di daerah Anda.\n\n## Bagian 3: Masalah Penting dalam Penerjemahan\n\n### Apa yang Paulus maksudkan dengan ungkapan "di dalam Kristus Yesus"?\n\nPaulus menggunakan metafora spasial "di dalam Kristus Yesus" sebanyak tujuh kali dalam surat ini. Metafora ini menekankan bahwa orang percaya sangat erat bersatu dengan Kristus seolah-olah mereka berada di dalam Dia. Paulus percaya bahwa hal ini berlaku bagi semua orang percaya, dan terkadang ia menggunakan "di dalam Kristus Yesus" hanya untuk menunjukkan bahwa apa yang ia bicarakan adalah benar bagi mereka yang percaya kepada Yesus. Pada saat yang lain, ia menekankan persatuan dengan Kristus sebagai sarana atau dasar dari suatu pernyataan atau nasihat. Lihat catatan pada ayat-ayat tertentu untuk membantu dalam memahami makna kontekstual dari "di dalam Kristus Yesus." (Lihat: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### Apa yang Paulus maksudkan ketika ia menggunakan kata "iman"?\n\nPaulus menggunakan kata benda abstrak "iman" sebanyak delapan kali dalam surat ini. Kata "iman" dapat merujuk kepada tindakan memiliki "iman" atau kepada isi dari "iman", yaitu apa yang dipercayai oleh orang Kristen. Di banyak tempat dalam 2 Timotius, orang Kristen memiliki pemahaman yang berbeda tentang makna yang dimaksudkan oleh Paulus. Di setiap tempat ini, catatan terjemahan memberikan contoh bagaimana mengungkapkan dua makna yang mungkin, dan UST mencontohkan bagaimana mengungkapkan ide ketika kata "iman" mengacu pada tindakan percaya. (Lihat: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])\n\n### Siapa yang menerima “kasih” yang disebutkan Paulus dalam suratnya?\n\nPaulus menggunakan kata benda abstrak "kasih" sebanyak empat kali dalam surat ini. Ia dapat mengartikan bahwa orang percaya harus mengasihi satu sama lain atau mereka harus mengasihi Allah atau mereka harus mengasihi Allah dan satu sama lain. Namun, jika memungkinkan, Anda harus mengungkapkan gagasan tersebut sehingga dapat mencakup semua kemungkinan ini. Jika Anda harus mengungkapkan siapa yang harus dikasihi, disarankan agar Anda mengindikasikan bahwa itu adalah sesama orang percaya. UST mencontohkan bagaimana mengekspresikan gagasan tersebut dengan cara itu. (Lihat: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/love]])\n\n### Siapa yang dimaksud Paulus dengan kata “kami”, “kita”, dan “milik kita”?\n\nPaulus selalu menggunakan kata ganti orang pertama jamak untuk merujuk kepada dirinya dan Timotius, dan sering kali ia juga menyertakan orang-orang percaya lainnya. Jadi, Anda harus selalu menggunakan bentuk inklusif dari kata ganti orang pertama jamak dalam terjemahan Anda jika bahasa Anda menandai perbedaan itu. (Lihat: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n\n### Kapan kata “kamu” berbentuk tunggal, dan kapan “kamu” berbentuk jamak?\n\nKarena surat ini ditujukan kepada seorang individu, yaitu Timotius, maka setiap bentuk "kamu" di seluruh surat ini adalah tunggal kecuali "kamu" dalam berkat terakhir dalam [4:22](.../04/22.md). Sebuah catatan akan menunjukkan kemunculan bentuk jamak dari "kamu" ini. (Lihat: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])\n\n### Apa permasalahan teks utama dalam teks kitab 1 Timotius?\n\nDalam ayat-ayat berikut ini, naskah-naskah kuno tidak semuanya memiliki kata-kata yang sama. ULT menggunakan kata-kata yang ditemukan di sebagian besar naskah kuno. Ketika Anda menerjemahkan ayat-ayat ini, Anda harus membandingkan ULT dengan terjemahan apa pun yang mungkin sudah dikenal oleh para pembaca Anda untuk mengetahui apa yang diharapkan oleh para pembaca Anda. Kecuali ada alasan yang kuat untuk menggunakan kata-kata alternatif, Anda harus mengikuti ULT. Lihat catatan kaki dan catatan pada setiap ayat untuk informasi lebih lanjut. (Lihat: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])\n\n* "seorang guru" ([1:11](../01/11.md)). Beberapa naskah kuno memiliki ini: "seorang guru bagi bangsa-bangsa lain."\n* "Menderita bersama" ([2:3](../02/03.md)). Beberapa naskah kuno menuliskan hal ini: "Oleh karena itu, kamu harus menderita."\n* "Allah" ([2:14](../02/14.md)). Beberapa naskah kuno menuliskan ini: "Tuhan."\n* "dan oleh penampakan-Nya" ([4:1](../04/01.md)). Beberapa naskah kuno menuliskan ini: "menurut penampakan-Nya."\n* "Tuhan" ([4:22](../04/22.md)). Beberapa naskah kuno menuliskan ini: "Tuhan Yesus Kristus."\n* "Engkau" ([4:22](../04/22.md)). Beberapa naskah kuno menuliskan ini: "Engkau. Amin."\n 1:intro p5lf 0 # 2 Timotius Bab 1: Catatan Umum\n\n## Struktur dan Susunan\n\n1. Pembukaan surat (1:1–2)\n2. Ucapan syukur (1:3–5)\n3. Nasihat untuk tetap setia (1:6-18)\n * Paulus mendorong Timotius untuk tidak malu dan tetap mempertahankan Injil (1:6-14)\n * Paulus memberikan contoh-contoh tentang orang-orang yang tidak setia dan yang setia (1:15-18)\n\n## Konsep khusus dalam bab ini\n\n### "Karunia" Timotius\n\nDalam [1:6](../01/06.md), Paulus berbicara tentang "karunia" yang diterima Timotius. Ia menerimanya ketika Paulus menumpangkan tangan ke atas Timotius untuk menugaskannya. Dari konteksnya, jelas bahwa "karunia" ini adalah keahlian atau kemampuan khusus yang dimiliki Timotius. Kemungkinan besar, keahlian atau kemampuan ini memungkinkan Timotius untuk mengajar dan memimpin jemaat dengan baik. Karena Paulus tidak menyatakan atau bahkan menyiratkan apa "karunia" itu, Anda harus menggunakan kata atau frasa umum yang mengacu pada keterampilan atau kemampuan khusus.\n\n### "dipercayakan"\n\nDalam [1:12](../01/12.md) dan [1:14](../01/14.md), Paulus merujuk pada "dipercayakan." Kedua penggunaan kata "dipercayakan" ini dapat dipahami dalam dua cara:\n1. Dalam ayat 12, Paulus mengacu pada sesuatu yang ia "percayakan" pada Allah, yaitu hidupnya atau berkat-berkat kekalnya. Dalam ayat 14, Paulus mengacu pada sesuatu yang telah "dipercayakan" Allah kepada Timotius, yaitu Injil atau pelayanannya.\n2. Dalam ayat 12 dan ayat 14, Paulus mengacu pada sesuatu yang telah "dipercayakan" Allah kepada dirinya dan Timotius, yaitu Injil atau pelayanan mereka.\n\nLihat catatan pada ayat-ayat ini untuk informasi lebih lanjut dan pilihan terjemahan.\n\n## Tokoh Penting dalam Bab Ini\n\n### Anak rohani\n\nDalam [1:2](../01/02.md), Paulus menyebut Timotius sebagai "anak yang dikasihi". Maksudnya, Timotius seperti anak baginya dalam konteks iman mereka kepada Yesus. Ungkapan ini menyiratkan bahwa Paulus adalah seorang mentor bagi Timotius dan Timotius adalah murid yang baik. Karena penggunaan bahasa kekeluargaan untuk sesama orang percaya merupakan metafora yang penting dalam Perjanjian Baru, maka jika memungkinkan pertahankan metafora tersebut atau ungkapkan ide tersebut dalam bentuk perumpamaan. Lihat catatan pada ayat ini untuk pilihan terjemahan. (Lihat: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1:1 ha4l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person Παῦλος, ἀπόστολος 1 Dalam budaya ini, penulis surat akan menyebutkan nama mereka sendiri terlebih dahulu, mengacu pada diri mereka sendiri sebagai orang ketiga. Jika itu akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat menggunakan orang pertama di sini. Atau jika bahasa Anda memiliki cara khusus untuk memperkenalkan penulis surat, dan jika itu akan membantu pembaca Anda, Anda dapat menggunakannya di sini. Terjemahan alternatif: "Dari Paulus. Aku adalah seorang rasul"\n 1:1 vl2g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns διὰ θελήματος Θεοῦ 1 Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan kata benda abstrak untuk ide **kehendak**, Anda dapat mengungkapkan ide yang sama dengan cara lain. Terjemahan alternatif: "karena itulah yang dikehendaki Allah" atau "karena apa yang telah diputuskan Allah" @@ -436,4 +436,4 @@ front:intro s7fk 0 # Pengantar 1 Timotius\n\n## Bagian 1: Pengenalan Umum\n\n 4:22 p120 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing ἡ χάρις μεθ’ ὑμῶν 1 Sebagaimana kebiasaan dalam budayanya, Paulus menutup suratnya dengan sebuah berkat untuk Timotius dan orang-orang percaya yang bersamanya. Dia menyiratkan bahwa **Anugerah** berasal dari Allah. Gunakanlah bentuk yang dapat dikenali orang sebagai berkat dalam bahasa Anda. Terjemahan alternatif: "Semoga engkau mengalami kebaikan dari Allah di dalam dirimu" atau "Saya berdoa agar engkau mendapat kasih karunia dari Allah" 4:22 iefg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ χάρις μεθ’ ὑμῶν 1 Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan kata benda abstrak untuk ide **anugerah**, Anda dapat mengekspresikan ide yang sama dengan cara lain. Terjemahan alternatif: "Semoga Allah bertindak dengan penuh kasih karunia terhadapmu" 4:22 k85y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ὑμῶν 1 Karena Paulus memberikan berkat ini kepada Timotius dan semua orang percaya yang bersamanya, ini adalah satu-satunya tempat dalam surat ini di mana **kalian** berbentuk jamak. -4:22 t7vx rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants ὑμῶν 1 Banyak naskah kuno yang berbunyi **kalian**. ULT mengikuti bacaan itu. Naskah kuno lainnya berbunyi "kalian, Amin." Jika ada terjemahan Alkitab di daerah Anda, Anda dapat menggunakan bacaan yang digunakannya. Jika terjemahan Alkitab tidak tersedia di wilayah Anda, Anda dapat menggunakan bacaan ULT. \ No newline at end of file +4:22 t7vx rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants ὑμῶν 1 Banyak naskah kuno yang berbunyi **kalian**. ULT mengikuti bacaan itu. Naskah kuno lainnya berbunyi "kalian, Amin." Jika ada terjemahan Alkitab di daerah Anda, Anda dapat menggunakan bacaan yang digunakannya. Jika terjemahan Alkitab tidak tersedia di wilayah Anda, Anda dapat menggunakan bacaan ULT. diff --git a/tn_PHM.tsv b/tn_PHM.tsv index 35e541f..87ba789 100644 --- a/tn_PHM.tsv +++ b/tn_PHM.tsv @@ -1,94 +1,94 @@ Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note -front:intro sz2w 0 # Pengantar Kitab Filemon\n\n## Bagian 1: Pengantar Umum\n\n### Garis Besar Kitab Filemon\n\n1. Paulus mengirim salam kepada Filemon (1:1-3)\n2. Paulus mengajukan permintaan kepada Filemon tentang Onesimus (1:4-21)\n3. Kesimpulan (1:22-25)\n\n### Siapa yang menulis Kitab Filemon?\n\nPaulus menulis surat Filemon. Paulus berasal dari kota Tarsus. Dia dikenal sebagai Saulus di awal kehidupannya. Sebelum menjadi seorang Kristen, Saulus adalah seorang Farisi. Dia menganiaya orang-orang Kristen. Setelah ia menjadi seorang Kristen, ia melakukan perjalanan beberapa kali ke seluruh Kekaisaran Romawi untuk memberitakan tentang Yesus kepada orang-orang.\n\nPaulus sedang berada di dalam penjara ketika ia menulis surat ini.\n\n### Tentang apakah Kitab Filemon ini?\n\nPaulus menulis surat ini kepada seorang bernama Filemon. Filemon adalah seorang yang percaya kepada Yesus yang tinggal di kota Kolose. Dia memiliki seorang budak bernama Onesimus. Onesimus telah melarikan diri dari Filemon dan mungkin juga mencuri sesuatu darinya. Onesimus pergi ke Roma dan mengunjungi Paulus di penjara di sana, di mana Paulus membawa Onesimus kepada Yesus.\n\nPaulus mengatakan kepada Filemon bahwa ia akan mengembalikan Onesimus kepadanya. Filemon memiliki hak untuk menghukum mati Onesimus menurut hukum Romawi. Tetapi Paulus berkata bahwa Filemon harus menerima Onesimus kembali sebagai saudara Kristen. Dia bahkan menyarankan agar Filemon mengizinkan Onesimus kembali kepada Paulus dan menolongnya di penjara.\n\n### Bagaimana seharusnya judul buku ini diterjemahkan?\n\nPara penerjemah dapat memilih untuk menyebut kitab ini dengan judul tradisionalnya, "Filemon". Atau mereka dapat memilih judul yang lebih jelas, seperti "Surat Paulus kepada Filemon" atau "Surat yang Ditulis Paulus kepada Filemon." (Lihat: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Bagian 2: Konsep-konsep Agama dan Budaya yang Penting\n\n### Apakah surat ini menyetujui praktik perbudakan?\n\nPaulus mengirim Onesimus kembali kepada tuannya yang lama. Namun, bukan berarti Paulus berpikir bahwa perbudakan adalah praktik yang dapat diterima. Sebaliknya, Paulus lebih peduli dengan orang-orang yang diperdamaikan dengan satu sama lain dan bahwa mereka melayani Tuhan dalam situasi apa pun yang mereka hadapi. Penting untuk dicatat bahwa dalam budaya pada masa itu, orang menjadi budak karena berbagai alasan dan hal itu tidak dianggap sebagai keadaan yang permanen.\n\n### Apa yang Paulus maksudkan dengan ungkapan "di dalam Kristus", "di dalam Tuhan", dan sebagainya?\n\nPaulus bermaksud untuk mengungkapkan gagasan tentang persatuan yang sangat erat dengan Kristus dan orang-orang percaya. Lihatlah pendahuluan Kitab Roma untuk mengetahui lebih lanjut tentang ungkapan semacam ini.\n\n## Bagian 3: Masalah Penerjemahan yang Penting\n\n### Bentuk tunggal dan jamak "kamu"\n\nDalam buku ini, kata "aku" merujuk kepada Paulus. Kata "engkau" hampir selalu berbentuk tunggal dan merujuk kepada Filemon. Dua pengecualian untuk hal ini adalah 1:22 dan 1:25. Di sana "kalian" merujuk kepada Filemon dan orang-orang percaya yang bertemu di rumahnya. (Lihat: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] dan [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])\n\nTiga kali Paulus mengidentifikasi dirinya sebagai penulis surat ini (dalam ayat 1, 9, dan 19). Jelaslah bahwa Timotius ada bersamanya dan mungkin telah menuliskan kata-kata yang diucapkan Paulus. Semua kata ganti "aku", "saya", dan "milikku" merujuk kepada Paulus. Filemon adalah orang utama yang dituju oleh surat ini. Semua kata "engkau" dan "kamu" merujuk kepadanya dan berbentuk tunggal kecuali jika disebutkan lain. (Lihat: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -1:1 ne8k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person Παῦλος 1 Bahasa Anda mungkin memiliki cara khusus untuk memperkenalkan penulis surat. Gunakan itu di sini. Terjemahan alternatif: "Dari saya, Paulus" atau "Saya, Paulus" -1:1 cgs4 δέσμιος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 Paulus dipenjara karena orang-orang yang berkuasa tidak ingin dia berkhotbah tentang Yesus. Mereka memenjarakannya untuk menghentikan dan menghukumnya. Ini tidak berarti bahwa Yesus yang memenjarakan Paulus. Terjemahan alternatif: "seorang tahanan karena Kristus Yesus" -1:1 sv3p ὁ ἀδελφὸς 1 Paulus menggunakan istilah **saudara** untuk menyebut seseorang yang memiliki iman yang sama. Terjemahan alternatif: "sesama orang Kristen" atau "rekan kita dalam iman" (Lihat: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor) -1:1 y9zu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ὁ ἀδελφὸς 1 Di sini, kata **kita** tidak ada dalam bahasa aslinya, tetapi diperlukan dalam bahasa Inggris, yang mengharuskan kata hubungan untuk menunjukkan kepada siapa orang tersebut berhubungan. Dalam kasus ini, **kita** akan bersifat inklusif, menghubungkan Timotius dengan Paulus dan para pembaca sebagai saudara di dalam Kristus. Jika bahasa Anda mengharuskan demikian, Anda dapat melakukan hal yang sama. Jika tidak, Anda dapat mengikuti kata aslinya, yang mengatakan, "saudara." -1:1 gvmy rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Φιλήμονι 1 **Filemon** adalah nama seorang laki-laki. +front:intro sz2w 0 # Pengantar Filemon\n\n## Bagian 1: Pengantar Umum\n\n### Garis Besar Kitab Filemon\n\n1. Paulus menyapa Filemon (1:1-3)\n2. Paulus mengajukan permintaan kepada Filemon tentang Onesimus (1:4-21)\n3. Kesimpulan (1:22-25)\n\n### Siapa yang menulis Kitab Filemon?\n\nPaulus menulis kitab Filemon. Paulus berasal dari kota Tarsus. Ia dikenal sebagai Saulus pada masa awal kehidupannya. Sebelum menjadi seorang Kristen, Saulus adalah seorang Farisi. Dia menganiaya orang-orang Kristen. Setelah menjadi Kristen, dia melakukan perjalanan beberapa kali ke seluruh Kekaisaran Romawi untuk memberitakan tentang Yesus kepada orang-orang.\n\nPaulus berada di dalam penjara ketika ia menulis surat ini.\n\n### Tentang apakah Kitab Filemon ini?\n\nPaulus menulis surat ini kepada seorang bernama Filemon. Filemon adalah seorang yang percaya kepada Yesus yang tinggal di kota Kolose. Dia memiliki seorang budak bernama Onesimus. Onesimus telah melarikan diri dari Filemon dan mungkin juga mencuri sesuatu darinya. Onesimus pergi ke Roma dan mengunjungi Paulus di penjara di sana, di mana Paulus membawa Onesimus kepada Yesus.\n\nPaulus mengatakan kepada Filemon bahwa ia akan mengembalikan Onesimus kepadanya. Filemon memiliki hak untuk menghukum mati Onesimus menurut hukum Romawi. Tetapi Paulus berkata bahwa Filemon harus menerima Onesimus kembali sebagai saudara Kristen. Dia bahkan menyarankan agar Filemon mengizinkan Onesimus kembali kepada Paulus dan menolongnya di penjara.\n\n### Bagaimana seharusnya judul kitab ini diterjemahkan?\n\nPara penerjemah dapat memilih untuk menyebut kitab ini dengan judul tradisionalnya, “Filemon”. Atau mereka dapat memilih judul yang lebih jelas, seperti “Surat Paulus kepada Filemon” atau “Surat yang Ditulis Paulus kepada Filemon”. (Lihat: [[rc://*/ta/man/terjemahan/terjemahan-nama]])\n\n## Bagian 2: Konsep-konsep Agama dan Budaya yang Penting\n\n### Apakah surat ini menyetujui praktik perbudakan?\n\nPaulus mengirim Onesimus kembali kepada tuannya yang lama. Tetapi bukan berarti Paulus berpikir bahwa perbudakan adalah praktik yang dapat diterima. Sebaliknya, Paulus lebih peduli dengan orang-orang yang diperdamaikan dengan satu sama lain dan bahwa mereka melayani Tuhan dalam situasi apa pun yang mereka hadapi. Penting untuk dicatat bahwa dalam budaya pada masa itu, orang menjadi budak karena berbagai alasan dan hal ini tidak dianggap sebagai suatu keadaan yang permanen.\n\n### Apa yang Paulus maksudkan dengan ungkapan “di dalam Kristus”, “di dalam Tuhan”, dan sebagainya?\n\nPaulus bermaksud untuk mengungkapkan gagasan tentang persatuan yang sangat erat dengan Kristus dan orang-orang percaya. Lihatlah pendahuluan Kitab Roma untuk mengetahui lebih lanjut tentang ungkapan semacam ini.\n\n## Bagian 3: Masalah-masalah Penting dalam Penerjemahan\n\n### Bentuk tunggal dan jamak dari kata “kamu”\n\nDalam kitab ini, kata “aku” merujuk kepada Paulus. Kata “kamu” hampir selalu berbentuk tunggal dan merujuk kepada Filemon. Dua pengecualian untuk hal ini adalah 1:22 dan 1:25. Di sana “kamu” merujuk kepada Filemon dan orang-orang percaya yang berkumpul di rumahnya (Lihat: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] dan [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-kamu]])\n\nTiga kali Paulus mengidentifikasi dirinya sebagai penulis surat ini (dalam ayat 1, 9, dan 19). Jelaslah bahwa Timotius ada bersamanya dan mungkin telah menuliskan kata-kata yang diucapkan Paulus. Semua kata ganti “aku”, “saya”, dan “milikku” merujuk kepada Paulus. Filemon adalah orang utama yang dituju oleh surat ini. Semua kata “kamu” dan “engkau” merujuk kepadanya dan berbentuk tunggal kecuali jika disebutkan lain. (Lihat: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-kamu]]) +1:1 ne8k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person Παῦλος 1 Bahasa Anda mungkin memiliki cara khusus untuk memperkenalkan penulis surat. Anda dapat menggunakannya di sini. Terjemahan alternatif: “Dari saya, Paulus” atau ”Aku, Paulus” +1:1 cgs4 δέσμιος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 Paulus dipenjara karena orang-orang yang berkuasa tidak ingin dia berkhotbah tentang Yesus. Mereka memenjarakannya untuk menghentikan dan menghukumnya. Ini tidak berarti bahwa Yesus yang memenjarakan Paulus. Terjemahan alternatif: “seorang tahanan karena Kristus Yesus” +1:1 sv3p ὁ ἀδελφὸς 1 Paulus menggunakan istilah “saudara” untuk menyebut seseorang yang memiliki iman yang sama. Terjemahan alternatif: “sesama orang Kristen” atau ‘rekan kita dalam iman’ (Lihat: rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor) +1:1 y9zu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ὁ ἀδελφὸς 1 Di sini, kata **kita** tidak ada dalam bahasa aslinya, tetapi diperlukan dalam bahasa Inggris, yang mengharuskan kata hubungan untuk menunjukkan kepada siapa orang tersebut berhubungan. Dalam kasus ini, **kita** akan bersifat inklusif, menghubungkan Timotius dengan Paulus dan para pembaca sebagai saudara di dalam Kristus. Jika bahasa Anda mengharuskan demikian, Anda dapat melakukan hal yang sama. Jika tidak, Anda dapat mengikuti kata aslinya, yang mengatakan, “saudara.” +1:1 gvmy rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Φιλήμονι 1 **Filemon** adalah nama seorang pria. 1:1 q84z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Φιλήμονι 1 Jika akan lebih alami dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat menyertakan informasi bahwa ini adalah surat di mana Paulus berbicara secara langsung kepada **Filemon**, seperti dalam UST. -1:1 r3l9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Kata **kami** di sini merujuk kepada Paulus dan mereka yang bersamanya, bukan kepada pembaca. -1:1 ww3l καὶ συνεργῷ ἡμῶν 1 Jika itu akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat menyatakan secara eksplisit bagaimana Filemon bekerja sama dengan Paulus. Terjemahan alternatif: "yang, seperti kita, bekerja untuk menyebarkan Injil" atau "yang bekerja seperti kita untuk melayani Yesus" -1:2 b37l rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἀπφίᾳ 1 **Apfia** adalah nama seorang perempuan. -1:2 bb1s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive τῇ ἀδελφῇ 1 Di sini, kata **kita** tidak ada dalam bahasa aslinya, tetapi diperlukan dalam bahasa Inggris, yang mengharuskan kata hubungan untuk menunjukkan dengan siapa seseorang berhubungan. Dalam kasus ini, **kita** akan bersifat inklusif, menghubungkan Apfia dengan Paulus dan para pembaca sebagai saudara di dalam Kristus. Jika bahasa Anda mengharuskan hal ini, Anda dapat melakukan hal yang sama. Jika tidak, Anda dapat menggunakan kata yang sama dengan bahasa aslinya, yaitu "saudari." -1:2 hhpc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῇ ἀδελφῇ 1 Paulus menggunakan istilah **saudari** untuk menyebut seorang wanita yang memiliki iman yang sama. Terjemahan alternatif: "saudara seiman" atau "saudari rohani kita" +1:1 r3l9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Kata **kita** di sini merujuk kepada Paulus dan mereka yang bersamanya, bukan kepada pembaca. +1:1 ww3l καὶ συνεργῷ ἡμῶν 1 Jika itu akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat menyatakan secara jelas bagaimana Filemon bekerja sama dengan Paulus. Terjemahan alternatif: “yang seperti kita, bekerja untuk menyebarkan Injil” atau ”yang bekerja seperti kita untuk melayani Yesus” +1:2 b37l rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἀπφίᾳ 1 ** Apfia** adalah nama seorang wanita. +1:2 bb1s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive τῇ ἀδελφῇ 1 Di sini, kata **kita** tidak ada dalam bahasa aslinya, tetapi diperlukan dalam bahasa Inggris, yang mengharuskan kata hubungan untuk menunjukkan dengan siapa seseorang berhubungan. Dalam kasus ini, **kita** akan bersifat inklusif, menghubungkan Apfia dengan Paulus dan para pembaca sebagai saudara di dalam Kristus. Jika bahasa Anda mengharuskan hal ini, Anda dapat melakukan hal yang sama. Jika tidak, Anda dapat menggunakan kata yang sama dengan bahasa aslinya, yaitu “saudari.” +1:2 hhpc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῇ ἀδελφῇ 1 Paulus menggunakan istilah “saudari” untuk menyebut seorang wanita yang memiliki iman yang sama. Terjemahan alternatif: “saudara seiman” atau ”saudari rohani kita” 1:2 e8su rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Kata **kita** di sini merujuk kepada Paulus dan mereka yang bersamanya, bukan kepada pembaca. 1:2 kyzo Ἀπφίᾳ & Ἀρχίππῳ & τῇ & ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 Surat ini terutama ditujukan kepada Filemon. Dapat menyesatkan jika kita mengira bahwa Paulus menulis kepada **Apfia**, **Arkhipus**, dan **jemaat** di rumah Filemon, pada saat yang sama ia menulis kepada Filemon. -1:2 sq44 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἀρχίππῳ 1 **Arkhipus** adalah nama seorang laki-laki di jemaat bersama Filemon. -1:2 mnn5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῷ συνστρατιώτῃ ἡμῶν 1 Di sini Paulus berbicara tentang Arkhipus seolah-olah ia dan Arkhipus adalah prajurit dalam sebuah pasukan. Maksudnya adalah bahwa Arkhipus bekerja keras, sama seperti Paulus sendiri yang bekerja keras, untuk mengabarkan Injil. Terjemahan alternatif: "sesama pejuang rohani kita" atau "yang juga berjuang dalam peperangan rohani bersama kita" -1:2 uof9 καὶ τῇ κατ’ οἶκόν σου ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 Apfia dan Arkhipus mungkin juga merupakan anggota **jemaat** yang bertemu di rumah Filemon. Jika menyebutkan mereka secara terpisah akan menyiratkan bahwa mereka bukan bagian dari gereja, Anda dapat menambahkan kata seperti "yang lain." Terjemahan alternatif: "kepada anggota-anggota jemaat yang lain di rumahmu" -1:3 r4nq rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη, ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Setelah memperkenalkan pengirim dan penerima surat, Paulus memberikan berkat. Gunakanlah bentuk yang dapat dikenali orang sebagai berkat dalam bahasa Anda. Terjemahan alternatif: "Semoga Allah Bapa kita dan Tuhan Yesus Kristus memberikan kasih karunia dan damai sejahtera kepadamu." -1:3 iv7e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη, ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ. 1 Jika akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat mengekspresikan ide di balik kata benda abstrak **anugerah** dan **damai** dengan kata sifat seperti "ramah" dan "damai." Terjemahan alternatif: "Semoga Allah Bapa kita dan Tuhan kita Yesus Kristus bermurah hati kepadamu dan membuatmu damai sejahtera" +1:2 sq44 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἀρχίππῳ 1 *Arkhipus** adalah nama seorang pria di gereja bersama Filemon. +1:2 mnn5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῷ συνστρατιώτῃ ἡμῶν 1 Di sini Paulus berbicara tentang Arkhipus seolah-olah ia dan Arkhipus adalah prajurit dalam sebuah pasukan. Maksudnya adalah bahwa Arkhipus bekerja keras, sama seperti Paulus sendiri yang bekerja keras, untuk mengabarkan Injil. Terjemahan alternatif: “sesama pejuang rohani kita” atau ”yang juga berjuang dalam peperangan rohani bersama kita” +1:2 uof9 καὶ τῇ κατ’ οἶκόν σου ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 Apfia dan Arkhipus mungkin juga merupakan anggota **gereja** yang bertemu di rumah Filemon. Jika menyebutkan mereka secara terpisah akan menyiratkan bahwa mereka bukan bagian dari gereja, Anda dapat menambahkan kata seperti “yang lain.” Terjemahan alternatif: “kepada anggota-anggota jemaat yang lain di rumahmu” +1:3 r4nq rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη, ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Setelah memperkenalkan pengirim dan penerima surat, Paulus memberikan berkat. Gunakanlah bentuk yang dapat dikenali orang sebagai berkat dalam bahasa Anda. Terjemahan alternatif: “Semoga Allah Bapa kita dan Tuhan Yesus Kristus memberikan kasih karunia dan damai sejahtera kepadamu.” +1:3 iv7e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη, ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ. 1 Jika akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat mengekspresikan ide di balik kata benda abstrak **Anugerah** dan **Damai** dengan kata sifat seperti “ramah” dan “ kedamaian.” Terjemahan alternatif: “Semoga Allah Bapa kita dan Tuhan kita Yesus Kristus bermurah hati kepadamu dan membuatmu damai sejahtera” 1:3 e5z8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν & ἡμῶν 1 Kata **kita** di sini bersifat inklusif, merujuk kepada Paulus, mereka yang bersamanya, dan pembaca. -1:3 qglx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ὑμῖν 1 Di sini, **mu** berbentuk jamak, merujuk kepada semua penerima yang disebutkan dalam ayat 1-2. +1:3 qglx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular ὑμῖν 1 Di sini, **kamu** berbentuk jamak, merujuk kepada semua penerima yang disebutkan dalam ayat 1-2. 1:3 lh8a rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατρὸς 1 **Bapa** adalah gelar yang penting bagi Allah. -1:4 puh8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular σου 1 Di sini, kata **engkau** berbentuk tunggal dan merujuk pada Filemon. -1:5 l3i2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀκούων σου τὴν ἀγάπην καὶ τὴν πίστιν, ἣν ἔχεις πρὸς τὸν Κύριον Ἰησοῦν, καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς ἁγίους 1 Jika itu akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat mengekspresikan kata benda abstrak **kasih** dan **iman** dengan menyatakan ide di baliknya dengan kata kerja. Terjemahan alternatif: "mendengar betapa kamu mengasihi dan percaya kepada Tuhan Yesus dan semua orang kudus" -1:5 ojcu rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry ἀκούων σου τὴν ἀγάπην καὶ τὴν πίστιν, ἣν ἔχεις πρὸς τὸν Κύριον Ἰησοῦν, καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς ἁγίους 1 Paulus menggunakan struktur puisi di sini, di mana bagian pertama dan terakhir saling berkaitan dan bagian kedua dan ketiga saling berhubungan. Oleh karena itu, maknanya adalah: "mendengar tentang iman yang kamu miliki di dalam Tuhan Yesus dan tentang kasihmu kepada semua orang kudus." Paulus mengatakan hal ini dengan tepat di Kolose 1:4 tanpa struktur puitis. -1:5 pf1y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular σου & ἔχεις 1 Di sini, kata **mu** dan **engkau** adalah bentuk tunggal dan merujuk pada Filemon. -1:6 mfrp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὅπως 1 Di sini, **supaya** memperkenalkan isi doa yang Paulus sebutkan dalam ayat 4. Jika akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat mengulangi gagasan tentang doa di sini. Terjemahan alternatif: "Aku berdoa supaya" -1:6 t54l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ κοινωνία τῆς πίστεώς σου 1 Kata yang diterjemahkan **persekutuan** berarti berbagi atau bermitra dalam sesuatu. Paulus mungkin bermaksud untuk kedua arti tersebut, tetapi jika harus memilih, ini dapat berarti: (1) bahwa Filemon memiliki iman yang sama kepada Kristus seperti Paulus dan yang lainnya. Terjemahan alternatif: "iman yang engkau bagi dengan kami" (2) bahwa Filemon adalah rekan sekerja Paulus dan yang lainnya dalam bekerja bagi Kristus. Terjemahan alternatif: "pekerjaanmu yang bekerja sama dengan kami sebagai orang percaya" -1:6 hcwp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ κοινωνία τῆς πίστεώς σου, ἐνεργὴς γένηται ἐν ἐπιγνώσει παντὸς ἀγαθοῦ τοῦ ἐν ἡμῖν εἰς Χριστόν. 1 Jika akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat mengekspresikan ide di balik kata benda abstrak **iman** dengan kata kerja seperti "percaya" atau "keyakinan", dan di balik **pengetahuan** dengan kata kerja seperti "tahu" atau "belajar". Terjemahan alternatif: "Saat Anda percaya kepada Mesias bersama kami, Anda dapat menjadi semakin baik dalam melayani Mesias, saat Anda belajar tentang semua hal baik yang telah Dia berikan kepada kita untuk digunakan bagi-Nya" -1:6 pxw1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἐπιγνώσει παντὸς ἀγαθοῦ 1 Ini bisa berarti: (1) "dan akan mengakibatkan kamu mengetahui segala sesuatu yang baik" (2) "sehingga mereka yang berbagi iman dengan kamu akan mengetahui segala sesuatu yang baik" Terjemahan alternatif: "dengan mengetahui segala sesuatu yang baik" -1:6 n25e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς Χριστόν 1 Jika itu akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat menyatakan secara eksplisit bagaimana "semua hal yang baik" adalah **untuk Kristus**. Terjemahan alternatif: "demi Kristus" atau "demi kepentingan Kristus" -1:7 vyc7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns χαρὰν γὰρ πολλὴν ἔσχον καὶ παράκλησιν 1 Jika akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat mengekspresikan ide di balik kata benda abstrak **sukacita** dan **penghiburan** dengan kata sifat. Terjemahan alternatif: "Karena Engkau membuatku sangat gembira dan terhibur" -1:7 xlp6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ τῇ ἀγάπῃ σου 1 Jika akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat mengekspresikan ide di balik kata benda abstrak **kasih** dengan kata kerja. Terjemahan alternatif: "karena kamu mengasihi orang lain" -1:7 shpv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὰ σπλάγχνα τῶν ἁγίων ἀναπέπαυται διὰ σοῦ 1 Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan bentuk pasif ini, Anda dapat menyatakannya dalam bentuk aktif. Terjemahan alternatif: "Engkau telah menyegarkan bagian dalam dari orang-orang kudus" -1:7 aq4g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὰ σπλάγχνα τῶν ἁγίων 1 Di sini, **batin** mengacu ke emosi atau batin seseorang. Gunakan istilah yang lazim dalam bahasa Anda untuk hal ini, seperti "hati" atau "hati", atau berikan arti yang sederhana. Terjemahan alternatif: "pikiran dan perasaan orang-orang kudus" -1:7 z0ne rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὰ σπλάγχνα τῶν ἁγίων ἀναπέπαυται διὰ σοῦ 1 Di sini, **telah disegarkan** mengacu ke perasaan yang menggembirakan atau melegakan. Terjemahan alternatif: "Engkau telah memberi semangat kepada orang-orang kudus" atau "Engkau telah menolong orang-orang percaya" -1:7 m5ip rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σοῦ, ἀδελφέ 1 Paulus memanggil Filemon dengan sebutan **saudara** karena mereka berdua adalah orang percaya, dan ia ingin menekankan persahabatan mereka. Terjemahan alternatif: "engkau, saudara" atau "engkau, teman" -1:8 ayy1 Connecting Statement: 0 # Pernyataan Penghubung: \r\n\r\nPaulus memulai permohonannya dan alasan mengapa ia menulis surat ini. -1:8 fd84 πολλὴν ἐν Χριστῷ παρρησίαν 1 Ini dapat berarti: (1) "segala kuasa karena Kristus" (2) "segala keberanian karena Kristus." -1:8 x3nc rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διό 1 Kata **Karena itu** menandakan bahwa apa yang baru saja Paulus katakan dalam ayat 4-7 adalah alasan dari apa yang akan dia katakan. Gunakan kata penghubung atau cara lain yang biasa digunakan dalam bahasa Anda untuk menandakan hubungan ini. Terjemahan alternatif: "Karena itu" -1:9 l9fh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns διὰ τὴν ἀγάπην 1 Paulus tidak mengatakan untuk siapa **kasih** ini. Jika kita perlu menggunakan kata kerja di sini dan mengatakan siapa yang mengasihi siapa, maka hal ini dapat merujuk pada (1) kasih timbal balik antara dia dan Filemon. Lihat UST. (2) kasih Paulus kepada Filemon. Terjemahan alternatif: "karena aku mengasihi engkau" (3) kasih Filemon kepada sesama orang percaya. Terjemahan alternatif: "karena aku tahu bahwa engkau mengasihi umat Allah" -1:9 sb31 δέσμιος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 Paulus dipenjara karena orang-orang yang berkuasa tidak ingin dia berkhotbah tentang Yesus. Mereka memenjarakannya untuk menghentikan dan menghukumnya. Ini tidak berarti bahwa Yesus yang memenjarakan Paulus. Terjemahan alternatif: "seorang tahanan karena Kristus Yesus" -1:10 lsr6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ὀνήσιμον 1 **Onesimus** adalah nama seorang laki-laki. -1:10 hnhz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Ὀνήσιμον 1 Nama **Onesimus** berarti "menguntungkan" atau "berguna". Jika akan bermanfaat bagi pembaca Anda, Anda dapat menyertakan informasi ini dalam teks atau catatan kaki. -1:10 mui3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὃν ἐγέννησα 1 Di sini, **kuperanakkan** adalah sebuah metafora yang berarti bahwa Onesimus menjadi orang percaya ketika Paulus mengajarnya tentang Kristus. Terjemahan alternatif: "yang menerima hidup baru dan menjadi anak rohani saya ketika saya mengajar dia tentang Kristus" atau "yang menjadi anak rohani bagi saya" -1:10 nx1p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν τοῖς δεσμοῖς 1 Para tahanan sering kali diikat dengan **belenggu**. Paulus dipenjara ketika ia mengajar Onesimus dan masih dipenjara ketika ia menulis surat ini. Terjemahan alternatif: "di sini di dalam penjara" +1:4 puh8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular σου 1 Di sini, kata **kamu** berbentuk tunggal dan merujuk pada Filemon. +1:5 l3i2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀκούων σου τὴν ἀγάπην καὶ τὴν πίστιν, ἣν ἔχεις πρὸς τὸν Κύριον Ἰησοῦν, καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς ἁγίους 1 Jika itu akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat mengekspresikan kata benda abstrak **kasih** dan **iman** dengan menyatakan ide di baliknya dengan kata kerja. Terjemahan alternatif: “mendengar betapa kamu mengasihi dan percaya kepada Tuhan Yesus dan semua orang kudus” +1:5 ojcu rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry ἀκούων σου τὴν ἀγάπην καὶ τὴν πίστιν, ἣν ἔχεις πρὸς τὸν Κύριον Ἰησοῦν, καὶ εἰς πάντας τοὺς ἁγίους 1 Paulus menggunakan struktur puitis di sini, di mana bagian pertama dan terakhir saling berkaitan dan bagian kedua dan ketiga saling berhubungan. Oleh karena itu, maknanya adalah: “mendengar tentang iman yang kamu miliki di dalam Tuhan Yesus dan tentang kasihmu kepada semua orang kudus.” Paulus mengatakan hal ini dengan tepat di Kolose 1:4 tanpa struktur puitis. +1:5 pf1y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular σου & ἔχεις 1 Di sini, kata **Anda** dan **Kamu** adalah bentuk tunggal dan merujuk pada Filemon. +1:6 mfrp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὅπως 1 Di sini, **itu** memperkenalkan isi doa yang Paulus sebutkan dalam ayat 4. Jika akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat mengulangi gagasan tentang doa di sini. Terjemahan alternatif: “Aku berdoa supaya” +1:6 t54l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ κοινωνία τῆς πίστεώς σου 1 Kata yang diterjemahkan “persekutuan” berarti berbagi atau bermitra dalam sesuatu. Paulus mungkin bermaksud untuk kedua arti tersebut, tetapi jika harus memilih, ini dapat berarti: (1) bahwa Filemon memiliki iman yang sama kepada Kristus seperti Paulus dan yang lainnya. Terjemahan alternatif: “iman yang engkau bagi dengan kami” (2) bahwa Filemon adalah rekan sekerja Paulus dan yang lainnya dalam bekerja bagi Kristus. Terjemahan alternatif: “pekerjaanmu yang bekerja sama dengan kami sebagai orang percaya” +1:6 hcwp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ κοινωνία τῆς πίστεώς σου, ἐνεργὴς γένηται ἐν ἐπιγνώσει παντὸς ἀγαθοῦ τοῦ ἐν ἡμῖν εἰς Χριστόν. 1 Jika akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat mengekspresikan ide di balik kata benda abstrak **iman** dengan kata kerja seperti “ mempercayai” atau “ meyakini,” dan di balik **pengetahuan** dengan kata kerja seperti “ mengetahui” atau “ mempelajari.” Terjemahan alternatif: “Saat Anda percaya kepada Mesias bersama kami, Anda dapat menjadi semakin baik dalam melayani Mesias, saat Anda belajar tentang semua hal baik yang telah Dia berikan kepada kita untuk digunakan bagi-Nya” +1:6 pxw1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἐπιγνώσει παντὸς ἀγαθοῦ 1 Ini bisa berarti: (1) “dan akan mengakibatkan kamu mengetahui segala sesuatu yang baik” (2) “sehingga mereka yang berbagi iman dengan kamu akan mengetahui segala sesuatu yang baik” Terjemahan alternatif: “dengan mengetahui segala sesuatu yang baik” +1:6 n25e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς Χριστόν 1 Jika itu akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat menyatakan secara eksplisit bagaimana “segala sesuatu yang baik” adalah “bagi Kristus”. Terjemahan alternatif: “demi Kristus” atau ”demi kepentingan Kristus” +1:7 vyc7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns χαρὰν γὰρ πολλὴν ἔσχον καὶ παράκλησιν 1 Jika akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat mengekspresikan ide di balik kata benda abstrak **senang** dan **nyaman** dengan kata sifat. Terjemahan alternatif: “Karena Engkau membuatku sangat gembira dan terhibur” +1:7 xlp6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ τῇ ἀγάπῃ σου 1 Jika akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat mengekspresikan ide di balik kata benda abstrak **kasih** dengan kata kerja. Terjemahan alternatif: “karena kamu mencintai orang-orang” +1:7 shpv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὰ σπλάγχνα τῶν ἁγίων ἀναπέπαυται διὰ σοῦ 1 Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan bentuk pasif ini, Anda dapat menyatakannya dalam bentuk aktif. Terjemahan alternatif: “Engkau telah menyegarkan bagian dalam orang-orang kudus” +1:7 aq4g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὰ σπλάγχνα τῶν ἁγίων 1 Di sini, **bagian dalam** mengacu ke emosi atau batin seseorang. Gunakan istilah yang lazim dalam bahasa Anda untuk hal ini, seperti “hati” atau “hati”, atau berikan arti yang sebenarnya. Terjemahan alternatif: “pikiran dan perasaan orang-orang kudus” +1:7 z0ne rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὰ σπλάγχνα τῶν ἁγίων ἀναπέπαυται διὰ σοῦ 1 Di sini, **disegarkan** mengacu ke perasaan yang menggembirakan atau melegakan. Terjemahan alternatif: “Engkau telah memberi semangat kepada orang-orang kudus” atau ”Engkau telah menolong orang-orang percaya” +1:7 m5ip rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σοῦ, ἀδελφέ 1 Paulus memanggil Filemon dengan sebutan “saudara” karena mereka berdua adalah orang percaya, dan ia ingin menekankan persahabatan mereka. Terjemahan alternatif: “kamu, saudara” atau “kamu, sahabat terkasih” +1:8 ayy1 Connecting Statement: 0 # Pernyataan Penghubung:\n\nPaulus memulai permohonannya dan alasan mengapa ia menulis surat ini. +1:8 fd84 πολλὴν ἐν Χριστῷ παρρησίαν 1 Ini dapat berarti: (1) “segala kuasa karena Kristus” (2) “segala keberanian karena Kristus.” +1:8 x3nc rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διό 1 Kata **Karena itu** menandakan bahwa apa yang baru saja Paulus katakan dalam ayat 4-7 adalah alasan dari apa yang akan dia katakan. Gunakan kata penghubung atau cara lain yang biasa digunakan dalam bahasa Anda untuk menandakan hubungan ini. Terjemahan alternatif: “Karena itu” +1:9 l9fh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns διὰ τὴν ἀγάπην 1 Paulus tidak mengatakan untuk siapa “mengasihi” ini. Jika kita perlu menggunakan kata kerja di sini dan mengatakan siapa yang mengasihi siapa, maka hal ini dapat merujuk pada (1) kasih timbal balik antara dia dan Filemon. Lihat UST. (2) kasih Paulus kepada Filemon. Terjemahan alternatif: “karena aku mengasihi engkau” (3) kasih Filemon kepada sesama orang percaya. Terjemahan alternatif: “karena aku tahu bahwa engkau mengasihi umat Allah” +1:9 sb31 δέσμιος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 Paulus dipenjara karena orang-orang yang berkuasa tidak ingin dia berkhotbah tentang Yesus. Mereka memenjarakannya untuk menghentikan dan menghukumnya. Ini tidak berarti bahwa Yesus yang memenjarakan Paulus. Terjemahan alternatif: “seorang tahanan karena Kristus Yesus” +1:10 lsr6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ὀνήσιμον 1 **Onesimus** adalah nama seorang pria. +1:10 hnhz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Ὀνήσιμον 1 Nama **Onesimus** berarti “menguntungkan” atau “berguna”. Jika akan bermanfaat bagi pembaca Anda, Anda dapat menyertakan informasi ini dalam teks atau catatan kaki. +1:10 mui3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὃν ἐγέννησα 1 Di sini, **membimbing** adalah sebuah metafora yang berarti bahwa Onesimus menjadi orang percaya ketika Paulus mengajarnya tentang Kristus. Terjemahan alternatif: “yang menerima hidup baru dan menjadi anak rohani saya ketika saya mengajar dia tentang Kristus” atau ”yang menjadi anak rohani bagi saya” +1:10 nx1p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν τοῖς δεσμοῖς 1 Para tahanan sering kali diikat dengan **rantai**. Paulus dipenjara ketika ia mengajar Onesimus dan masih dipenjara ketika ia menulis surat ini. Terjemahan alternatif: “di sini di dalam penjara” 1:12 t1kp ὃν ἀνέπεμψά σοι 1 Paulus mungkin mengirim Onesimus bersama dengan orang percaya lain yang membawa surat ini. -1:12 fdwn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοῦτ’ ἔστιν τὰ ἐμὰ σπλάγχνα 1 Frasa **dia, yang adalah buah hatiku** adalah sebuah metafora untuk perasaan yang mendalam tentang seseorang. Paulus mengatakan hal ini tentang Onesimus. Terjemahan alternatif: "ini adalah orang yang sangat saya kasihi" atau "orang ini sangat istimewa bagi saya" -1:12 yn1d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὰ ἐμὰ σπλάγχνα 1 Di sini, **hati** adalah kiasan untuk tempat emosi seseorang. Jika bahasa Anda memiliki kiasan yang serupa, gunakanlah itu. Jika tidak, gunakan bahasa yang biasa. Terjemahan alternatif: "hatiku" atau "hatiku" atau "perasaanku yang terdalam" -1:13 t4xl ἵνα ὑπὲρ σοῦ μοι διακονῇ 1 Paulus tahu bahwa Filemon ingin menolongnya, dan karena itu ia menyarankan agar Onesimus melayani Paulus di penjara. Terjemahan alternatif: "supaya, karena engkau tidak dapat hadir di sini, ia dapat menolong aku" atau "supaya ia dapat menolong aku menggantikan engkau" +1:12 fdwn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοῦτ’ ἔστιν τὰ ἐμὰ σπλάγχνα 1 Frasa **ini adalah bagian batinku** adalah sebuah metafora untuk perasaan yang mendalam tentang seseorang. Paulus mengatakan hal ini tentang Onesimus. Terjemahan alternatif: “ini adalah orang yang sangat saya kasihi” atau ”orang ini sangat istimewa bagi saya” +1:12 yn1d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὰ ἐμὰ σπλάγχνα 1 Di sini, **bagian dalam** adalah kiasan untuk tempat emosi seseorang. Jika bahasa Anda memiliki kiasan yang serupa, gunakanlah itu. Jika tidak, gunakan bahasa yang biasa. Terjemahan alternatif: “hatiku” atau ‘hatiku’ atau ”perasaanku yang terdalam” +1:13 t4xl ἵνα ὑπὲρ σοῦ μοι διακονῇ 1 Paulus tahu bahwa Filemon ingin menolongnya, dan karena itu ia menyarankan agar Onesimus melayani Paulus di penjara. Terjemahan alternatif: “supaya, karena engkau tidak dapat hadir di sini, ia dapat menolong aku” atau ”supaya ia dapat menolong aku menggantikan engkau” 1:13 bb3t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν τοῖς δεσμοῖς 1 Para tahanan sering kali diikat dengan rantai. Paulus berada di dalam penjara ketika ia memberi tahu Onesimus tentang Mesias, dan ia masih berada di dalam penjara ketika ia menulis surat ini. -1:13 vver rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τοῖς δεσμοῖς τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 Paulus dipenjara karena ia memberitakan **Injil** di depan umum. Anda dapat menyatakan hal ini secara eksplisit. Terjemahan alternatif: "dalam belenggu yang mereka kenakan kepadaku karena aku memberitakan Injil" -1:14 ngg8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἵνα μὴ ὡς κατὰ ἀνάγκην τὸ ἀγαθόν σου ᾖ 1 Jika akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat mengekspresikan ide di balik kata benda abstrak **paksaan** dengan kata kerja. Terjemahan alternatif: "karena Aku tidak ingin kamu melakukan perbuatan baik ini karena Aku telah memerintahkan kamu untuk melakukannya" -1:14 fg6l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀλλὰ κατὰ ἑκούσιον. 1 Jika akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat mengekspresikan ide di balik kata benda abstrak **niat baik** dengan kata kerja. Terjemahan alternatif: "tapi karena kamu ingin melakukannya" atau "tapi karena kamu dengan bebas memilih untuk melakukan hal yang benar" -1:15 tcrd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τάχα γὰρ διὰ τοῦτο, ἐχωρίσθη πρὸς ὥραν, ἵνα 1 Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan bentuk pasif ini, Anda dapat menyatakannya dalam bentuk aktif. Terjemahan alternatif: "Karena mungkin alasan Allah mengambil Onesimus dari padamu untuk sementara waktu adalah supaya" -1:15 bx4q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom πρὸς ὥραν 1 Di sini, frasa **untuk sesaat** adalah idiom yang berarti "untuk waktu yang singkat." Jika akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat menggunakan idiom yang setara atau menggunakan bahasa biasa. Terjemahan alternatif: "untuk waktu yang singkat ini" -1:16 l3e4 ὑπὲρ δοῦλον 1 Terjemahan alternatif: "lebih berharga dari seorang budak" atau "lebih disayangi dari seorang budak" -1:16 dg1w οὐκέτι ὡς δοῦλον 1 Ini tidak berarti bahwa Onesimus tidak akan lagi menjadi **budak** Filemon. Jika itu akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat menggunakan kata seperti "saja" atau "hanya". Terjemahan alternatif: "tidak lagi hanya sebagai budak" -1:16 bynb ὑπὲρ δοῦλον 1 Terjemahan alternatif: "lebih berharga daripada seorang budak" -1:16 f8tz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀδελφὸν ἀγαπητόν 1 Di sini, **saudara** adalah metafora untuk sesama orang percaya. Terjemahan alternatif, "saudara rohani yang dikasihi" atau "saudara yang kita kasihi di dalam Kristus" -1:16 qxi0 ἀγαπητόν 1 Terjemahan alternatif: "terkasih" atau "berharga" -1:16 scj1 ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 Terjemahan alternatif: "dalam persekutuan persaudaraan melalui Yesus" atau "dalam persekutuan orang-orang percaya di dalam Tuhan" -1:17 e1j2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ & με ἔχεις κοινωνόν 1 Paulus menulis dengan cara yang membuat seolah-olah Filemon tidak menganggap Paulus sebagai rekannya, tetapi ia tahu bahwa Filemon menganggap Paulus sebagai rekannya. Ini adalah cara untuk membuat Filemon menyetujui satu hal (bahwa Paulus adalah rekannya) sehingga ia akan menyetujui hal lainnya (menerima Onesimus). Jika bahasa Anda tidak menyatakan sesuatu sebagai sesuatu yang tidak pasti apakah itu pasti atau benar, dan jika pembaca Anda mungkin berpikir bahwa apa yang Paulus katakan tidak pasti, maka Anda dapat menerjemahkan kata-katanya sebagai pernyataan yang menegaskan. Terjemahan alternatif: "karena engkau memiliki aku sebagai pasanganmu" -1:17 e0es rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 **Karena itu** berarti bahwa apa yang terjadi sebelum kata ini menjadi alasan untuk apa yang terjadi setelahnya. Bisa jadi Paulus bermaksud agar segala sesuatu yang datang sebelumnya menjadi alasannya, karena kata ini juga mengindikasikan bahwa Paulus sekarang sampai pada poin utama dari surat ini. Gunakan metode yang wajar dalam bahasa Anda untuk menunjukkan transisi ini. Terjemahan alternatif: "Karena semua hal ini" -1:17 d56r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis προσλαβοῦ αὐτὸν ὡς ἐμέ. 1 Paulus meninggalkan beberapa kata di sini yang dibutuhkan oleh sebuah kalimat dalam banyak bahasa untuk menjadi lengkap. Jika itu akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat menyediakan kata-kata ini dari konteksnya. Terjemahan alternatif: "terimalah dia sama seperti kamu menerima aku" -1:18 nq4j rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ δέ τι ἠδίκησέν σε ἢ ὀφείλει 1 Onesimus tentu saja melakukan kesalahan terhadap Filemon dengan melarikan diri, dan dia mungkin juga mencuri sebagian harta benda Filemon. Tetapi Paulus menyatakan hal-hal ini sebagai sesuatu yang tidak pasti untuk bersikap sopan. Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan pernyataan bersyarat seperti ini, maka gunakanlah cara yang lebih alamiah untuk menyatakannya. Terjemahan alternatif: "Tetapi apa pun yang telah diambilnya atau kesalahan apa pun yang telah dilakukannya kepadamu" -1:18 w4ys εἰ δέ τι ἠδίκησέν σε ἢ ὀφείλει 1 Kedua frasa ini memiliki arti yang sama, meskipun **telah berbuat salah kepadamu** lebih umum daripada **berhutang apa pun {padamu}**. Jika ingin lebih alami dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat meletakkan frasa yang lebih umum di urutan kedua. Terjemahan alternatif: "Tapi jika dia berhutang sesuatu atau bersalah padamu dengan cara apa pun" -1:18 j3ou τοῦτο ἐμοὶ ἐλλόγα. 1 Terjemahan alternatif: "Saya akan bertanggung jawab untuk membayar Anda" atau "katakanlah bahwa sayalah yang berhutang kepada Anda" -1:19 wb53 ἐγὼ Παῦλος ἔγραψα τῇ ἐμῇ χειρί 1 Paulus menulis bagian ini dengan "tangan ku sendiri" supaya Filemon tahu bahwa kata-kata ini benar-benar berasal dari Paulus, dan bahwa Paulus benar-benar akan membayarnya. Ia menggunakan bentuk lampau di sini karena tindakan menulisnya terjadi di masa lampau ketika Filemon membaca surat itu. Gunakanlah bentuk kata kerja yang paling alami dalam bahasa Anda. Terjemahan alternatif: "Aku, Paulus, menulis surat ini sendiri." -1:19 gn6c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony ἵνα μὴ λέγω σοι 1 Paulus mengatakan bahwa ia tidak akan mengatakan sesuatu kepada Filemon ketika mengatakannya. Ini adalah cara yang sopan untuk menekankan kebenaran dari apa yang Paulus katakan. Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan ironi seperti ini, gunakanlah ungkapan yang lebih alami. Terjemahan alternatif: "Saya tidak perlu mengingatkanmu" atau "Kamu sudah tahu" -1:19 st7e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ σεαυτόν μοι προσοφείλεις 1 Paulus menyiratkan bahwa apa pun yang menjadi utang Onesimus atau Paulus kepada Filemon telah dibatalkan oleh jumlah yang lebih besar yang menjadi utang Filemon kepada Paulus, yaitu nyawa Filemon sendiri. Alasan mengapa Filemon berhutang nyawa kepada Paulus dapat dijelaskan secara eksplisit. Terjemahan alternatif: "Kamu bahkan berhutang nyawa kepadaku" atau "kamu berhutang lebih banyak lagi kepadaku karena aku telah menyelamatkan nyawamu" atau "kamu berhutang nyawa kepadaku karena aku telah memberitahukan kepadamu tentang Yesus" -1:20 mw03 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀδελφέ 1 Di sini, **saudaraku** adalah metafora untuk sesama orang percaya. Terjemahan alternatif: "saudara rohani" atau "saudara di dalam Kristus" -1:20 cqd0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 Perhatikan bagaimana Anda menerjemahkan kata **dalam Tuhan** dalam ayat 16. Metafora ini mengacu pada menjadi orang percaya kepada Yesus dan artinya sama dengan **di dalam Kristus**. Terjemahan alternatif: "sebagaimana kamu melayani Tuhan" atau "karena kita adalah sesama orang percaya di dalam Tuhan" -1:20 xp0b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀνάπαυσόν μου τὰ σπλάγχνα ἐν Χριστῷ 1 Bagaimana Paulus ingin Filemon menyegarkan dirinya dapat dilihat secara eksplisit. Terjemahan alternatif: "Segarkanlah batin saya di dalam Kristus dengan menerima Onesimus dengan baik" -1:20 j8lh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀνάπαυσόν μου τὰ σπλάγχνα 1 Di sini, **segarkanlah** adalah metafora untuk menghibur atau menyemangati. Terjemahan alternatif: "menyemangati saya" atau "menghibur saya" -1:20 kmpp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀνάπαυσόν μου τὰ σπλάγχνα 1 Di sini, **batin** adalah metonim untuk perasaan, pikiran, atau batin seseorang. Terjemahan alternatif: "doronglah aku" atau "hiburlah aku" -1:21 azje rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πεποιθὼς τῇ ὑπακοῇ σου 1 Jika akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat mengekspresikan ide di balik kata benda abstrak **yakin** dan **ketaatan** dengan kata kerja. Terjemahan alternatif: "Karena saya yakin bahwa Anda akan taat" -1:21 lxxi ἔγραψά σοι 1 Paulus menggunakan bentuk lampau di sini karena tindakan menulisnya terjadi di masa lalu ketika Filemon membaca suratnya. Gunakan bentuk kata kerja yang paling alami dalam bahasa Anda. Terjemahan alternatif: "Aku menulis kepadamu" -1:22 xpn6 rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings Connecting Statement: 0 # Pernyataan Penghubung: Di sini Paulus menutup suratnya dan memberikan instruksi terakhir kepada Filemon serta berkat bagi Filemon dan orang-orang percaya yang berkumpul untuk beribadah di rumah Filemon. Jika Anda menggunakan judul bagian, Anda dapat meletakkannya di sini sebelum ayat 22. Judul yang disarankan: "Instruksi dan Berkat Terakhir" -1:22 bx62 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ἅμα 1 Kata yang diterjemahkan **pada saat yang sama** menunjukkan bahwa Paulus ingin Filemon melakukan sesuatu yang lain untuknya sementara ia melakukan hal yang pertama. Anda dapat memperjelas hal ini dalam terjemahan Anda dengan kata atau frasa penghubung yang tepat. Terjemahan alternatif: "sambil melakukan hal itu" atau "sebagai tambahan untuk itu" -1:22 ctr4 χαρισθήσομαι ὑμῖν 1 Terjemahan alternatif: "Mereka yang menahan saya di penjara akan membebaskan saya sehingga saya dapat pergi kepada mu." -1:22 mzr0 ἑτοίμαζέ μοι ξενίαν 1 Kata yang diterjemahkan **kamar tamu** mengacu pada setiap keramahan yang disediakan untuk tamu. Jadi, jenis ruangnya tidak ditentukan. Terjemahan alternatif: "Siapkan juga sebuah tempat di rumahmu untukku." -1:22 lnw9 διὰ τῶν προσευχῶν ὑμῶν 1 Terjemahan alternatif: "Allah akan menjawab doa-doamu sehingga..." -1:22 p2u0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive χαρισθήσομαι ὑμῖν. 1 Jika akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat mengekspresikannya secara eksplisit dengan bentuk aktif. Terjemahan alternatif: "Allah akan membawa saya kembali kepada-mu" atau "mereka yang menahan saya di dalam penjara akan membebaskan saya sehingga saya dapat datang kepada mu." -1:22 o06s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ὑμῶν & ὑμῖν 1 Kata **kalian** dan **kalian** di sini berbentuk jamak, merujuk kepada Filemon dan semua orang percaya yang bertemu di rumahnya. +1:13 vver rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τοῖς δεσμοῖς τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 Paulus dipenjara karena ia memberitakan Injil di depan umum. Anda dapat menyatakan hal ini secara eksplisit. Terjemahan alternatif: “dalam belenggu yang mereka kenakan kepadaku karena aku memberitakan Injil” +1:14 ngg8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἵνα μὴ ὡς κατὰ ἀνάγκην τὸ ἀγαθόν σου ᾖ 1 Jika akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat mengekspresikan ide di balik kata benda abstrak **keharusan** dengan kata kerja. Terjemahan alternatif: “karena Aku tidak ingin kamu melakukan perbuatan baik ini karena Aku telah memerintahkan kamu untuk melakukannya” +1:14 fg6l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀλλὰ κατὰ ἑκούσιον. 1 Jika akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat mengekspresikan ide di balik kata benda abstrak **kehendak** dengan kata kerja. Terjemahan alternatif: “tapi karena kamu ingin melakukannya” atau ”tapi karena kamu dengan bebas memilih untuk melakukan hal yang benar” +1:15 tcrd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τάχα γὰρ διὰ τοῦτο, ἐχωρίσθη πρὸς ὥραν, ἵνα 1 Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan bentuk pasif ini, Anda dapat menyatakannya dalam bentuk aktif. Terjemahan alternatif: “Karena mungkin alasan Allah mengambil Onesimus dari padamu untuk sementara waktu adalah supaya” +1:15 bx4q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom πρὸς ὥραν 1 Di sini, frasa **selama satu jam** adalah idiom yang berarti “untuk waktu yang singkat.” Jika akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat menggunakan idiom yang setara atau menggunakan bahasa biasa. Terjemahan alternatif: “untuk waktu yang singkat ini” +1:16 l3e4 ὑπὲρ δοῦλον 1 Terjemahan alternatif: “lebih berharga dari seorang budak” atau ”lebih disayangi dari seorang budak” +1:16 dg1w οὐκέτι ὡς δοῦλον 1 Ini tidak berarti bahwa Onesimus tidak akan lagi menjadi **budak** Filemon. Jika itu akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat menggunakan kata seperti “ saja” atau “hanya”. Terjemahan alternatif: “tidak lagi hanya sebagai budak” +1:16 bynb ὑπὲρ δοῦλον 1 Terjemahan alternatif: “lebih berharga daripada seorang budak” +1:16 f8tz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀδελφὸν ἀγαπητόν 1 Di sini, **saudara** adalah metafora untuk sesama orang percaya. Terjemahan alternatif, “saudara rohani yang dikasihi” atau “saudara yang kita kasihi di dalam Kristus” +1:16 qxi0 ἀγαπητόν 1 Terjemahan alternatif: “ terkasih” atau “berharga” +1:16 scj1 ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 Terjemahan alternatif: “dalam persekutuan persaudaraan melalui Yesus” atau ”dalam persekutuan orang-orang percaya di dalam Tuhan” +1:17 e1j2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ & με ἔχεις κοινωνόν 1 Paulus menulis dengan cara yang membuat seolah-olah Filemon tidak menganggap Paulus sebagai rekannya, tetapi ia tahu bahwa Filemon menganggap Paulus sebagai rekannya. Ini adalah cara untuk membuat Filemon menyetujui satu hal (bahwa Paulus adalah rekannya) sehingga ia akan menyetujui hal lainnya (menerima Onesimus). Jika bahasa Anda tidak menyatakan sesuatu sebagai sesuatu yang tidak pasti apakah itu pasti atau benar, dan jika pembaca Anda mungkin berpikir bahwa apa yang Paulus katakan tidak pasti, maka Anda dapat menerjemahkan kata-katanya sebagai pernyataan yang menegaskan. Terjemahan alternatif: “karena engkau memiliki aku sebagai pasanganmu” +1:17 e0es rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Oleh karena itu, **Karena itu** berarti bahwa apa yang terjadi sebelum kata ini menjadi alasan untuk apa yang terjadi setelahnya. Bisa jadi Paulus bermaksud agar segala sesuatu yang datang sebelumnya menjadi alasannya, karena kata ini juga mengindikasikan bahwa Paulus sekarang sampai pada poin utama dari surat ini. Gunakan metode yang wajar dalam bahasa Anda untuk menunjukkan transisi ini. Terjemahan alternatif: “Karena semua hal ini” +1:17 d56r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis προσλαβοῦ αὐτὸν ὡς ἐμέ. 1 Paulus meninggalkan beberapa kata di sini yang dibutuhkan oleh sebuah kalimat dalam banyak bahasa untuk menjadi lengkap. Jika itu akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat menyediakan kata-kata ini dari konteksnya. Terjemahan alternatif: “terimalah dia sama seperti kamu menerima aku” +1:18 nq4j rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ δέ τι ἠδίκησέν σε ἢ ὀφείλει 1 Onesimus tentu saja melakukan kesalahan terhadap Filemon dengan melarikan diri, dan dia mungkin juga mencuri sebagian harta benda Filemon. Tetapi Paulus menyatakan hal-hal ini sebagai sesuatu yang tidak pasti untuk bersikap sopan. Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan pernyataan bersyarat seperti ini, maka gunakanlah cara yang lebih alamiah untuk menyatakannya. Terjemahan alternatif: “Tetapi apa pun yang telah diambilnya atau kesalahan apa pun yang telah dilakukannya kepadamu” +1:18 w4ys εἰ δέ τι ἠδίκησέν σε ἢ ὀφείλει 1 Kedua frasa ini memiliki arti yang sama, meskipun **merugikan Anda** lebih umum daripada **berutang budi pada Anda. Jika ingin lebih alami dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat meletakkan frasa yang lebih umum di urutan kedua. Terjemahan alternatif: “Tapi jika dia berhutang sesuatu atau bersalah padamu dengan cara apa pun” +1:18 j3ou τοῦτο ἐμοὶ ἐλλόγα. 1 Terjemahan alternatif: “ Aku akan bertanggung jawab untuk melunasi hutangmu” atau “katakanlah bahwa akulah yang berhutang padamu” +1:19 wb53 ἐγὼ Παῦλος ἔγραψα τῇ ἐμῇ χειρί 1 Paulus menulis bagian ini dengan “tangannya sendiri” supaya Filemon tahu bahwa kata-kata ini benar-benar berasal dari Paulus, dan bahwa Paulus benar-benar akan membayarnya. Dia menggunakan bentuk lampau di sini karena tindakan menulisnya terjadi di masa lampau ketika Filemon membaca surat itu. Gunakanlah bentuk kata kerja yang paling alami dalam bahasa Anda. Terjemahan alternatif: “Aku, Paulus, menulis surat ini sendiri.” +1:19 gn6c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony ἵνα μὴ λέγω σοι 1 Paulus mengatakan bahwa ia tidak akan mengatakan sesuatu kepada Filemon ketika mengatakannya. Ini adalah cara yang sopan untuk menekankan kebenaran dari apa yang Paulus katakan. Jika bahasa Anda tidak menggunakan ironi seperti ini, gunakanlah ungkapan yang lebih alami. Terjemahan alternatif: “Saya tidak perlu mengingatkanmu” atau ”Kamu sudah tahu” +1:19 st7e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ σεαυτόν μοι προσοφείλεις 1 Paulus menyiratkan bahwa apa pun yang menjadi utang Onesimus atau Paulus kepada Filemon telah dibatalkan oleh jumlah yang lebih besar yang menjadi utang Filemon kepada Paulus, yaitu nyawa Filemon sendiri. Alasan mengapa Filemon berhutang nyawa kepada Paulus dapat dijelaskan secara eksplisit. Terjemahan alternatif: “Kamu bahkan berhutang nyawa kepadaku” atau ‘kamu berhutang lebih banyak lagi kepadaku karena aku telah menyelamatkan nyawamu’ atau ”kamu berhutang nyawa kepadaku karena aku telah memberitahukan kepadamu tentang Yesus” +1:20 mw03 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀδελφέ 1 Di sini, **saudara** adalah metafora untuk sesama orang percaya. Terjemahan alternatif: “saudara rohani” atau ”saudara di dalam Kristus” +1:20 cqd0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 Perhatikan bagaimana Anda menerjemahkan kata **di dalam Tuhan** dalam ayat 16. Metafora ini mengacu pada menjadi orang percaya kepada Yesus dan artinya sama dengan **di dalam Kristus**. Terjemahan alternatif: “sebagaimana kamu melayani Tuhan” atau ”karena kita adalah sesama orang percaya di dalam Tuhan” +1:20 xp0b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀνάπαυσόν μου τὰ σπλάγχνα ἐν Χριστῷ 1 Bagaimana Paulus ingin Filemon menyegarkan dirinya dapat dilihat secara eksplisit. Terjemahan alternatif: “Segarkanlah batin saya di dalam Kristus dengan menerima Onesimus dengan baik” +1:20 j8lh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀνάπαυσόν μου τὰ σπλάγχνα 1 Di sini, **menyegarkan** adalah metafora untuk menghibur atau menyemangati. Terjemahan alternatif: “menyemangati saya” atau ”menghibur saya” +1:20 kmpp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀνάπαυσόν μου τὰ σπλάγχνα 1 Di sini, **bagian dalam** adalah metonim untuk perasaan, pikiran, atau batin seseorang. Terjemahan alternatif: “ menyemangati ku” atau “menghiburku” +1:21 azje rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πεποιθὼς τῇ ὑπακοῇ σου 1 Jika akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat mengekspresikan ide di balik kata benda abstrak **kepercayaan diri** dan **ketaatan** dengan kata kerja. Terjemahan alternatif: “Karena saya yakin bahwa Anda akan taat” +1:21 lxxi ἔγραψά σοι 1 Paulus menggunakan bentuk lampau di sini karena tindakan menulisnya terjadi di masa lalu ketika Filemon membaca suratnya. Gunakan bentuk kata kerja yang paling alami dalam bahasa Anda. Terjemahan alternatif: “Aku menulis kepadamu” +1:22 xpn6 rc://*/ta/man/checking/headings Connecting Statement: 0 # Pernyataan Penghubung:\r\n\r\nDi sini Paulus menutup suratnya dan memberikan instruksi terakhir kepada Filemon serta berkat bagi Filemon dan orang-orang percaya yang berkumpul untuk beribadah di rumah Filemon. Jika Anda menggunakan judul bagian, Anda dapat meletakkannya di sini sebelum ayat 22. Judul yang disarankan: “ Berkat dan Perintah Terakhir” +1:22 bx62 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ἅμα 1 Kata yang diterjemahkan **pada saat yang sama** menunjukkan bahwa Paulus ingin Filemon melakukan sesuatu yang lain untuknya sementara ia melakukan hal yang pertama. Anda dapat memperjelas hal ini dalam terjemahan Anda dengan kata atau frasa penghubung yang tepat. Terjemahan alternatif: “sambil melakukan hal itu” atau ”sebagai tambahan untuk itu” +1:22 ctr4 χαρισθήσομαι ὑμῖν 1 Terjemahan alternatif: “Mereka yang menahan saya di penjara akan membebaskan saya sehingga saya dapat pergi kepadamu.” +1:22 mzr0 ἑτοίμαζέ μοι ξενίαν 1 Kata yang diterjemahkan **kamar tamu** mengacu pada setiap keramahan yang disediakan untuk tamu. Jadi, jenis ruangnya tidak ditentukan. Terjemahan alternatif: “Siapkan juga sebuah tempat di rumahmu untukku.” +1:22 lnw9 διὰ τῶν προσευχῶν ὑμῶν 1 Terjemahan alternatif: “Tuhan akan menjawab doa-doamu sehingga” +1:22 p2u0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive χαρισθήσομαι ὑμῖν. 1 Jika akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat mengekspresikannya secara eksplisit dengan bentuk aktif. Terjemahan alternatif: “Allah akan membawa aku kembali kepadamu” atau “mereka yang menahanku di penjara akan membebaskanku sehingga aku dapat datang kepadamu.” +1:22 o06s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ὑμῶν & ὑμῖν 1 Kata **kamu** dan **engkau** di sini berbentuk jamak, merujuk kepada Filemon dan semua orang percaya yang bertemu di rumahnya. 1:23 x2d8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἐπαφρᾶς 1 **Epafras** adalah nama seorang pria yang merupakan rekan seiman dan tahanan bersama Paulus. -1:23 f0b6 ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 fdDi sini, **di dalam Kristus Yesus** berarti sesuatu yang mirip dengan frasa "di dalam Tuhan" dan "di dalam Kristus" dalam ayat 20. Lihat bagaimana Anda menerjemahkannya di sana. Terjemahan alternatif: "yang ada di sini bersamaku karena ia melayani Kristus Yesus" -1:24 i5gc rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Μᾶρκος, Ἀρίσταρχος, Δημᾶς, Λουκᾶς 1 Ini adalah nama-nama laki-laki. -1:24 uc6n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis Μᾶρκος, Ἀρίσταρχος, Δημᾶς, Λουκᾶς 1 Paulus meninggalkan beberapa kata di sini yang dibutuhkan oleh sebuah kalimat dalam banyak bahasa untuk menjadi lengkap. Jika itu akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat menyediakan kata-kata ini dari konteksnya. Terjemahan alternatif: "Demikian juga Markus, Aristarkhus, Demas dan Lukas, teman-teman sekerjaku" atau "Markus, Aristarkhus, Demas dan Lukas, teman-teman sekerjaku, juga memberi salam kepadamu" -1:24 gf6e οἱ συνεργοί μου 1 Terjemahan alternatif: "orang-orang yang bekerja dengan saya" atau "yang semuanya bekerja dengan saya." -1:25 apvl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche μετὰ τοῦ πνεύματος ὑμῶν 1 Kata-kata "roh kalian" adalah sebuah kiasan dan mewakili orang-orang itu sendiri. Paulus merujuk kepada Filemon dan semua orang yang bertemu di rumahnya. -1:25 e35h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Jika akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat mengekspresikan ide di balik kata benda abstrak **anugerah** dengan kata sifat atau kata kerja. Terjemahan alternatif: "Semoga Tuhan kita Yesus Kristus bermurah hati kepadamu dan" atau "Semoga Tuhan kita Yesus Kristus berbaik hati kepadamu dan" -1:25 jou6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ὑμῶν 1 Kata **kamu** di sini berbentuk jamak dan merujuk kepada Filemon dan semua orang yang bertemu di rumahnya. Terjemahan alternatif: "roh kalian" \ No newline at end of file +1:23 f0b6 ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Di sini, **di dalam Kristus Yesus** berarti sesuatu yang mirip dengan frasa “di dalam Tuhan” dan “di dalam Kristus” dalam ayat 20. Lihat bagaimana Anda menerjemahkannya di sana. Terjemahan alternatif: “yang ada di sini bersamaku karena ia melayani Kristus Yesus” +1:24 i5gc rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Μᾶρκος, Ἀρίσταρχος, Δημᾶς, Λουκᾶς 1 Ini adalah nama-nama pria. +1:24 uc6n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis Μᾶρκος, Ἀρίσταρχος, Δημᾶς, Λουκᾶς 1 Paulus meninggalkan beberapa kata di sini yang dibutuhkan oleh sebuah kalimat dalam banyak bahasa untuk menjadi lengkap. Jika itu akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat menyediakan kata-kata ini dari konteksnya. Terjemahan alternatif: “Demikian juga Markus, Aristarkhus, Demas dan Lukas, teman-teman sekerjaku” atau ”Markus, Aristarkhus, Demas dan Lukas, teman-teman sekerjaku, juga memberi salam kepadamu” +1:24 gf6e οἱ συνεργοί μου 1 Terjemahan alternatif: “orang-orang yang bekerja dengan saya” atau “ semua yang bekerja dengan saya.” +1:25 apvl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche μετὰ τοῦ πνεύματος ὑμῶν 1 Kata-kata “rohmu” adalah sebuah sinekdoki dan mewakili orang-orang itu sendiri. Paulus merujuk kepada Filemon dan semua orang yang bertemu di rumahnya. +1:25 e35h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Jika akan membantu dalam bahasa Anda, Anda dapat mengekspresikan ide di balik kata benda abstrak **anugerah** dengan kata sifat atau kata kerja. Terjemahan alternatif: “Semoga Tuhan kita Yesus Kristus bermurah hati kepadamu dan” atau ”Semoga Tuhan kita Yesus Kristus berbaik hati kepadamu dan” +1:25 jou6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ὑμῶν 1 Kata **kamu** di sini berbentuk jamak dan merujuk kepada Filemon dan semua orang yang bertemu di rumahnya. Terjemahan alternatif: “roh-rohmu”